Mechanical engineering and materials Books

Book SynopsisA guide to the theoretical underpinnings and practical applications of chemically reacting flow Chemically Reacting Flow: Theory, Modeling, and Simulation, Second Edition combines fundamental concepts in fluid mechanics and physical chemistry while helping students and professionals to develop the analytical and simulation skills needed to solve real-world engineering problems. The authors clearly explain the theoretical and computational building blocks enabling readers to extend the approaches described to related or entirely new applications. New to this Second Edition are substantially revised and reorganized coverage of topics treated in the first edition. New material in the book includes two important areas of active research: reactive porous-media flows and electrochemical kinetics. These topics create bridges between traditional fluid-flow simulation approaches and transport within porous-media electrochemical systems. The first half of thTable of ContentsPreface xxi Acknowledgments xxv 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Foregoing Texts 2 1.2 Objectives and Approach 3 1.3 What is a Fluid? 3 1.4 Chemically Reacting Fluid Flow 8 1.5 Physical Chemistry 9 1.6 Illustrative Examples 10 References 17 2 Fluid Properties 21 2.1 Equations of State 21 2.2 Thermodynamics 25 2.3 Transport Properties 31 References 42 3 Fluid Kinematics 45 3.1 Path to Conservation Equations 46 3.2 System and Control Volume 48 3.3 Stress and Strain Rate 58 3.4 Fluid Strain Rate 59 3.5 Vorticity 68 3.6 Dilatation 69 3.7 Stress Tensor 70 3.8 Stokes Postulates 79 3.9 Transformation from Principal Coordinates 83 3.10 Stokes Hypothesis 88 3.11 Summary 88 4 Conservation Equations 91 4.1 Mass Continuity 93 4.2 Navier–Stokes Equations 97 4.3 Species Diffusion 104 4.4 Species Conservation 108 4.5 Conservation of Energy 114 4.6 Mechanical Energy 123 4.7 Thermal Energy 124 4.8 Ideal Gas and Incompressible Fluid 130 4.9 Conservation Equation Summary 130 4.10 Pressure Filtering 132 4.11 Helmholtz Decomposition 135 4.12 Potential Flow 136 4.13 Vorticity Transport 137 4.14 Mathematical Characteristics 142 4.15 Summary 148 References 148 5 Parallel Flows 151 5.1 Nondimensionalization 152 5.2 Couette and Poiseuille Flows 154 5.3 Hagen–Poiseuille Flow in a Circular Duct 167 5.4 Ducts of Noncircular Cross Section 170 5.5 Hydrodynamic Entry Length 174 5.6 Transient Flow in a Duct 175 5.7 Richardson Annular Overshoot 175 5.8 Stokes Problems 178 5.9 Rotating Shaft in Infinite Media 188 5.10 Graetz Problem 189 References 193 6 Similarity and Local Similarity 195 6.1 Jeffery–Hamel Flow 196 6.2 Planar Wedge Channel 196 6.3 Radial-Flow Reactors 205 6.4 Spherical Flow between Inclined Disks 206 6.5 Radial Flow between Parallel Disks 209 6.6 Flow between Plates with Wall Injection 214 References 224 7 Stagnation Flows 225 7.1 Similarity in Axisymmetric Stagnation Flow 226 7.2 Generalized Steady Axisymmetric Stagnation Flow 228 7.3 Semi-Infinite Domain 232 7.4 Finite-Gap Stagnation Flow 242 7.5 Finite-Gap Numerical Solution 252 7.6 Rotating Disk 255 7.7 Rotating Disk in a Finite Gap 260 7.8 Unified View of Axisymmetric Stagnation Flow 265 7.9 Planar Stagnation Flows 270 7.10 Opposed Flow 273 7.11 Tubular Flows 274 7.12 Stagnation-Flow Chemical Vapor Deposition 280 7.13 Boundary-Layer Bypass 285 References 287 8 Boundary-layer Channel Flow 291 8.1 Scaling Arguments for Boundary Layers 292 8.2 General Setting Boundary-Layer Equations 298 8.3 Boundary Conditions 299 8.4 Computational Solution 300 8.5 Introduction to the Method of Lines 302 8.6 Method-of-Lines Boundary-Layer Algorithm 304 8.7 Von Mises Transformation 308 8.8 Von Mises Formulation as DAEs 311 8.9 Hydrodynamic Entry Length 314 8.10 Physical and von Mises Coordinates 314 8.11 General von Mises Boundary Layer 315 8.12 Limitations 317 8.13 Chemically Reacting Channel Flow 318 References 319 9 Low-dimensional Reactors 323 9.1 Batch Reactors (Homogeneous Mass-Action Kinetics) 324 9.2 Plug-Flow Reactor 327 9.3 Plug Flow with Porous Walls 331 9.4 Plug Flow with Variable Area and Surface Chemistry 333 9.5 Perfectly Stirred Reactors 338 9.6 Transient Stirred Reactors 341 9.7 Stagnation-Flow Catalytic Reactor 345 References 346 10 Thermochemical Properties 347 10.1 Kinetic Theory of Gases 348 10.2 Molecular Energy Levels 349 10.3 Partition Function 353 10.4 Statistical Thermodynamics 359 10.5 Example Calculations 366 References 369 11 Molecular Transport 371 11.1 Introduction to Transport Coefficients 372 11.2 Molecular Interactions 375 11.3 Kinetic Gas Theory of Transport Properties 384 11.4 Rigorous Theory of Transport Properties 391 11.5 Evaluation of Transport Coefficients 399 11.6 Momentum and Energy Fluxes 406 11.7 Species Fluxes 406 11.8 Diffusive Transport Example 413 References 415 12 Mass-action Kinetics 417 12.1 Gibbs Free Energy 418 12.2 Equilibrium Constant 422 12.3 Mass-Action Kinetics 427 12.4 Pressure-Dependent Unimolecular Reactions 433 12.5 Bimolecular Chemical Activation Reactions 438 References 443 13 Reaction Rate Theories 445 13.1 Molecular Collisions 446 13.2 Collision Theory Reaction Rate Expression 453 13.3 Transition-State Theory 457 13.4 Unimolecular Reactions 461 13.5 Bimolecular Chemical Activation Reactions 474 References 480 14 Reaction Mechanisms 481 14.1 Models for Chemistry 482 14.2 Characteristics of Complex Reactions 486 14.3 Mechanism Development 493 14.4 Combustion Chemistry 503 References 518 15 Laminar Flames 521 15.1 Premixed Flat Flame 521 15.2 Premixed Flame Structure 530 15.3 Methane-Air Premixed Flame 534 15.4 Stagnation Flames 534 15.5 Opposed-Flow Diffusion Flames 536 15.6 Premixed Counterflow Flames 539 15.7 Arc-Length Continuation 543 References 545 16 Heterogeneous Chemistry 549 16.1 Taxonomy 550 16.2 Surface Species Naming Conventions 553 16.3 Concentrations within Phases 555 16.4 Surface Reaction Rate Expressions 557 16.5 Thermodynamic Considerations 565 16.6 General Surface Kinetics Formalism 571 16.7 Surface-Coverage Modification of the Rate Expression 573 16.8 Sticking Coefficients 574 16.9 Flux-Matching Conditions at a Surface 576 16.10 Surface Species Governing Equations 577 16.11 Developing Surface Reaction Mechanisms 578 References 587 17 Reactive Porous Media 589 17.1 Introduction 589 17.2 Pore Characterization 591 17.3 Multicomponent Transport 593 17.4 Mass Conservation Equations 597 17.5 Energy Conservation Equations 598 17.6 Tubular Packed-Bed Reactor 600 17.7 Reconstructed Microstructures 603 17.8 Intra-Particle Pore Diffusion 607 References 609 18 Electrochemistry 613 18.1 Electrochemical Reactions 615 18.2 Electrochemical Potentials 618 18.3 Electrochemical Thermodynamics and Reversible Potentials 618 18.4 Electrochemical Kinetics 621 18.5 Electronic and Ionic Species Transport 632 18.6 Modeling Electrochemical Unit Cells 633 18.7 Principles of Composite SOFC Electrodes 641 18.8 SOFC Button-Cell Example 643 18.9 Chemistry and Model Development 647 References 649 A Vector and Tensor Operations 651 A. 1 Vector Algebra 651 A. 2 Unit Vector Algebra 652 A. 3 Unit Vector Derivatives 653 A. 4 Scalar Product 653 A. 5 Vector Product 654 A. 6 Vector Differentiation 654 A. 7 Gradient 654 A. 8 Gradient of a Vector 655 A. 9 Curl of a Vector 656 A. 10 Divergence of a Vector 656 A. 11 Divergence of a Tensor 657 A. 12 Laplacian 658 A. 13 Laplacian of a Vector 658 A. 14 Vector Derivative Identities 660 A. 15 Gauss Divergence Theorem 661 A. 16 Substantial Derivative 661 A.6. 1 Substantial Derivative of a Vector 662 A. 17 Symmetric Tensors 662 A. 18 Stress Tensor and Stress Vector 663 A. 19 Direction Cosines 664 A. 20 Coordinate Transformations 665 A. 21 Principal Axes 667 A. 22 Tensor Invariants 669 A. 23 Matrix Diagonalization 670 B Navier–stokes Equations 671 B. 1 General Vector Form 671 B. 2 Stress Components 672 B. 3 Cartesian Navier–Stokes Equations 674 B. 4 Cartesian Navier–Stokes, Constant Viscosity 675 B. 5 Cylindrical Navier–Stokes Equations 675 B. 6 Cylindrical Navier–Stokes, Constant Viscosity 676 B. 7 Spherical Navier–Stokes Equations 676 B. 8 Spherical Navier–Stokes, Constant viscosity 677 B. 9 Orthogonal Curvilinear Navier–Stokes 678 C Example in General curvilinear coordinates 681 C.1 Governing Equations 681 C.1.1 Limiting Cases 685 d Small Parameter Expansion 687 E Boundary-layer Asymptotic Behavior 691 E. 1 Boundary-Layer Approximation 692 E. 2 A Prototype for Boundary-Layer Behavior 693 F Computational Algorithms 697 F. 1 Differential Equations from Chemical Kinetics 698 F. 2 Stiff Model Problem 698 F. 3 Solution Methods 700 F.3. 1 Explicit Methods 701 F.3. 2 Implicit Methods 704 F. 3 Stiff ODE Software 707 F. 4 Differential-Algebraic Equations 707 F. 5 Solution of Nonlinear Algebraic Equations 708 F.5. 1 Scalar Newton Algorithm 708 F.5. 2 Newton’s Algorithm for Algebraic Systems 709 F.5. 3 Illustration of the Hybrid Method 712 F.5. 4 Steady-State Sensitivity Analysis 713 F. 6 Continuation Procedures 715 F.6. 1 Multiple Steady States 715 F.6. 2 Illustration of Spurious Solutions 715 F. 7 Transient Sensitivity Analysis 717 F. 8 Transient Ignition Example 719 References 719 G MATLAB Examples 721 G. 1 Steady-State Couette–Poiseuille Flow 721 G. 2 Steady Semi-Infinite Stagnation Flow 723 G. 3 Steady Finite-Gap Stagnation Flow 725 G. 4 Transient Stokes Problem 728 G. 5 Graetz Problem 729 G. 6 Channel Boundary Layer Entrance 731 G. 7 Rectangular Channel Friction Factor 735 Index 739

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe acronym Laser is derived from Light Amplification by Stimulated Emission of Radiation. With the advent of the ruby laser in 1960, there has been tremendous research activity in developing novel, more versatile and more efficient laser sources or devices, as lasers applications are ubiquitous. Today, lasers are used in many areas of human endeavor and are routinely employed in a host of diverse fields: various branches of engineering, microelectronics, biomedical, medicine, dentistry, surgery, surface modification, to name just a few. In this book (containing 10 chapters) we have focused on application of lasers in adhesion and related areas. The topics covered include: Topographical modification of polymers and metals by laser ablation to create superhydrophobic surfaces. Non-ablative laser surface modification. Laser surface modification to enhance adhesion. Laser surface engineering of materials to modulate their wetting behavior.Table of ContentsPreface xiii Part 1: Laser Surface Modification and Adhesion Enhancement 1 1 Topographical Modification of Polymers and Metals by Laser Ablation to Create Superhydrophobic Surfaces 3Frank L. Palmieri and Christopher J. Wohl 1.1 Introduction 3 1.2 Wetting Theory 6 1.3 Laser Ablation Background 12 1.3.1 Ablation Mechanics 12 1.3.2 Ablation in Metals 13 1.3.3 Ablation in Polymers 16 1.4 Preparation of Superhydrophobic Surfaces by Laser Ablation 18 1.4.1 Hydrophobic Organic Substrates 18 1.4.2 Hydrophilic Organic Substrates 26 1.4.3 Hydrophilic Substrates with Hydrophobic Coatings 32 1.4.4 Hydrophilic Inorganic Substrates 43 1.4.4.1 Metallic substrates 44 1.4.4.2 Silicon substrates 51 1.4.4.3 Ceramic Substrates 55 1.5 Summary 56 References 57 2 Nonablative Laser Surface Modification 69Andy Hooper 2.1 Introduction 69 2.2 Part 1 – Nonablative Laser Skin Photorejuvenation 70 2.2.1 Introduction 70 2.2.2 Nonablative Laser-Based Skin Treatments 72 2.2.3 Review of Nonablative Laser-Based Skin Treatments Based on Laser Type 73 2.2.3.1 Lasers Emitting at 532 nm 73 2.2.3.2 Lasers Emitting at 511, 578, 585, and 600 nm Wavelengths 75 2.2.3.3 Lasers Emitting at 780 nm 76 2.2.3.4 Lasers Emitting at 980 nm 76 2.2.3.5 Lasers Emitting at 1064 nm 76 2.2.3.6 Lasers Emitting at 1320 nm 77 2.2.3.7 Lasers Emitting at 1450 nm 78 2.2.3.8 Lasers Emitting at 1540 nm 78 2.2.3.9 Lasers Emitting at 2940 nm 80 2.2.4 Combined Techniques 81 2.2.5 Conclusions for Part 1 – Nonablative Laser Skin Photorejuvenation 81 2.3 Part 2 –Formation of Micro-/Nano-Structures and LIPSS in Materials by Nonablative Laser Processing 82 2.3.1 Introduction 82 2.3.2 Review of Micro-/Nano-Structures and LIPSS 83 2.3.2.1 Micro-/Nano-Structures and LIPSS Formation in Metals 83 2.3.2.2 Micro-/Mano-Structures and LIPSS Formation in Semiconductors 85 2.3.2.3 Micro-/Nano-Structures and LIPSS Formation in Dielectrics 86 2.3.2.4 Micro-/Nano-Structures and LIPSS Formation in Polymers 86 2.3.2.5 Micro-/Nano-Structures and LIPSS Formation in Multiple Materials 87 2.3.3 Part 2 –Conclusion for Formation of Micro-/Nano-Structures and LIPSS in Materials by Nonablative Laser Processing 87 2.4 Part 3 – Nonablative Laser Surface Modification to Alter the Surface Properties of Materials 87 2.4.1 Introduction 88 2.4.2 Examples of Nonablative Laser Surface Modification to Alter the Surface Properties of Materials 88 2.4.3 Conclusions for Part 3 – Nonablative Laser Surface Modification to Alter Surface Properties 92 2.5 Summary 93 References 94 3 Wettability Characteristics of Laser Surface Engineered Polymers 99D.G. Waugh and J. Lawrence 3.1 Introduction 99 3.2 Lasers for Surface Engineering 101 3.2.1 Infrared Lasers for Surface Engineering 101 3.2.2 Ultraviolet Lasers for Surface Engineering 102 3.2.3 Ultrafast Pulsed Lasers for Surface Engineering 104 3.3 Laser Surface-Engineered Topography 105 3.4 Laser Surface-Engineered Wettability 110 3.5 Summary 116 References 117 4 Laser Surface Modification for Adhesion Enhancement 123Wei-Sheng Lei and Kash Mittal 4.1 Introduction 124 4.1.1 Mechanisms or Theories of Adhesion 124 4.1.2 Methods of Surface Modification for Adhesion Enhancement 126 4.2 Basic Mechanisms of Laser Surface Modification 127 4.2.1 Absorption of Laser Radiation in a Material 128 4.2.1.1 Linear Absorption 129 4.2.1.2 Nonlinear Absorption 129 4.2.2 Photo-Chemical Process 130 4.2.3 Photo-Thermal Process 132 4.2.3.1 Conventional Heat Flow Model 132 4.2.3.2 Two-Temperature Model 135 4.2.3.3 Ablation Rate and Ablation Spot Size 137 4.3 Laser Induced Surface Modification of Metal Substrates to Enhance Adhesion 138 4.3.1 Laser Induced Surface Cleaning and Activation for Adhesion Improvement 138 4.3.2 The Dominant Role of Mechanical Interlocking for Adhesion Improvement 141 4.3.3 Laser Surface Patterning 142 4.3.4 Laser Surface Topography Modification to Enhance Adhesion of Hard Coatings on Metals 145 4.3.5 Laser Surface Modification to Enhance Metal-to-Metal Adhesive Bonding 150 4.3.6 Laser Surface Modification of Metal Substrates to Enhance Adhesion of Polymeric Materials 155 4.4 Laser Induced Surface Modification of Polymers and Composites to Enhance Their Adhesion 158 4.4.1 Adhesion Improvement due to Laser Treatment 159 4.4.2 Changes in Surface Morphology of Laser Treated Surfaces 163 4.4.3 Chemical Modification of Laser Treated Surfaces 164 4.5 Summary 167 References 168 5 Laser Surface Modification in Dentistry: Effect on the Adhesion of Restorative Materials 175Regina Guenka Palma-Dibb, Juliana Jendiroba Faraoni, Walter Raucci-Neto and Alessandro Dibb 5.1 Introduction 175 5.2 Dental Structures 180 5.3 Adhesion of Restorative Materials 185 5.4 Laser Light Interaction with the Dental Substrate 190 5.5 Dental Structure Ablation and Influence on Bond Strength of Restorative Materials 193 5.6 Summary 200 5.7 Prospects 200 References 200 Part 2: Other Applications 209 6 Laser Polymer Welding 211Rolf Klein 6.1 Introduction to Laser Polymer Welding 211 6.2 Theoretical Background 213 6.2.1 Reflection, Transmission and Absorption Behaviors 213 6.2.2 Heat Generation and Dissipation 226 6.2.3 Laser Welding Processes 239 6.3 Factors Affecting Polymer Laser Welding 242 6.3.1 Types of Processes for TTLW 242 6.3.2 Adapting Absorption to Welding Process 250 6.3.3 Design of Joint Geometry 255 6.4 Practical Applications 257 6.5 Testing and Quality Control 261 6.6 Future Prospects 263 6.7 Summary 263 Acknowledgements 263 References 266 7 Laser Based Adhesion Testing Technique to Measure Thin Film-Substrate Interface Toughness 269Soma Sekhar V. Kandula 7.1 Introduction 270 7.2 Modification of Laser Spallation Technique to Measure Thin Film-Substrate Interface Fracture Toughness 275 7.2.1 Sample Preparation 277 7.2.2 Experimental Procedure and Analysis 278 7.3 Parametric Studies 283 7.3.1 Effect of Test Film Thickness 284 7.3.2 Effect of Amplitude of the Stress Pulse 285 7.3.3 Effect of Shape of the Stress Pulse 286 7.3.4 Effect of Thin Film Properties 286 7.3.5 Effect of Thin Film Inertial Layer 288 7.3.6 Effect of Amplitude and Gradient of Residual Stresses on the Thin Film Delamination 289 7.4 Validation of Dynamic Delamination Protocol 290 7.5 Summary 294 References 294 8 Laser Induced Thin Film Debonding for Micro-Device Fabrication Applications 299Wei-Sheng Lei and Zhishui Yu 8.1 Introduction 299 8.2 The Mechanism of Laser Induced Debonding (LID) 301 8.3 Thin Film Patterning by Laser Induced Forward Transfer 306 8.3.1 Background 306 8.3.2 Thin Film Transfer Mechanisms in a LIFT Process 308 8.4 GaN Film Lift-Off for High-Brightness LEDs and High Power Electronics 309 8.4.1 Background 309 8.4.2 The Laser Lift-Off Process 311 8.5 Dielectric Passivation Layer Opening for Interconnect Formation in Crystalline Silicon Solar Cells 313 8.5.1 Background 313 8.5.2 Laser Process for Making Local Contact Openings 314 8.6 Laser Induced Wafer Debonding for Advanced Packaging Applications 316 8.6.1 Background 316 8.6.2 The Laser Induced Wafer Debonding Process 318 8.7 Summary 319 References 320 9 Laser Surface Cleaning: Removal of Hard Thin Ceramic Coatings 325S. Marimuthu, A.M. Kamara, M F Rajemi, D. Whitehead, P. Mativenga and L. Li 9.1 Introduction 326 9.2 Chemical Etching of Hard Thin Coatings 328 9.3 Typical Experimental Set-up for Excimer Laser Removal of Thin Coatings 328 9.4 Experimental Results on Excimer Laser Removal of Thin Coatings 329 9.4.1 Laser Removal of Titanium Nitride from Tungsten Carbide 329 9.4.1.1 Removal of Titanium Nitride from Tungsten Carbide Cutting Insert 329 9.4.1.2 Removal of Titanium Nitride from Tungsten Carbide Micro-Tool 332 9.4.2 Laser Removal of Titanium Aluminium Nitride from Tungsten Carbide 338 9.4.3 Laser Removal of CrTiAlN Coatings from High Speed Steel 345 9.5 Online Monitoring of Laser Coating Removal Process 354 9.5.1 Online Monitoring Using Probe Beam Reflection (PBR) System 355 9.5.2 Online Monitoring Using Laser Plume Emission Spectroscopy 357 9.6 Discussion of Excimer Laser Coating Removal Mechanisms 358 9.7 Finite Element Modelling of Excimer Laser Removal of Thin Coatings 362 9.8 Performance Evaluation of Laser Decoated Mechanical Tool 366 9.8.1 Evaluation of Wear Performance 366 9.8.2 Surface Roughness of Machined Parts 367 9.8.3 Environmental Footprints in Cutting 368 9.8.4 Energy Consumption and Footprints for Laser Decoating 370 9.8.5 Comparison of the Energy Footprints for the Different Steps 371 9.9 Summary 372 Acknowledgments 373 References 373 10 Laser Removal of Particles from Surfaces 379Changho Seo, Hyesung Shin and Dongsik Kim 10.1 Introduction 380 10.2 Dry Laser Cleaning (DLC) 382 10.3 Steam Laser Cleaning (SLC) 386 10.4 Laser Shock Cleaning (LSC) 395 10.5 Novel Laser Cleaning Techniques 400 10.5.1 Matrix Laser Cleaning (MLC) 400 10.5.2 Wet Laser Cleaning (WLC) 401 10.5.3 Wet Laser Shock Cleaning (WLSC) 402 10.5.4 Combination of DLC and LSC 402 10.5.5 Combination of LSC and SLC 402 10.5.6 Laser-Induced Thermocapillary Cleaning 403 10.5.7 Droplet Opto-Hydrodynamic Cleaning (DOC) 403 10.6 Summary 404 Acknowledgements 407 References 408 Index 417

Read more less

Book SynopsisAutomotive Aerodynamics Joseph Katz, San Diego State University, USA The automobile is an icon of modern technology because it includes most aspects of modern engineering, and it offers an exciting approach to engineering education.Trade Review"This is where the book by Katz excels and the fundamental fluid principles are extensively covered undera vehicle aerodynamics title"...."Katz’s book will make a prime choice textbook for an undergraduate Automotive Engineering course, as fluid related modules in various academic years can cover the topicspresented in various chapters of the book" Remus Cîrstea, Course Director MSc Automotive Engineering, Lecturer in Fluid Dynamics, Coventry University on behalf of The Aeronautical Jornal, Oct 2017Table of ContentsSeries Preface xii Preface xiv 1 Introduction and Basic Principles 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Aerodynamics as a Subset of Fluid Dynamics 2 1.3 Dimensions and Units 3 1.4 Automobile/Vehicle Aerodynamics 5 1.5 General Features of Fluid Flow 9 1.5.1 Continuum 10 1.5.2 Laminar and Turbulent Flow 11 1.5.3 Attached and Separated Flow 12 1.6 Properties of Fluids 13 1.6.1 Density 13 1.6.2 Pressure 14 1.6.3 Temperature 14 1.6.4 Viscosity 16 1.6.5 Specific Heat 19 1.6.6 Heat Transfer Coefficient, k 19 1.6.7 Modulus of Elasticity, E 20 1.6.8 Vapor Pressure 22 1.7 Advanced Topics: Fluid Properties and the Kinetic Theory of Gases 23 1.8 Summary and Concluding Remarks 26 Reference 27 Problems 27 2 The Fluid Dynamic Equations 35 2.1 Introduction 35 2.2 Description of Fluid Motion 36 2.3 Choice of Coordinate System 38 2.4 Pathlines, Streak Lines, and Streamlines 39 2.5 Forces in a Fluid 40 2.6 Integral Form of the Fluid Dynamic Equations 43 2.7 Differential Form of the Fluid Dynamic Equations 50 2.8 The Material Derivative 57 2.9 Alternate Derivation of the Fluid Dynamic Equations 59 2.10 Example for an Analytic Solution: Two-Dimensional, Inviscid Incompressible, Vortex Flow 62 2.10.1 Velocity Induced by a Straight Vortex Segment 65 2.10.2 Angular Velocity, Vorticity, and Circulation 66 2.11 Summary and Concluding Remarks 69 References 72 Problems 72 3 One-Dimensional (Frictionless) Flow 81 3.1 Introduction 81 3.2 The Bernoulli Equation 82 3.3 Summary of One-Dimensional Tools 84 3.4 Applications of the One-Dimensional Friction-Free Flow Model 85 3.4.1 Free Jets 85 3.4.2 Examples for Using the Bernoulli Equation 89 3.4.3 Simple Models for Time-Dependent Changes in a Control Volume 93 3.5 Flow Measurements (Based on Bernoulli’s Equation) 96 3.5.1 The Pitot Tube 96 3.5.2 The Venturi Tube 98 3.5.3 The Orifice 100 3.5.4 Nozzles and Injectors 101 3.6 Summary and Conclusions 102 3.6.1 Concluding Remarks 103 Problems 104 4 Dimensional Analysis, High Reynolds Number Flows, and Definition of Aerodynamics 122 4.1 Introduction 122 4.2 Dimensional Analysis of the Fluid Dynamic Equations 123 4.3 The Process of Simplifying the Governing Equations 126 4.4 Similarity of Flows 127 4.5 High Reynolds Number Flow and Aerodynamics 129 4.6 High Reynolds Number Flows and Turbulence 133 4.7 Summary and Conclusions 136 References 136 Problems 136 5 The Laminar Boundary Layer 141 5.1 Introduction 141 5.2 Two-Dimensional Laminar Boundary Layer Model – The Integral Approach 143 5.3 Solutions using the von Kármán Integral Equation 147 5.4 Summary and Practical Conclusions 156 5.5 Effect of Pressure Gradient 161 5.6 Advanced Topics: The Two-Dimensional Laminar Boundary Layer Equations 164 5.6.1 Summary of the Exact Blasius Solution for the Laminar Boundary Layer 167 5.7 Concluding Remarks 169 References 170 Problems 170 6 High Reynolds Number Incompressible Flow Over Bodies: Automobile Aerodynamics 176 6.1 Introduction 176 6.2 The Inviscid Irrotational Flow (and Some Math) 178 6.3 Advanced Topics: A More Detailed Evaluation of the Bernoulli Equation 181 6.4 The Potential Flow Model 183 6.4.1 Methods for Solving the Potential Flow Equations 183 6.4.2 The Principle of Superposition 184 6.5 Two-Dimensional Elementary Solutions 184 6.5.1 Polynomial Solutions 185 6.5.2 Two-Dimensional Source (or Sink) 187 6.5.3 Two-Dimensional Doublet 190 6.5.4 Two-Dimensional Vortex 193 6.5.5 Advanced Topics: Solutions Based on Green’s Identity 196 6.6 Superposition of a Doublet and a Free-Stream: Flow Over a Cylinder 199 6.7 Fluid Mechanic Drag 204 6.7.1 The Drag of Simple Shapes 205 6.7.2 The Drag of More Complex Shapes 210 6.8 Periodic Vortex Shedding 215 6.9 The Case for Lift 218 6.9.1 A Cylinder with Circulation in a Free Stream 218 6.9.2 Two-Dimensional Flat Plate at a Small Angle of Attack (in a Free Stream) 222 6.9.3 Note About the Center of Pressure 224 6.10 Lifting Surfaces: Wings and Airfoils 225 6.10.1 The Two-Dimensional Airfoil 226 6.10.2 An Airfoil’s Lift 228 6.10.3 An Airfoil’s Drag 229 6.10.4 An Airfoil Stall 231 6.10.5 The Effect of Reynolds Number 232 6.10.6 Three-Dimensional Wings 233 6.11 Summary of High Reynolds Number Aerodynamics 248 6.12 Concluding Remarks 249 References 249 Problems 250 7 Automotive Aerodynamics: Examples 262 7.1 Introduction 262 7.2 Generic Trends (For Most Vehicles) 263 7.2.1 Ground Effect 264 7.2.2 Generic Automobile Shapes and Vortex Flows 265 7.3 Downforce and Vehicle Performance 269 7.4 How to Generate Downforce 274 7.5 Tools used for Aerodynamic Evaluations 274 7.5.1 Example for Aero Data Collection: Wind Tunnels 276 7.5.2 Wind Tunnel Wall/Floor Interference 279 7.5.3 Simulation of Moving Ground 281 7.5.4 Expected Results of CFD, Road, or Wind Tunnel Tests (and Measurement Techniques) 283 7.6 Variable (Adaptive) Aerodynamic Devices 286 7.7 Vehicle Examples 291 7.7.1 Passenger Cars 292 7.7.2 Pickup Trucks 298 7.7.3 Motorcycles 299 7.7.4 Competition Cars (Enclosed Wheel) 302 7.7.5 Open-Wheel Racecars 306 7.8 Concluding Remarks 312 References 314 Problems 314 8 Introduction to Computational Fluid Mechanics (CFD) 316 8.1 Introduction 316 8.2 The Finite-Difference Formulation 317 8.3 Discretization and Grid Generation 320 8.4 The Finite-Difference Equation 321 8.5 The Solution: Convergence and Stability 324 8.6 The Finite-Volume Method 326 8.7 Example: Viscous Flow Over a Cylinder 328 8.8 Potential-Flow Solvers: Panel Methods 331 8.9 Summary 335 References 337 Problems 337 9 Viscous Incompressible Flow: “Exact Solutions” 339 9.1 Introduction 339 9.2 The Viscous Incompressible Flow Equations (Steady State) 340 9.3 Laminar Flow between Two Infinite Parallel Plates: The Couette Flow 340 9.3.1 Flow with a Moving Upper Surface 342 9.3.2 Flow between Two Infinite Parallel Plates: The Results 343 9.3.3 Flow between Two Infinite Parallel Plates – The Poiseuille Flow 347 9.3.4 The Hydrodynamic Bearing (Reynolds Lubrication Theory) 351 9.4 Flow in Circular Pipes (The Hagen-Poiseuille Flow) 359 9.5 Fully Developed Laminar Flow between Two Concentric Circular Pipes 364 9.6 Laminar Flow between Two Concentric, Rotating Circular Cylinders 366 9.7 Flow in Pipes: Darcy’s Formula 370 9.8 The Reynolds Dye Experiment, Laminar/Turbulent Flow in Pipes 371 9.9 Additional Losses in Pipe Flow 374 9.10 Summary of 1D Pipe Flow 375 9.10.1 Simple Pump Model 378 9.10.2 Flow in Pipes with Noncircular Cross Sections 379 9.10.3 Examples for One-Dimensional Pipe Flow 381 9.10.4 Network of Pipes 391 9.11 Free Vortex in a Pool 394 9.12 Summary and Concluding Remarks 397 Reference 397 Problems 397 10 Fluid Machinery 411 10.1 Introduction 411 10.2 Work of a Continuous-Flow Machine 415 10.3 The Axial Compressor (The Mean Radius Model) 417 10.3.1 Velocity Triangles 421 10.3.2 Power and Compression Ratio Calculations 424 10.3.3 Radial Variations 429 10.3.4 Pressure Rise Limitations 431 10.3.5 Performance Envelope of Compressors and Pumps 434 10.3.6 Degree of Reaction 441 10.4 The Centrifugal Compressor (or Pump) 446 10.4.1 Torque, Power, and Pressure Rise 447 10.4.2 Impeller Geometry 450 10.4.3 The Diffuser 454 10.4.4 Concluding Remarks: Axial versus Centrifugal Design 457 10.5 Axial Turbines 458 10.5.1 Torque, Power, and Pressure Drop 459 10.5.2 Axial Turbine Geometry and Velocity Triangles 461 10.5.3 Turbine Degree of Reaction 464 10.5.4 Turbochargers (for Internal Combustion Engines) 473 10.5.5 Remarks on Exposed Tip Rotors (Wind Turbines and Propellers) 474 10.6 Concluding Remarks 478 Reference 478 Problems 478 11 Elements of Heat Transfer 485 11.1 Introduction 485 11.2 Elementary Mechanisms of Heat Transfer 486 11.2.1 Conductive Heat Transfer 486 11.2.2 Convective Heat Transfer 489 11.2.3 Radiation Heat Transfer 491 11.3 Heat Conduction 495 11.3.1 Steady One-Dimensional Heat Conduction 497 11.3.2 Combined Heat Transfer 499 11.3.3 Heat Conduction in Cylinders 502 11.3.4 Cooling Fins 506 11.4 Heat Transfer by Convection 515 11.4.1 The Flat Plate Model 516 11.4.2 Formulas for Forced External Heat Convection 520 11.4.3 Formulas for Forced Internal Heat Convection 526 11.4.4 Formulas for Free (Natural) Heat Convection 529 11.5 Heat Exchangers 534 11.6 Concluding Remarks 536 References 539 Problems 539 12 Automobile Aero-Acoustics 544 12.1 Introduction 544 12.2 Sound as a Pressure Wave 546 12.3 Sound Loudness Scale 549 12.4 The Human Ear Perception 552 12.5 The One-Dimensional Linear Wave Equation 553 12.6 Sound Radiation, Transmission, Reflection, Absorption 556 12.6.1 Sound Wave Expansion (Radiation) 556 12.6.2 Reflections, Transmission, Absorption 559 12.6.3 Standing Wave (Resonance), Interference, and Noise Cancellations 560 12.7 Vortex Sound 561 12.8 Example: Sound from a Shear Layer 564 12.9 Buffeting 568 12.10 Experimental Examples for Sound Generation on a Typical Automobile 574 12.11 Sound and Flow Control 576 12.12 Concluding Remarks 577 References 578 Problems 578 Appendix A 581 Appendix B 583 Index 589

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe Ceramic Engineering and Science Proceeding has been published by The American Ceramic Society since 1980. This series contains a collection of papers dealing with issues in both traditional ceramics (i.e. , glass, whitewares, refractories, and porcelain enamel) and advanced ceramics.

Read more less

Book SynopsisDesign Optimization of Fluid Machinery: Applying Computational Fluid Dynamics and Numerical Optimization Drawing on extensive research and experience, this timely reference brings together numerical optimization methods for fluid machinery and its key industrial applications. It logically lays out the context required to understand computational fluid dynamics by introducing the basics of fluid mechanics, fluid machines and their components. Readers are then introduced to single and multi-objective optimization methods, automated optimization, surrogate models, and evolutionary algorithms. Finally, design approaches and applications in the areas of pumps, turbines, compressors, and other fluid machinery systems are clearly explained, with special emphasis on renewable energy systems. Written by an international team of leading experts in the field Brings together optimization methods using computational fluid dynamics for fluid machiTable of ContentsPreface xiii 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Fluid Machinery: Classification and Characteristics 2 1.3 Analysis of Fluid Machinery 4 1.4 Design of Fluid Machinery 7 1.4.1 Design Requirements 7 1.4.2 Determination of Meanline Parameters 7 1.4.3 Meanline Analysis 8 1.4.4 3D Blade Design 8 1.4.5 Quasi 3D Through-Flow Analysis 8 1.4.6 Full 3D Flow Analysis 8 1.4.7 Design Optimization 8 1.5 Design Optimization of Turbomachinery 9 References 10 2 Fluid Mechanics and Computational Fluid Dynamics 11 2.1 Basic Fluid Mechanics 11 2.1.1 Introduction 11 2.1.2 Classification of Fluid Flow 11 2.1.2.1 Based on Viscosity 12 2.1.2.2 Based on Compressibility 12 2.1.2.3 Based on Flow Speed (Mach Number) 12 2.1.2.4 Based on Flow Regime 13 2.1.2.5 Based on Number of Phases 14 2.1.3 One-, Two-, and Three-Dimensional Flows 14 2.1.3.1 One-Dimensional Flow 15 2.1.3.2 Two- and Three-Dimensional Flow 15 2.1.4 External Fluid Flow 15 2.1.5 The Boundary Layer 15 2.1.5.1 Transition from Laminar to Turbulent Flow 16 2.2 Computational Fluid Dynamics (CFD) 16 2.2.1 CFD and its Application in Turbomachinery 17 2.2.1.1 Advantages of Using CFD 18 2.2.1.2 Limitations of CFD in Turbomachinery 18 2.2.2 Basic Steps Involved in CFD Analysis 19 2.2.2.1 Problem Statement 19 2.2.2.2 Mathematical Model 19 2.2.3 Governing Equations 19 2.2.3.1 Mass Conservation 20 2.2.3.2 Momentum Conservation 20 2.2.3.3 Energy Conservation 21 2.2.4 Turbulence Modeling 21 2.2.4.1 What is Turbulence? 22 2.2.4.2 Need for Turbulence Modeling 22 2.2.4.3 Reynolds-Averaged Navier–Stokes Equations 22 2.2.4.4 Turbulence Closure Models 23 2.2.4.5 Large Eddy Simulation (LES) 27 2.2.4.6 Direct Numerical Simulation (DNS) 27 2.2.5 Boundary Conditions 27 2.2.5.1 Inlet/Outlet Boundary Conditions 28 2.2.5.2 Wall Boundary Conditions 28 2.2.5.3 Periodic/Cyclic Boundary Conditions 28 2.2.5.4 Symmetry Boundary Conditions 29 2.2.6 Moving Reference Frame (MRF) 29 2.2.7 Verification and Validation 30 2.2.8 Commercial CFD Software 30 2.2.9 Open Source Codes 31 2.2.9.1 OpenFOAM 31 References 32 3 Optimization Methodology 35 3.1 Introduction 35 3.1.1 Engineering Optimization Definition 36 3.1.2 Design Space 36 3.1.3 Design Variables and Objectives 37 3.1.4 Optimization Procedure 40 3.1.5 Search Algorithm 40 3.2 Multi-Objective Optimization (MOO) 41 3.2.1 Weighted Sum Approach 42 3.2.2 Pareto-Optimal Front 42 3.3 Constrained, Unconstrained, and Discrete Optimization 43 3.3.1 Constrained Optimization 43 3.3.2 Unconstrained Optimization 44 3.3.3 Discrete Optimization 44 3.4 Surrogate Modeling 44 3.4.1 Overview 44 3.4.2 Optimization Procedure 44 3.4.3 Surrogate Modeling Approach 44 3.4.3.1 Response Surface Approximation (RSA) Model 45 3.4.3.2 Artificial Neural Network (ANN) Model 46 3.4.3.3 Kriging Model (KRG) Model 47 3.4.3.4 PRESS-Based-Averaging (PBA) Model 47 3.4.3.5 Simple Average (SA) Model 48 3.5 Error Estimation 49 3.5.1 General Errors When Simulating and Optimizing a Turbomachinery System 49 3.5.2 Error Estimation in Surrogate Modeling 52 3.5.3 Sensitivity Analysis 55 3.5.3.1 Number of Variables and Performance Improvement 55 3.5.3.2 Example of Sensitivity Analysis 56 3.6 Sampling Technique 57 3.6.1 Sampling 57 3.6.2 Sample Size 57 3.6.3 Design Space 57 3.6.4 Dimensionality Curse 57 3.6.5 Design of Experiments (DOE) 57 3.6.6 Full Factorial Design 58 3.6.7 Latin Hypercube Sampling (LHS) 58 3.7 Optimizers 59 3.8 Multidisciplinary Design Optimization 59 3.8.1 What is Multidisciplinary Optimization? 59 3.8.2 Gradient-Based Methods 60 3.8.3 Non-Gradient-Based Methods 60 3.8.4 Recent MDO Methods 60 3.9 Inverse Design 60 3.9.1 Inverse Design versus Direct Design 60 3.9.2 Direct Design Optimization with CFD 61 3.9.3 Inverse Design Optimization with CFD 61 3.10 Automated Optimization 61 3.10.1 Coupling Method with Adjoint CFD 63 3.10.2 Case Studies 63 3.10.2.1 CFD-Based Design Automated Design Optimization for Hydro Turbines 63 3.10.2.2 AO with OPAL++ 65 3.10.2.3 PADRAM: Parametric Design and Rapid Meshing System for Turbomachinery Optimization 65 3.10.2.4 Problems of AO 66 3.11 Conclusions 68 References 68 4 Optimization of Industrial Fluid Machinery 71 4.1 Pumps 71 4.1.1 Centrifugal, Mixed-Flow, and Axial-Flow Pumps 71 4.1.1.1 Centrifugal (or Radial) Pumps 71 4.1.1.2 Mixed-Flow and Axial-Flow Pumps 72 4.1.2 Parametric Shape Models and Flow Solvers for Pump Optimization 73 4.1.2.1 1D Models 73 4.1.2.2 2D Models 82 4.1.2.3 3D Models 88 4.2 Compressors and Turbines 98 4.2.1 Axial, Radial, Multistage Compressors 98 4.2.2 Parametric Shape Models and Flow Solvers for Axial Compressor Optimization 99 4.2.2.1 1D Models 99 4.2.2.2 2D Models 100 4.2.2.3 Advanced Throughflow Design Techniques (2D) 101 4.2.2.4 Streamline Curvature Methods 102 4.2.2.5 Advanced Cascade Design Techniques (2D-Quasi-3D) 105 4.2.2.6 Geometry Definition and Parameterization 107 4.2.2.7 Flow Solvers 111 4.2.2.8 3D Methods 114 4.2.3 Radial Compressor Optimization 117 4.2.3.1 3D Models 118 4.2.3.2 CFD Analysis 121 4.2.3.3 Multi-Objective Optimization Problem and Results 122 4.2.4 Turbines 124 4.2.4.1 Axial-Flow Turbines 126 4.2.4.2 Outflow and Inflow Turbines 126 4.2.4.3 Axial 1D 127 4.2.4.4 Case Study: Multi-Point Optimization of an Axial Turbine Stage 131 4.2.4.5 Axial 2D 135 4.2.4.6 CFD Models: Implementation and Validation 135 4.2.4.7 Case Study: Description, Geometry Parametrization, and Meshing 138 4.2.4.8 Results 140 4.2.4.9 RSM 142 4.2.4.10 SQP 142 4.3 Fans 146 4.3.1 Centrifugal, Axial-Flow, Mixed-Flow, and Cross-Flow Fans 146 4.3.1.1 Axial-Flow Fans 146 4.3.1.2 Centrifugal Fans 147 4.3.1.3 Mixed-Flow Fans 148 4.3.1.4 Cross-Flow Fans 149 4.3.2 Fan Pressure, Efficiency, and Laws 149 4.3.3 Aerodynamic Analysis of Fans 151 4.3.3.1 Axial-Flow Fans 151 4.3.3.2 Centrifugal Fans 160 4.3.4 Optimization Problems and Algorithms Used for Fan Optimization 171 4.3.4.1 Axial-Flow Fans 171 4.3.4.2 Axial-Flow Fans 175 4.3.4.3 Centrifugal Fans 184 4.4 Hydraulic Turbines 192 4.4.1 Introduction 192 4.4.2 Cavitation in Hydraulic Turbines 195 4.4.3 Analysis of Hydraulic Turbines 200 4.4.3.1 Francis Turbines 200 4.4.3.2 Kaplan Turbines 207 4.4.3.3 Pump-Turbines 210 4.4.4 Optimization of Hydraulic Turbines 213 4.4.4.1 Kaplan Turbines 213 4.4.4.2 Francis Turbines 216 4.4.4.3 Draft Tubes and Others 223 4.4.4.4 Pump-Turbines 224 4.5 Others 226 4.5.1 Regenerative Blowers 226 4.5.2 Others 232 References 240 5 Optimization of Fluid Machinery for Renewable Energy Systems 257 5.1 Wind Energy 257 5.1.1 Optimization of Horizontal-Axis Wind Turbines 259 5.1.2 Blade Element Methods 260 5.1.3 Turbine Parameterization 261 5.1.4 Strategies for Rotor Optimization 264 5.2 Ocean Energy 264 5.2.1 Temperature Gradients 266 5.2.2 Tides and Tidal Currents 266 5.2.3 Salinity Gradients 266 5.2.4 Waves 266 5.3 Energy Extraction from Ocean Waves 266 5.4 Oscillating Water Column (OWC) 267 5.4.1 Fixed-Structure OWC 269 5.4.2 Floating-Structure OWC 269 5.5 Classification of Turbines 269 5.5.1 Wells Turbine 269 5.5.2 Impulse Turbine 272 5.6 Optimization of Air Turbines 272 References 276 Nomenclature 279 Index 287

Read more less

Book SynopsisTaking place at the David L. Lawrence Convention Center, Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania, this CT Volume contains 17 papers from the following 2014 Materials Science and Technology (MS&T''14) symposia: Next Generation Biomaterials Surface Properties of Biomaterials Table of ContentsPreface NEXT GENERATION BIOCERAMICS Evaluation of Long-Term Mechanical and Biological Biocompatibility of Low-Cost -Type Ti-Mn Alloys for Biomedical Applications 3Ken Cho, Mitsuo Niinomi, Masaaki Nakai, Pedro Fernandes Santos, Alethea Morgane Liens, Masahiko Ikeda, and Tomokazu Hattori Control of Ag Release from Ag-Containing Calcium Phosphates in Simulated Body Fluid 13Ozkan Gokcekaya, Kyosuke Ueda, and Takayuki Narushima Gallium-Containing Ferrites for Hyperthermia Treatment 21J. Sánchez, Dora Alicia Cortés-Hernández, José C. Escobedo-Bocardo, Rosario A. Jasso-Terán, Pamela Y. Reyes-Rodríguez, and Gilberto F. Hurtado-López Exploration of Amorphous and Crystalline Tri-Magnesium Phosphates for Bone Cements 33Nicole Ostrowski, Vidisha Sharma, Abhijit Roy, and Prashant N. Kumta Micro-X-Ray Diffraction Study of New Nickel-Titanium Rotary Endodontic Instruments 47William A. Brantley, Masahiro Iijima, William A.T. Clark, Scott R. Schricker, John M. Nusstein, and Itaru Mizoguchi Torsional Properties of Nanostructured Titanium Cortical Bone Screws 55J.A.Disegi, B. Shultzabarger, and Michael Roach Strengthening Behaviors of Low-Precious Ag-Pd-Au-Zn Alloys for Dental Applications 63Mitsuo Niinomi, Masaaki Nakai, Junko Hieda, Ken-Cho, Yonghwan Kim, and Hisao Fukui Effect of Immersion Medium on the Degradation and Conversion of Silicate (13-93) Bioactive Glass Scaffolds 73Yifei Gu, Wenhai Huang, and Mohamed N. Rahaman Evaluation of Long-Term Bone Regeneration in Rat Calvarial Defects Implanted with Strong Porous Bioactive Glass (13-93) Scaffolds 85Mohamed N. Rahaman, Yinan Lin, Wei Xiao, X. Liu, and B. Sonny Bal Magnesium Single Crystal as a Biodegradable Implant Material 97Madhura Joshi, Pravahan Salunke, Guangqi Zhang, Vibhor Chaswal, Zhongyun Dong, and Vesselin Shanov SURFACE PROPERTIES OF BIOMATERIALS Damage Evaluation of TiO2 Nanotubes on Titanium 117Anish Shivaram, Susmita Bose, and Amit Bandyopadhyay Drug Delivery from Surface Modified Titanium Alloy for Load-Bearing Implants 129Susmita Bose, Dishary Banerjee, Sam Robertson, Solaiman Tarafder, and Amit Bandyopadhyay A Family of Novel Biostable Reticulated Elastomeric and Resilient Biointregative Crosslinked Polyurethane-Urea Scaffolds 137Arindam Datta and Larry Lavelle In Situ Nitridation of Titanium Using LENS™ 149Himanshu Sahasrabudhe, Julie Soderlind, and Amit Bandyopadhyay Magnesium Doped Hydroxyapatite: Synthesis, Characterization and Bioactivity Evaluation 161Jaswinder Singh, Harpal Singh, and Uma Batra Novel PLA- and PCL-HA Porous 3D Scaffolds Prepared by Robocasting Facilitate MC3T3-E1 Subclone 4 Cellular Attachment and Growth 175V. G. Varanasi, J. Russias, E. Saiz, P. M. Loomer, and A. P. Tomsia Dextran Coated Cerium Oxide Nanoparticles for Inhibiting Bone Cancer Cell Functions 187Ece Alpaslan, Hilal Yazici, Negar Golshan, Katherine S. Ziemer, and Thomas J. Webster Author Index 197

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis proceedings contains a collection of 20 papers from the following five 2014 Materials Science and Technology (MS&T''14) symposia: Materials Issues in Nuclear Waste Management in the 21st Century Green Technologies for Materials Manufacturing and Processing V Nanotechnology for Energy, Healthcare and Industry Materials for Processes for CO2 Capture, Conversion, and Sequestration Materials Development for Nuclear Applications and Extreme Environments Table of ContentsPreface ix MATERIALS ISSUES IN NUCLEAR WASTE MANAGEMENT Uptake of Uranium by Tungstic Acid 3Hamed Albusaidi, Cory K. Perkins, and Allen W. Apblett Electrical Conductivity Method for Monitoring Accumulation of Crystals 13Matthew K. Edwards, Josef Matyáš, Jarrod V. Crum, Charles C. Bonham, and Michael J. Schweiger Crystallization in High Level Waste (HLW) Glass Melters: Savannah River Site Operational Experience 23Kevin M. Fox, David K. Peeler, and Albert A. Kruger Scoping Melting Studies of High Alumina Waste Glass Compositions 37Jared O. Kroll, Michael J. Schweiger, John D. Vienna Research-Scale Melter: An Experimental Platform for Evaluating Crystal Accumulation in High-Level Waste Glasses 49Josef Matyáš, Gary J. Sevigny, Michael J. Schweiger, and Albert A. Kruger Characterization of High Level Nuclear Waste Glass Samples Following Extended Melter Idling 59David K. Peeler, Kevin M. Fox, and Albert A. Kruger Synthesis of Mineral Matrices Based on Enriched Zirconium Pyrochlore for Immobilization of Actinide-Containing Waste 73K. Podbolotov and T. Barinova Corrosion Evaluation of Melter Materials for Radioactive Waste Vitrification 83Marissa M. Reigel, Ken J. Imrich, and Carol M. Jantzen GREEN TECHNOLOGIES FOR MATERIALS MANUFACTURING AND PROCESSING Green Flame Retardant Based on a Ceramic Precursor 99Bhawani Regmi and Allen W. Apblett Single-Source Precursor Approach to Barium Dimolybdate 109Ahmed Moneeb Allen W. Apblett, Abdullah Al-Abdulrahman, and Abdulaziz Bagabas Effects on Biomass Char Addition on Combustion Process of Pulverized Coal 117Yi-ran Liu, Yingli , and Bingchang Li A Comparative Analysis for Charpy Impact Energy in Polyester Composites Reinforced with Malva, Ramie and Curaua Fibers 127Frederico Muylaert Margem, André Raeli Gomes, Luiz Gustavo Xavier Borges, and Sergio Neves Monteiro Research on Simultaneous Injection of Waste Tires with Pulverized Coal for Blast Furnace 135Bingji Yan, Jianliang Zhang, Hongwei Guo, and Feng Liu Research on using Blast Furnace Slag to Produce Building Stone 145Bingji Yan, Jianliang Zhang, Hongwei Guo, Zhiwen Shi, and Feng Liu A Green Leaching Method of Decomposing Synthetic CaWO4 by HCl-H3PO4 in Tungsten Producing Process 157Liang Liu and Jilai Xue NANOTECHNOLOGY FOR ENERGY, HEALTHCARE AND INDUSTRY Synthesis of Coated Nano Calcium Carbonate Particles and their Characterization 169S. E. Benjamin and Farah Mustafa Synthesis of TiO2 Nanostructures via Hydrothermal Method 177Nursev Bilgin, Lutfi Agartan, Jongee Park, and Abdullah Ozturk Carbon Nanotube-Based Impedimetric Biosensors for Bone Marker Detection 187Mitali Patil, Madhumati Ramanathan, Vesselin Shanov, and Prashant N. Kumta MATERIALS AND PROCESSES FOR CO2 CAPTURE, CONVERSION, AND SEQUESTRATION High CO2 Permeation Flux Enabled by Al2O3 Modifier and In-Situ Infiltration of Molten Carbonate into Gd-Doped CeO2 as a CO2 Separation Membrane 197Jingjing Tong, Zachary Bills, Lingling Zhang, Jie Fang, Minfang Han, and Kevin Huang MATERIALS DEVELOPMENT FOR NUCLEAR APPLICATIONS AND EXTREME ENVIRONMENTS Superplasticity in Ceramics at High Temperature 207Michael Opoku, Raghunath Kanakala, and Indrajit Charit Author Index 219

Read more less

Book SynopsisGuide to kinematic theory for the analysis of spatial mechanisms and manipulators Kinematics of General Spatial Mechanical Systems is an effective and proficient guide to the kinematic description and analysis of the spatial mechanical systems such as serial manipulators, parallel manipulators and spatial mechanisms. The author highlights the analytical and semi-analytical methods for solving the relevant equations and considers four main elements: The mathematics of spatial kinematics with the necessary theorems, formulas and methods; The kinematic description of the links and joints including the rolling contact joints; Writing the kinematic chain and loop equations for the systems to be analyzed; and Solving these equations for the unspecified variables both in the forward and inverse senses together with the multiplicity and singularity analyses. Comprehensive in scope, the book covers topics ranging from rather elementary subjects such as spatial mechanisms with single degree oTable of ContentsPreface xv Acknowledgments xix List of Commonly Used Symbols, Abbreviations, and Acronyms xxi About the Companion Website xxvii 1 Vectors and Their Matrix Representations in Selected Reference Frames 1 1.1 General Features of Notation 1 1.2 Vectors 2 1.2.1 Definition and Description of a Vector 2 1.2.2 Equality of Vectors 2 1.2.3 Opposite Vectors 3 1.3 Vector Products 3 1.3.1 Dot Product 3 1.3.2 Cross Product 3 1.4 Reference Frames 4 1.5 Representation of a Vector in a Selected Reference Frame 6 1.6 Matrix Operations Corresponding to Vector Operations 7 1.6.1 Dot Product 7 1.6.2 Cross Product and Skew Symmetric Cross Product Matrices 8 1.7 Mathematical Properties of the Skew Symmetric Matrices 9 1.8 Examples Involving Skew Symmetric Matrices 10 1.8.1 Example 1.1 10 1.8.2 Example 1.2 11 1.8.3 Example 1.3 11 2 Rotation of Vectors and Rotation Matrices 13 2.1 Vector Equation of Rotation and the Rodrigues Formula 13 2.2 Matrix Equation of Rotation and the Rotation Matrix 15 2.3 Exponentially Expressed Rotation Matrix 16 2.4 Basic Rotation Matrices 16 2.5 Successive Rotations 17 2.6 Orthonormality of the Rotation Matrices 18 2.7 Mathematical Properties of the Rotation Matrices 20 2.7.1 Mathematical Properties of General Rotation Matrices 20 2.7.2 Mathematical Properties of the Basic Rotation Matrices 22 2.8 Examples Involving Rotation Matrices 22 2.8.1 Example 2.1 22 2.8.2 Example 2.2 23 2.8.3 Example 2.3 24 2.8.4 Example 2.4 24 2.9 Determination of the Angle and Axis of a Specified Rotation Matrix 25 2.9.1 Scalar Equations of Rotation 25 2.9.2 Determination of the Angle of Rotation 26 2.9.3 Determination of the Axis of Rotation 26 2.9.4 Discussion About the Optional Sign Variables 29 2.10 Definition and Properties of the Double Argument Arctangent Function 29 3 Matrix Representations of Vectors in Different Reference Frames and the Component Transformation Matrices 31 3.1 Matrix Representations of a Vector in Different Reference Frames 31 3.2 Transformation Matrices Between Reference Frames 32 3.2.1 Definition and Usage of a Transformation Matrix 32 3.2.2 Basic Properties of a Transformation Matrix 33 3.3 Expression of a Transformation Matrix in Terms of Basis Vectors 34 3.3.1 Column-by-Column Expression 34 3.3.2 Row-by-Row Expression 34 3.3.3 Remark 3.1 35 3.3.4 Remark 3.2 35 3.3.5 Remark 3.3 36 3.3.6 Example 3.1 36 3.4 Expression of a Transformation Matrix as a Direction Cosine Matrix 37 3.4.1 Definitions of Direction Angles and Direction Cosines 37 3.4.2 Transformation Matrix Formed as a Direction Cosine Matrix 38 3.5 Expression of a Transformation Matrix as a Rotation Matrix 38 3.5.1 Correlation Between the Rotation and Transformation Matrices 38 3.5.2 Distinction Between the Rotation and Transformation Matrices 39 3.6 Relationship Between the Matrix Representations of a Rotation Operator in Different Reference Frames 40 3.7 Expression of a Transformation Matrix in a Case of Several Successive Rotations 40 3.7.1 Rotated Frame Based (RFB) Formulation 41 3.7.2 Initial Frame Based (IFB) Formulation 41 3.8 Expression of a Transformation Matrix in Terms of Euler Angles 42 3.8.1 General Definition of Euler Angles 42 3.8.2 IFB (Initial Frame Based) Euler Angle Sequences 42 3.8.3 RFB (Rotated Frame Based) Euler Angle Sequences 43 3.8.4 Remark 3.4 44 3.8.5 Remark 3.5 44 3.8.6 Remark 3.6: Preference Between IFB and RFB Sequences 45 3.8.7 Commonly Used Euler Angle Sequences 45 3.8.8 Extraction of Euler Angles from a Given Transformation Matrix 46 3.9 Position of a Point Expressed in Different Reference Frames and Homogeneous Transformation Matrices 51 3.9.1 Position of a Point Expressed in Different Reference Frames 51 3.9.2 Homogeneous, Nonhomogeneous, Linear, Nonlinear, and Affine Relationships 52 3.9.3 Affine Coordinate Transformation Between Two Reference Frames 53 3.9.4 Homogeneous Coordinate Transformation Between Two Reference Frames 54 3.9.5 Mathematical Properties of the Homogeneous Transformation Matrices 55 3.9.6 Example 3.2 58 4 Vector Differentiation Accompanied by Velocity and Acceleration Expressions 63 4.1 Derivatives of a Vector with Respect to Different Reference Frames 63 4.1.1 Differentiation and Resolution Frames 63 4.1.2 Components in Different Differentiation and Resolution Frames 64 4.1.3 Example 65 4.2 Vector Derivatives with Respect to Different Reference Frames and the Coriolis Transport Theorem 66 4.2.1 First Derivatives and the Relative Angular Velocity 66 4.2.2 Second Derivatives and the Relative Angular Acceleration 68 4.3 Combination of Relative Angular Velocities and Accelerations 70 4.3.1 Combination of Relative Angular Velocities 70 4.3.2 Combination of Relative Angular Accelerations 71 4.4 Angular Velocities and Accelerations Associated with Rotation Sequences 71 4.4.1 Relative Angular Velocities and Accelerations about Relatively Fixed Axes 71 4.4.2 Example 72 4.4.3 Angular Velocities Associated with the Euler Angle Sequences 74 4.5 Velocity and Acceleration of a Point with Respect to Different Reference Frames 77 4.5.1 Velocity of a Point with Respect to Different Reference Frames 77 4.5.2 Acceleration of a Point with Respect to Different Reference Frames 78 4.5.3 Velocity and Acceleration Expressions with Simplified Notations 79 5 Kinematics of Rigid Body Systems 81 5.1 Kinematic Description of a Rigid Body System 82 5.1.1 Body Frames and Joint Frames 82 5.1.2 Kinematic Chains, Kinematic Branches, and Kinematic Loops 83 5.1.3 Joints or Kinematic Pairs 83 5.2 Position Equations for a Kinematic Chain of Rigid Bodies 84 5.2.1 Relative Orientation Equation Between Successive Bodies 85 5.2.2 Relative Location Equation Between Successive Bodies 85 5.2.3 Orientation of a Body with Respect to the Base of the Kinematic Chain 85 5.2.4 Location of a Body with Respect to the Base of the Kinematic Chain 86 5.2.5 Loop Closure Equations for a Kinematic Loop 86 5.3 Velocity Equations for a Kinematic Chain of Rigid Bodies 87 5.3.1 Relative Angular Velocity between Successive Bodies 87 5.3.2 Relative Translational Velocity Between Successive Bodies 88 5.3.3 Angular Velocity of a Body with Respect to the Base 89 5.3.4 Translational Velocity of a Body with Respect to the Base 89 5.3.5 Velocity Equations for a Kinematic Loop 90 5.4 Acceleration Equations for a Kinematic Chain of Rigid Bodies 90 5.4.1 Relative Angular Acceleration Between Successive Bodies 91 5.4.2 Relative Translational Acceleration Between Successive Bodies 92 5.4.3 Angular Acceleration of a Body with Respect to the Base 92 5.4.4 Translational Acceleration of a Body with Respect to the Base 93 5.4.5 Acceleration Equations for a Kinematic Loop 93 5.5 Example 5.1 :A Serial Manipulator with an RRP Arm 94 5.5.1 Kinematic Description of the System 94 5.5.2 Position Analysis 95 5.5.3 Velocity Analysis 100 5.5.4 Acceleration Analysis 103 5.6 Example 5.2 :A Spatial Slider-Crank (RSSP) Mechanism 106 5.6.1 Kinematic Description of the Mechanism 106 5.6.2 Loop Closure Equations 108 5.6.3 Degree of Freedom or Mobility 109 5.6.4 Position Analysis 110 5.6.5 Velocity Analysis 119 5.6.6 Acceleration Analysis 122 6 Joints and Their Kinematic Characteristics 125 6.1 Kinematic Details of the Joints 125 6.1.1 Description of a Joint as a Kinematic Pair 125 6.1.2 Degree of Freedom or Mobility of a Joint 126 6.1.3 Number of Distinct Joints Between Two Rigid Bodies 126 6.1.4 Classification of the Joints 127 6.2 Typical Lower Order Joints 128 6.2.1 Single-Axis Joints 128 6.2.2 Universal Joint 130 6.2.3 Spherical Joint 131 6.2.4 Plane-on-Plane Joint 132 6.3 Higher Order Joints with Simple Contacts 132 6.3.1 Line-on-Plane Joint 132 6.3.2 Point-on-Plane Joint 133 6.3.3 Point-on-Surface Joint 133 6.4 Typical Multi-Joint Connections 134 6.4.1 Fork-on-Surface Joint 134 6.4.2 Triangle-on-Surface Joint 136 6.5 Rolling Contact Joints with Point Contacts 138 6.5.1 Surface-on-Surface Joint 138 6.5.2 Curve-on-Surface Joint 144 6.5.3 Curve-on-Curve Joint 147 6.6 Rolling Contact Joints with Line Contacts 148 6.6.1 Cone-on-Cone Joint 148 6.6.2 Cone-on-Cylinder Joint 155 6.6.3 Cone-on-Plane Joint 157 6.6.4 Cylinder-on-Cylinder Joint 161 6.6.5 Cylinder-on-Plane Joint 164 6.7 Examples 167 6.7.1 Example 6.1: An RRRSP Mechanism 167 6.7.2 Example 6.2: A Two-Link Mechanism with Three Point-on-Plane Joints 171 6.7.3 Example 6.3: A Spatial Cam Mechanism 174 6.7.4 Example 6.4: A Spatial Cam Mechanism That Allows Rolling Without Slipping 177 7 Kinematic Features of Serial Manipulators 185 7.1 Kinematic Description of a General Serial Manipulator 185 7.2 Denavit–Hartenberg Convention 186 7.3 D–H Convention for Successive Intermediate Links and Joints 187 7.3.1 Assignment and Description of the Link Frames 187 7.3.2 D–H Parameters 188 7.3.3 Relative Position Formulas Between Successive Links 189 7.3.4 Alternative Multi-Index Notation for the D–H Convention 189 7.4 D–H Convention for the First Joint 190 7.5 D–H Convention for the Last Joint 193 7.6 D–H Convention for Successive Joints with Perpendicularly Intersecting Axes 195 7.7 D–H Convention for Successive Joints with Parallel Axes 195 7.8 D–H Convention for Successive Joints with Coincident Axes 197 8 Position and Motion Analyses of Generic Serial Manipulators 199 8.1 Forward Kinematics 201 8.2 Compact Formulation of Forward Kinematics 202 8.3 Detailed Formulation of Forward Kinematics 203 8.4 Manipulators with or without Spherical Wrists 205 8.5 Inverse Kinematics 207 8.6 Inverse Kinematic Solution for a Regular Manipulator 208 8.6.1 Regular Manipulator with a Spherical Wrist 208 8.6.2 Regular Manipulator with a Nonspherical Wrist 211 8.7 Inverse Kinematic Solution for a Redundant Manipulator 212 8.7.1 Solution by Specifying the Variables of Certain Joints 212 8.7.2 Solution by Optimization 213 8.8 Inverse Kinematic Solution for a Deficient Manipulator 214 8.8.1 Compromise in Orientation in Favor of a Completely Specified Location 214 8.8.2 Compromise in Location in Favor of a Completely Specified Orientation 215 8.9 Forward Kinematics of Motion 215 8.9.1 Forward Kinematics of Velocity Relationships 215 8.9.2 Forward Kinematics of Acceleration Relationships 216 8.10 Jacobian Matrices Associated with the Wrist and Tip Points 218 8.11 Recursive Position, Velocity, and Acceleration Formulations 220 8.11.1 Orientations of the Links 220 8.11.2 Locations of the Link Frame Origins 221 8.11.3 Locations of the Mass Centers of the Links 221 8.11.4 Angular Velocities of the Links 221 8.11.5 Velocities of the Link Frame Origins 222 8.11.6 Velocities of the Mass Centers of the Links 222 8.11.7 Angular Accelerations of the Links 222 8.11.8 Accelerations of the Link Frame Origins 222 8.11.9 Accelerations of the Mass Centers of the Links 223 8.12 Inverse Motion Analysis of a Manipulator Based on the Jacobian Matrix 223 8.12.1 Inverse Velocity Analysis of a Regular Manipulator 224 8.12.2 Inverse Acceleration Analysis of a Regular Manipulator 225 8.13 Inverse Motion Analysis of a Redundant Manipulator 225 8.13.1 Inverse Velocity Analysis 225 8.13.2 Inverse Acceleration Analysis 228 8.14 Inverse Motion Analysis of a Deficient Manipulator 229 8.15 Inverse Motion Analysis of a Regular Manipulator Using the Detailed Formulation 230 8.15.1 Inverse Velocity Solution 230 8.15.2 Inverse Acceleration Solution 231 9 Kinematic Analyses of Typical Serial Manipulators 233 9.1 Puma Manipulator 233 9.1.1 Kinematic Description According to the D–H Convention 234 9.1.2 Forward Kinematics in the Position Domain 235 9.1.3 Inverse Kinematics in the Position Domain 237 9.1.4 Multiplicity Analysis 240 9.1.5 Singularity Analysis in the Position Domain 242 9.1.6 Forward Kinematics in the Velocity Domain 244 9.1.7 Inverse Kinematics in the Velocity Domain 245 9.1.8 Singularity Analysis in the Velocity Domain 247 9.2 Stanford Manipulator 250 9.2.1 Kinematic Description According to the D–H Convention 250 9.2.2 Forward Kinematics in the Position Domain 251 9.2.3 Inverse Kinematics in the Position Domain 253 9.2.4 Multiplicity Analysis 254 9.2.5 Singularity Analysis in the Position Domain 255 9.2.6 Forward Kinematics in the Velocity Domain 255 9.2.7 Inverse Kinematics in the Velocity Domain 256 9.2.8 Singularity Analysis in the Velocity Domain 257 9.3 Elbow Manipulator 258 9.3.1 Kinematic Description According to the D–H Convention 259 9.3.2 Forward Kinematics in the Position Domain 260 9.3.3 Inverse Kinematics in the Position Domain 262 9.3.4 Multiplicity Analysis 264 9.3.5 Singularity Analysis in the Position Domain 266 9.3.6 Forward Kinematics in the Velocity Domain 269 9.3.7 Inverse Kinematics in the Velocity Domain 269 9.3.8 Singularity Analysis in the Velocity Domain 271 9.4 Scara Manipulator 273 9.4.1 Kinematic Description According to the D–H Convention 273 9.4.2 Forward Kinematics in the Position Domain 274 9.4.3 Inverse Kinematics in the Position Domain 275 9.4.4 Multiplicity Analysis 277 9.4.5 Singularity Analysis in the Position Domain 278 9.4.6 Forward Kinematics in the Velocity Domain 279 9.4.7 Inverse Kinematics in the Velocity Domain 279 9.4.8 Singularity Analysis in the Velocity Domain 280 9.5 An RP2R3 Manipulator without an Analytical Solution 281 9.5.1 Kinematic Description According to the D–H Convention 282 9.5.2 Forward Kinematics in the Position Domain 282 9.5.3 Inverse Kinematics in the Position Domain 283 9.5.4 Multiplicity Analysis 285 9.5.5 Singularity Analysis in the Position Domain 287 9.5.6 Forward Kinematics in the Velocity Domain 287 9.5.7 Inverse Kinematics in the Velocity Domain 287 9.5.8 Singularity Analysis in the Velocity Domain 289 9.6 An RPRPR2 Manipulator with an Uncustomary Analytical Solution 290 9.6.1 Kinematic Description According to the D–H Convention 290 9.6.2 Forward Kinematics in the Position Domain 291 9.6.3 Inverse Kinematics in the Position Domain 293 9.6.4 Multiplicity Analysis 297 9.6.5 Singularity Analysis in the Position Domain 298 9.6.6 Forward Kinematics in the Velocity Domain 298 9.6.7 Inverse Kinematics in the Velocity Domain 299 9.6.8 Singularity Analysis in the Velocity Domain 301 9.7 A Deficient Puma Manipulator with Five Active Joints 303 9.7.1 Kinematic Description According to the D–H Convention 303 9.7.2 Forward Kinematics in the Position Domain 304 9.7.3 Inverse Kinematics in the Position Domain 305 9.7.3.1 Solution in the Case of Fully Specified Tip Point Location 305 9.7.3.2 Solution in the Case of Fully Specified End-Effector Orientation 307 9.7.4 Multiplicity Analysis in the Position Domain 307 9.7.4.1 Analysis in the Case of Fully Specified Tip Point Location 307 9.7.4.2 Analysis in the Case of Fully Specified End-Effector Orientation 308 9.7.5 Singularity Analysis in the Position Domain 308 9.7.5.1 Analysis in the Case of Fully Specified Tip Point Location 308 9.7.5.2 Analysis in the Case of Fully Specified End-Effector Orientation 309 9.7.6 Forward Kinematics in the Velocity Domain 310 9.7.7 Inverse Kinematics in the Velocity Domain 310 9.7.7.1 Solution in the Case of Fully Specified Tip Point Velocity 310 9.7.7.2 Solution in the Case of Fully Specified End-Effector Angular Velocity 311 9.7.8 Singularity Analysis in the Velocity Domain 312 9.7.8.1 Analysis in the Case of Fully Specified Tip Point Velocity 312 9.7.8.2 Analysis in the Case of Fully Specified End-Effector Angular Velocity 313 9.8 A Redundant Humanoid Manipulator with Eight Joints 313 9.8.1 Kinematic Description According to the D–H Convention 313 9.8.2 Forward Kinematics in the Position Domain 315 9.8.3 Inverse Kinematics in the Position Domain 316 9.8.4 Multiplicity Analysis 323 9.8.5 Singularity Analysis in the Position Domain 326 9.8.6 Forward Kinematics in the Velocity Domain 328 9.8.7 Inverse Kinematics in the Velocity Domain 328 9.8.8 Singularity Analysis in the Velocity Domain 333 9.8.9 Consistency of the Inverse Kinematics in the Position and Velocity Domains 335 10 Position and Velocity Analyses of Parallel Manipulators 341 10.1 General Kinematic Features of Parallel Manipulators 343 10.2 Position Equations of a Parallel Manipulator 347 10.3 Forward Kinematics in the Position Domain 351 10.4 Inverse Kinematics in the Position Domain 359 10.5 Velocity Equations of a Parallel Manipulator 368 10.6 Forward Kinematics in the Velocity Domain 371 10.7 Inverse Kinematics in the Velocity Domain 377 10.8 Stewart–Gough Platform as a 6UPS Spatial Parallel Manipulator 384 10.8.1 Kinematic Description 384 10.8.2 Position Equations 386 10.8.3 Inverse Kinematics in the Position Domain 387 10.8.4 Forward Kinematics in the Position Domain 389 10.8.5 Velocity Equations 396 10.8.6 Inverse Kinematics in the Velocity Domain 397 10.8.7 Forward Kinematics in the Velocity Domain 398 10.9 Delta Robot: A 3RS2S2 Spatial Parallel Manipulator 402 10.9.1 Kinematic Description 402 10.9.2 Position Equations 404 10.9.3 Independent Kinematic Loops and the Associated Equations 407 10.9.4 Inverse Kinematics in the Position Domain 410 10.9.5 Forward Kinematics in the Position Domain 412 10.9.6 Velocity Equations 417 10.9.7 Inverse Kinematics in the Velocity Domain 418 10.9.8 Forward Kinematics in the Velocity Domain 420 Bibliography 423 Index 425

Read more less

Book SynopsisMETAL ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING A comprehensive review of additive manufacturing processes for metallic structures Additive Manufacturing (AM)also commonly referred to as 3D printingbuilds three-dimensional objects by adding materials layer by layer. Recent years have seen unprecedented investment in additive manufacturing research and development by governments and corporations worldwide. This technology has the potential to replace many conventional manufacturing processes, enable the development of new industry practices, and transform the entire manufacturing enterprise. Metal Additive Manufacturing provides an up-to-date review of all essential physics of metal additive manufacturing techniques with emphasis on both laser-based and non-laser-based additive manufacturing processes. This comprehensive volume covers fundamental processes and equipment, governing physics and modelling, design and topology optimization, and more. The text adresses introductory, intermediate, and advanced Table of ContentsPreface xv Abbreviations xvii 1 Additive Manufacturing Process Classification, Applications, Trends, Opportunities, and Challenges 1 1.1 Additive Manufacturing: A Long-Term Game Changer 1 1.2 AM Standard Definition and Classification 4 1.3 Why Metal Additive Manufacturing? 5 1.4 Market Size: Current and Future Estimation 11 1.5 Applications of Metal AM 12 1.5.1 Medical and Dental 14 1.5.2 Aerospace and Defense 15 1.5.3 Communication 17 1.5.4 Energy and Resources 18 1.5.5 Automotive 19 1.5.6 Industrial Tooling and Other Applications 20 1.6 Economic/Environmental Benefits and Societal Impact 20 1.7 AM Trends, Challenges, and Opportunities 23 1.8 Looking Ahead 27 References 28 2 Basics of Metal Additive Manufacturing 31 2.1 Introduction 31 2.2 Main Metal Additive Manufacturing Processes 32 2.2.1 Powder Bed Fusion (PBF) 32 2.2.2 Directed Energy Deposition (DED) 41 2.2.3 Binder Jetting (BJ) 49 2.2.4 Emerging Metal AM Processes 55 2.3 Main Process Parameters for Metal DED, PBF, and BJ 62 2.3.1 Main Output Parameters 64 2.3.2 Combined Thermal Energy Source Parameters PBF and DED 65 2.3.3 Beam Scanning Strategies and Parameters for PBF and DED 68 2.3.4 Powder Properties for PBF, DED, and BJ 71 2.3.5 Wire Properties for DED 76 2.3.6 Layer Thickness for PBF, DED, and BJ 77 2.3.7 Ambient Parameters for PBF, DED, and BJ 79 2.3.8 Geometry-Specific Parameters (PBF) 80 2.3.9 Support Structures for PBF 82 2.3.10 Binder Properties for BJ 82 2.3.11 Binder Saturation for BJ 84 2.4 Materials 85 2.4.1 Ferrous Alloys 86 2.4.2 Titanium Alloys 86 2.4.3 Nickel Alloys 86 2.4.4 Aluminum Alloys 86 References 87 3 Main Sub-Systems for Metal AM Machines 91 3.1 Introduction 91 3.2 System Setup of AM Machines 92 3.2.1 Laser Powder Bed Fusion (LPBF) 92 3.2.2 Laser Directed Energy Deposition (LDED) with Blown Powder Known as Laser Powder-Fed (LPF) 92 3.2.3 Binder Jetting (BJ) 93 3.3 Laser Basics: Important Parameters needed to be known for AM 93 3.3.1 Laser Theory 93 3.3.2 Laser Components 100 3.3.3 Continuous Vs. Pulsed Laser 101 3.3.4 Laser Types 102 3.3.5 Laser Beam Properties 109 3.4 Electron Beam Basics 114 3.4.1 Comparisons and Contrasts between Laser and Electron Beams 114 3.4.2 Electron Beam Powder Bed Fusion Setup 114 3.4.3 Electron Beam Mechanism 116 3.4.4 Vacuum Chambers 119 3.5 Powder Feeders and Delivery Nozzles Technology 121 3.5.1 Classification of Powder Feeders 121 3.5.2 Powder Delivery Nozzles for DED 125 3.5.3 Powder Bed Delivery and Spreading Mechanisms 128 3.5.4 Wire Feed System 129 3.5.5 Positioning Devices and Scanners in Laser-Based AM 130 3.5.6 Print-Head in Binder Jetting 131 3.6 CAD File Formats 133 3.6.1 CAD/CAM Software 134 3.7 Summary 134 References 134 4 Directed Energy Deposition (DED): Physics and Modeling of Laser/Electron Beam Material Processing and DED 137 4.1 Introduction 137 4.2 Laser Material Interaction and the Associated Significant Parameters to Laser AM 140 4.2.1 Continuous Versus Pulsed/Modulated Lasers 141 4.2.2 Absorption, Reflection, and Transmission Factors 143 4.2.3 Dependencies of Absorption Factor to Wavelength and Temperature 144 4.2.4 Angle of Incidence 144 4.2.5 Surface Roughness Effects 147 4.2.6 Scattering Effects 147 4.3 E-beam Material Interaction 148 4.4 Power Density and Interaction Time for Various Heat Source-based Material Processing 149 4.5 Physical Phenomena and Governing Equations during DED 150 4.5.1 Absorption 150 4.5.2 Heat Conduction 151 4.5.3 Surface Convection and Radiation 152 4.5.4 Fluid Dynamics 153 4.5.5 Phase Transformation 156 4.5.6 Rapid Solidification 158 4.5.7 Thermal Stresses 158 4.5.8 Flow Field in DED with Injected Powder 159 4.6 Modeling of DED 161 4.6.1 Analytical Modeling: Basics, Simplified Equations, and Assumptions 161 4.6.2 Numerical Models for DED 165 4.6.3 Experimental-based Models: Basics and Approaches 166 4.7 Case Studies on Common Modeling Platforms for DED 168 4.7.1 Lumped Analytical Model for Powder-Fed LDED 168 4.7.2 Comprehensive Analytical Model for Powder-Fed LDED (PF-LDED) 172 4.7.3 Numerical Modeling of LDED: Heat Transfer Model 184 4.7.4 Modeling of Wire-Fed E-beam DED (WF-EDED) 193 4.7.5 A Stochastic Model for Powder-Fed LDED 195 4.8 Summary 200 References 200 5 Powder Bed Fusion Processes: Physics and Modeling 203 5.1 Introduction and Notes to Readers 203 5.2 Physics of Laser Powder bed Fusion (LPBF) 204 5.2.1 Heat Transfer in LPBF: Governing Equations and Assumptions 205 5.2.2 Fluid Flow in the Melt Pool of LPBF: Governing Equations and Assumptions 215 5.2.3 Vaporization and Material Expulsion: Governing Equations and Assumptions 218 5.2.4 Thermal Residual Stresses: Governing Equations and Assumptions 219 5.2.5 Numerical Modeling of LPBF 220 5.2.6 Case Studies on Common LPBF Modeling Platforms 222 5.3 Physics and Modeling of Electron Beam Additive Manufacturing 228 5.3.1 Electron Beam Additive Manufacturing Parameters 228 5.3.2 Emissions in Electron Beam Sources 230 5.3.3 Mathematical Description of Free Electron Current 231 5.3.4 Modeling of Electron Beam Powder Bed Fusion (EB-PBF) 233 5.3.5 Case Studies 245 5.3.6 Summary 249 References 251 6 Binder Jetting and Material Jetting: Physics and Modeling 255 6.1 Introduction 255 6.2 Physics and Governing Equations 257 6.2.1 Droplet Formation 257 6.2.2 Droplet–Substrate Interaction 263 6.2.3 Binder Imbibition 265 6.3 Numerical Modeling 270 6.3.1 Level-Set Model 270 6.3.2 Lattice Boltzmann Method 274 6.4 Summary 277 References 277 7 Material Extrusion: Physics and Modeling 279 7.1 Introduction 279 7.2 Analytical Modeling of ME 281 7.2.1 Heat Transfer and Outlet Temperature 281 7.2.2 Flow Dynamics and Drop Pressure 283 7.2.3 Die Swell 288 7.2.4 Deposition and Healing 289 7.3 Numerical Modeling of ME 291 7.4 Summary 296 References 296 8 Material Design and Considerations for Metal Additive Manufacturing 297 8.1 Historical Background on Materials 297 8.2 Materials Science: Structure–Property Relationship 298 8.3 Manufacturing of Metallic Materials 299 8.4 Solidification of Metals: Equilibrium 301 8.5 Solidification in Additive Manufacturing: Non-Equilibrium 302 8.6 Equilibrium Solidification: Theory and Mechanism 304 8.6.1 Cooling Curve and Phase Diagram 304 8.7 Non-Equilibrium Solidification: Theory and Mechanism 307 8.8 Solute Redistribution and Microsegregation 308 8.9 Constitutional Supercooling 312 8.10 Nucleation and Growth Kinetics 314 8.10.1 Nucleation 315 8.10.2 Growth Behavior 319 8.11 Solidification Microstructure in Pure Metals and Alloys 321 8.12 Directional Solidification in AM 324 8.13 Factors Affecting Solidification in AM 325 8.13.1 Cooling Rate 325 8.13.2 Temperature Gradient and Solidification Rate 326 8.13.3 Process Parameters 329 8.13.4 Solidification Temperature Span 329 8.13.5 Gas Interactions 330 8.14 Solidification Defects 330 8.14.1 Porosity 330 8.14.2 Balling 332 8.14.3 Cracking 335 8.14.4 Lamellar Tearing 337 8.15 Post Solidification Phase Transformation 337 8.15.1 Ferrous Alloys/Steels 337 8.15.2 Al Alloys 338 8.15.3 Nickel Alloys/Superalloys 341 8.15.4 Titanium Alloys 350 8.16 Phases after Post-Process Heat Treatment 357 8.16.1 Ferrous Alloys 357 8.16.2 Al Alloys 357 8.16.3 Ni Alloys 357 8.16.4 Ti Alloys 358 8.17 Mechanical Properties 358 8.17.1 Hardness 359 8.17.2 Tensile Strength and Static Strength 363 8.17.3 Fatigue Behavior of AM-Manufactured Alloys 365 8.18 Summary 371 References 375 9 Additive Manufacturing of Metal Matrix Composites 383 9.1 Introduction 383 9.2 Conventional Manufacturing Techniques for Metal Matrix Composites (MMCs) 384 9.3 Additive Manufacturing of Metal Matrix Composites (MMCs) 385 9.4 AM Challenges and Opportunities 386 9.5 Preparation of Composite Materials: Mechanical Mixing 387 9.6 Different Categories of MMCs 389 9.7 Additive Manufacturing of Ferrous Matrix Composites 390 9.7.1 316 SS-TiC Composite 390 9.7.2 316 SS–TiB2 Composite 392 9.7.3 H13–TiB2 Composite 392 9.7.4 H13–TiC Composite 393 9.7.5 Ferrous–WC Composite 393 9.7.6 Ferrous–VC Composites 394 9.8 Additive Manufacturing of Titanium-Matrix Composites (TMCs) 395 9.8.1 Ti–TiC Composite 396 9.8.2 Ti–TiB Composites 396 9.8.3 Ti–Hydroxyapatite (Ti–HA) Composites 399 9.8.4 Ti-6Al-4V-Metallic Glass (MG) Composites 400 9.8.5 Ti-6Al-4V + B4C Pre-alloyed Composites 401 9.8.6 Ti-6Al-4V +Mo Composite 402 9.8.7 Structure and Properties of Different TMCs 403 9.9 Additive Manufacturing of Aluminum Matrix Composites 403 9.9.1 Al–Fe2O3 Composite 405 9.9.2 AlSi10Mg–SiC Composite 405 9.9.3 AlSi10Mg–TiC Composite 406 9.9.4 2024Al–TiB2 Composite 406 9.9.5 AlSi10Mg–TiB2 Composite 407 9.9.6 AA7075–TiB2 Composite 407 9.10 Additive Manufacturing of Nickel Matrix Composites 407 9.10.1 Inconel 625–TiC Composites 408 9.10.2 Inconel 625–TiB2 Composite 409 9.11 Factors Affecting Composite Property 409 9.11.1 Mixing of Matrix and Reinforcing Elements 409 9.11.2 Size of Reinforcing Elements 410 9.11.3 Decomposition Temperature 411 9.11.4 Viscosity and Pore Formation 411 9.11.5 Volume of Reinforcing Elements and Pore Formation 412 9.11.6 Buoyancy Effects and Surface Tension Forces 412 9.12 Summary 414 References 417 10 Design for Metal Additive Manufacturing 421 10.1 Design Frameworks for Additive Manufacturing 421 10.1.1 Integrated Topological and Functional Optimization DfAM 422 10.1.2 Additive Manufacturing-Enabled Design Framework 422 10.1.3 Product Design Framework for AM with Integration of Topology Optimization 424 10.1.4 Multifunctional Optimization Methodology for DfAM 427 10.1.5 AM Process Model for Product Family Design 427 10.2 Design Rules and Guidelines 427 10.2.1 Laser Powder Bed Fusion (LPBF) 427 10.2.2 Electron Beam Powder Bed Fusion (EB-PBF) 431 10.2.3 Binder Jetting 433 10.2.4 Technologies Compared 434 10.3 Topology Optimization for Additive Manufacturing 434 10.3.1 Structural Optimization 435 10.3.2 Topology Optimization 436 10.3.3 Design-Dependent Topology Optimization 444 10.3.4 Efforts in AM-Constrained Topology Optimization 450 10.4 Lattice Structure Design 458 10.4.1 Unit Cell 458 10.4.2 Lattice Framework 459 10.4.3 Uniform Lattice 460 10.4.4 Conformal Lattices 462 10.4.5 Irregular/Randomized Lattices 462 10.4.6 Design Workflows for Lattice Structures 463 10.5 Design for Support Structures 473 10.5.1 Principles that Should Guide Support Structure Design 474 10.5.2 Build Orientation Optimization 474 10.5.3 Support Structure Optimization 476 10.6 Design Case Studies 483 10.6.1 Redesign of an Aerospace Bracket to be Made by LPBF 484 10.6.2 Design and Development of a Structural Member in a Suspension Assembly Using EB Powder Bed Fusion 487 10.6.3 Binder Jetting of the Framework of a Partial Metal Denture 488 10.6.4 Redesign of a Crank and Connecting Rod 490 10.6.5 Redesign of a Mechanical Assembly 492 10.6.6 Solid-Lattice Hip Prosthesis Design 498 10.7 Summary 501 References 501 11 Monitoring and Quality Assurance for Metal Additive Manufacturing 507 11.1 Why are Closed-Loop and Quality Assurance Platforms Essential? 507 11.2 In-Situ Sensing Devices and Setups 509 11.2.1 Types of Sensors Used in Metal AM 509 11.2.2 Mounting Strategies for In-line Monitoring Sensors in Metal AM Setups 521 11.3 Commercially Available Sensors 522 11.3.1 LPBF Commercial Sensors 522 11.3.2 LDED Commercial Sensors 525 11.4 Signal/Data Conditioning, Methodologies, and Classic Controllers for Monitoring, Control, and Quality Assurance in Metal AM Processes 526 11.4.1 Signal/Data Conditioning and Controllers for Melt Pool Geometrical Analysis 526 11.4.2 Signal/Data Conditioning and Methodologies for Temperature Monitoring and Analysis 531 11.4.3 Signal/Data Conditioning and Methodologies for the Detection of Porosity 532 11.4.4 Signal/Data Conditioning and Methodologies for Detection of Crack and Delamination 537 11.4.5 Signal/Data Conditioning and Methodologies for Detection of Plasma Plume and Spatters 538 11.5 Machine Learning for Data Analytics and Quality Assurance in Metal AM 539 11.5.1 Supervised Learning 539 11.5.2 Unsupervised Learning 549 11.6 Case Study 553 11.6.1 Design of Experiments 554 11.6.2 In-Situ Sensors and Quality Assurance Algorithm 555 11.6.3 Correlation Between CT Scan and Analyzed Data 560 11.7 Summary 563 References 565 12 Safety 577 12.1 Introduction 577 12.2 Overview of Hazards 578 12.3 AM Process Hazards 578 12.4 Laser Safety in Additive Manufacturing 579 12.4.1 Laser Categorization 579 12.4.2 Laser Hazards 581 12.4.3 Eye Protection 584 12.4.4 Laser Protective Eyewear Requirements 584 12.5 Electron Beam Safety 585 12.6 Powder Hazards 585 12.6.1 Combustibility 586 12.7 Human Health Hazards 587 12.8 Comprehensive Steps to AM Safety Management 587 12.8.1 Engineering Controls 587 12.8.2 Personal Protective Equipment 588 12.8.3 AM Guidelines and Standards 588 12.9 Summary 589 References 590 Index 591

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe Ceramic Engineering and Science Proceeding has been published by The American Ceramic Society since 1980. This series contains a collection of papers dealing with issues in both traditional ceramics (i.e., glass, whitewares, refractories, and porcelain enamel) and advanced ceramics. Topics covered in the area of advanced ceramic include bioceramics, nanomaterials, composites, solid oxide fuel cells, mechanical properties and structural design, advanced ceramic coatings, ceramic armor, porous ceramics, and more.Table of ContentsPreface vii Introduction ix International Standards for Properties and Performance of Advanced Ceramics 1 Michael G. Jenkins, Jonathan A. Salem, John Helfinstine, George D. Quinn, and Stephen T. Gonczy Tensile Creep and Rupture Behavior of Different Fiber Content and Type Single Tow SiC/SiC Minicomposites 11 Amjad Almansour, Emmanuel Maillet, and Gregory N. Morscher Optical Deformation Analysis of Alumina Based Wound Highly Porous CMCs 21 S. Hackemann and J. Wischek Electrical Resistance and Acoustic Emission during Fatigue Testing of SiC/SiC Composites 33 Zipeng Han and Gregory N. Morscher Ti-Based Ceramic Composite Processing using Hybrid Centrifugal Thermite Assisted Technique 41 Reza Mahmoodian, M.A. Hassan, and Mohd Hamdi Bin Abd Shukor Ceramic Matrix Composites: Residual Tensile Testing after Intermediate Temperature Oxidation 49 G. Ojard, I. Smyth, U. Santhosh, Y. Gowayed, and D. C. Jarmon Ceramic Matrix Composites: Effect of Defects on Fatigue and Nondestructive Evaluation 59 I. Smyth, G. Ojard, N. Magdefrau, U. Santhosh, J. Ahmad, and Y. Gowayed Effect of Particle Loading on Properties, Damping, and Wear of Al/SiC MMCs 65 S. Salamone, B. Givens, K. Kremer, and M. Aghajanian Novel Application of Fractal Analysis in Refractory Composite Microsturctural Characterization 73 Anja Terzi , Vojislav Miti , Ljubiša Koci , Zagorka Radojevi , and Snežana Pašali Hardmetals based on Niobium Carbide (NbC) versus Casted NbC Bearing MMCs 87 Mathias Woydt and Hardy Mohrbacher Weight Loss Mechanism of (La0.8Sr0.2)0.98MnO3±δ during Thermal Cycles 93 Shadi Darvish, Ali Karbasi, Surendra K. Saxena, and Yu Zhong Engineering Application of Menger Sponge 101 R. Kitazawa Author Index 109

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe Ceramic Engineering and Science Proceeding has been published by The American Ceramic Society since 1980. This series contains a collection of papers dealing with issues in both traditional ceramics (i.e., glass, whitewares, refractories, and porcelain enamel) and advanced ceramics. Topics covered in the area of advanced ceramic include bioceramics, nanomaterials, composites, solid oxide fuel cells, mechanical properties and structural design, advanced ceramic coatings, ceramic armor, porous ceramics, and more.Table of ContentsPreface ix Introduction xi SOLID OXIDE FUEL CELLS Effects of TiO2 Addition on Microstructure and Ionic Conductivity of Gadolinia-Doped Ceria Solid Electrolyte 3M. C. F. Dias and E. N. S. Muccillo Effect of Specific Surface Area and Particle Size Distribution on the Densification of Gadolinium Doped Ceria 13K. Paciejewska, A. Weber, S. Kühn, and M. Kleber Study on Sintering and Stability Issues of BaZr0.1Ce0.7Y0.1Yb0.1O3-Electrolyte for SOFCs 21Armin Vahid Mohammadi and Zhe Cheng Sintering, Mechanical, Electrical and Oxidation Properties of Ceramic Intermetallic TiC-Ti3Al Composites from Nano-TiC Particles 31Zhezhen Fu, Kanchan Mondal, and Rasit Koc Characteristics of Protective LSM Coatings on Cr-Contained Steels used as Metallic Interconnectors of Intermediated Temperature Solid Oxide Fuel Cells 45Chun-Liang Chang, Chang-sing Hwang, Chun-Huang Tsai, Sheng-Fu Yang, Wei-Ja Shong, Zong-Yang Jhuang-Shie, and Te-Jung Daron Huang Electrical and Microstructural Evolutions of La0.67Sr0.33MnO3 Coated Ferritic Stainless Steels after Long-Term Aging at 800°C 57Chien-Kuo Liu, Peng Yang, Wei-Ja Shong, Ruey-Yi Lee, and Jin-Yu Wu Structural and Electrochemical Performance Stability of Perovskite–Fluorite Composite for High Temperature Electrochemical Devices 67Sapna Gupta and Prabhakar Singh Durability of Lanthanum Strontium Cobalt Ferrite ((La0.60Sr0.40)0.95(Co0.20Fe0.80)O3-x) Cathodes in CO2 and H2O Containing Air 75Boxun Hu, Manoj K. Mahapatra, Vinit Sharma, Rampi Ramprasad, Nguyen Minh, Scott Misture, and Prabhakar Singh Fabrication of the Anode-Supported Solid Oxide Fuel Cell with Composite Cathodes and the Performance Evaluation upon Long-Term Operation 83Tai-Nan Lin, Yang-Chuang Chang, Maw-Chwain Lee, and Ruey-yi Lee Development of Microtubular Solid Oxide Fuel Cells using Hydrocarbon Fuels 93Hirofumi Sumi, Hiroyuki Shimada, Toshiaki Yamaguchi, Koichi Hamamoto, Toshio Suzuki, and Yoshinobu Fujishiro Highly Efficient Solid Oxide Electrolyzer and Sabatier System 105Viswanathan Venkateswaran, Tim Curry, Christie Iacomini, and John Olenick SINGLE CRYSTALLINE MATERIALS FOR ELECTRICAL AND OPTICAL APPLICATIONS The Effects of Excess Silicon and Carbon in SiC Source Materials on SiC Single Crystal Growth in Physical Vapor Transport Method 117Tatsuo Fujimoto, Masashi Nakabayashi, Hiroshi Tsuge, Masakazu Katsuno, Shinya Sato, Shoji Uhsio, Komomo Tani, Hirokastu Yashiro, Hosei Hirano, and Takayuki Yano Recent Progress of GaN Substrates Manufactured by VAS Method 129Takehiro Yoshida, Takayuki Suzuki, Toshio Kitamura, Yukio Abe, Hajime Fujikura, Masatomo Shibata, and Toshiya Saito Coilable Single Crystal Fibers of Doped-YAG for High Power Applications 139B. Ponting, E. Gebremichael, R. Magana, and G. Maxwell Hydrothermal Crystal Growth and Applications 151M. Prakasam, O. Viraphong, O. Cambon, and A. Largeteau Reactive Atmospheres for Oxide Crystal Growth 157Detlef Klimm, Steffen Ganschow, Zbigniew Galazka, Rainer Bertram, Detlev Schulz, and Reinhard Uecker Discussion on Polycrystals over Single Crystals for Optical Devices 169Mythili Prakasam and Alain Largeteau Terahertz Time-Domain Spectroscopy Application to Non-Destructive Quality Evaluation of Industrial Crystalline Materials 177S. Nishizawa, T. Nagashima, M. W. Takeda, and K. Shimamura Author Index 187

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe Ceramic Engineering and Science Proceeding has been published by The American Ceramic Society since 1980. This series contains a collection of papers dealing with issues in both traditional ceramics (i.e., glass, whitewares, refractories, and porcelain enamel) and advanced ceramics. Topics covered in the area of advanced ceramic include bioceramics, nanomaterials, composites, solid oxide fuel cells, mechanical properties and structural design, advanced ceramic coatings, ceramic armor, porous ceramics, and more.Table of ContentsPreface vii Introduction ix TNO’s Research on Ceramic Based Armor 1Erik Carton, Geert Roebroeks, Jaap Weerheijm, André Diederen, and Manfred Kwint Investigation of the Kinetic Energy Characterization of Advanced Ceramics 19Tyrone L. Jones Predicting the Light Transmittance of Multilayer Transparent Armor 29Brandon S. Aldinger Operator Training and Performance Measurement for Nondestructive Testing of Ceramic Armor 41K. F. Schmidt, J. R. Little, W. H. Green, L. P. Franks, and W. A. Ellingson From Micron-Sized Particles to Nanoparticles and Nanobelts: Structural Non-Uniformity in the Synthesis of Boron Carbide by Carbothermal Reduction Reaction 51Paniz Foroughi and Zhe Cheng Nanocrystalline Boron Carbide Powder Synthesized Via Carbothermal Reduction Reaction 63Said M. El-Sheikh, Yasser M. Z. Ahmed, Emad M. M. Ewais, Asmaa Abd-El-Baset Abd Allah, and Said Anwar Synthesis and Crystallization Behavior of Amorphous Boron Nitride 75Metin Örnek, Chawon Hwang, Vladislav Domnich, Steven L. Miller, Willam E. Mayo, and Richard A. Haber c-BN Seeding Effect on the Phase Transition of a-BN(OC) Compound 83Chawon Hwang, Metin rnek, Vladislav Domnich, William E. Mayo, Steve L. Miller, and Richard A. Haber Screening of Silicon Precursors for Incorporation into Boron Carbide 93Anthony Etzold, Richard Haber, and William Rafaniello Processing of Boron Rich Boron Carbide 99Tyler Munhollon, Rich Haber, and William Rafaniello Reaction Bonded SiC/Diamond Composites: Properties and Impact Behavior in High Strain Rate Applications 111S. Salamone, M. Aghajanian, S.E Horner, and J.Q. Zheng Influence of Powder Oxygen Content on Silicon Carbide Microstructure and Properties 119V. DeLucca and R. A. Haber Preparation, Characterization and Development of TiB2 Hard Ceramic Materials 131Azmi Mert Celik, Richard A. Haber, Kanak Kuwelkar, and William Rafaniello Improving Fracture Toughness of Alumina with Multi-Walled Carbon Nanotube and Alumina Fiber Reinforcements 137J. Lo, R. Zhang, B. Shalchi-Amirkhiz, D.Walsh, M. Bolduc, S. Lin, B. Simard, K. Bosnick, M. O’Toole, A. Merati, and M. Bielawski Author Index 147

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe Ceramic Engineering and Science Proceeding has been published by The American Ceramic Society since 1980. This series contains a collection of papers dealing with issues in both traditional ceramics (i.e., glass, whitewares, refractories, and porcelain enamel) and advanced ceramics. Topics covered in the area of advanced ceramic include bioceramics, nanomaterials, composites, solid oxide fuel cells, mechanical properties and structural design, advanced ceramic coatings, ceramic armor, porous ceramics, and more.Table of ContentsPreface vii Introduction ix BIOCERAMICS Potential of Bioactive Glass Scaffolds as Implants for Structural Bone Repair 3Mohamed N. Rahaman, B. Sonny Bal, and Lynda F. Bonewald In Vitro Degradation and Conversion of Melt-Derived Bioactive Glass Microfibers in Simulated Body Fluid 17Mohamed N. Rahaman, Xin Liu, and Delbert E. Day On the Formation of Apatites in the Chemically Bonded CaO-Al2O3-SiO2-H2O Bioceramic System 29Leif Hermansson, Gunilla Gomez-Ortega, Emil Abrahamsson, and Jesper Lööf Fabrication and Characterization of Nano Bioglass-Ceramic Scaffold for Bone Tissue Engineering 37Sampath Kumar Arepalli, Himanshu Tripathi, M. Vyshali Nanda, V.Sri Sravya, Ram Pyare, and S. P. Singh Synthesis and Characterization of Co-Cu Ferrite and Bioglass Composites for Hyperthermia Treatment of Cancer 51V. Chalisgaonkar, K. Pandey, A. S. Kumar, H. Tripathi, S. P. Singh, and R. Pyare Alpha–Beta Phase Transformation in Tricalcium Phosphate (TCP) Ceramics: Effect of Mg2+ Doping 63Matteo Frasnelli and Vincenzo M. Sglavo Experimental Approach to Study the Thermal Induced State of Stress in a Medical Ceramic Bilayer 71V. Mercurio Effect of Grain Boundary Segregation on the Hydrothermal Degradation of Dental 3Y-TZP Ceramics 81F. Zhang, M. Inokoshi, K. Vanmeensel, B. Van Meerbeek, I. Naert, and J. Vleugels POROUS CERAMICS Treatment of Produced Water using Silicon Carbide Membrane Filters 91Abhaya K. Bakshi, Rajendra Ghimire, Eric Sheridan, and Melanie Kuhn Microcapsules from Pickering Emulsions Stabilized by Clay Particles 107Gisèle L. Lecomte-Nana, Volga Niknam, Anne Aimable, Marguerite Bienia, David Kpogbemabou, Jean-Charles Robert-Arnouil, and Asma Lajmi Author Index 125

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe Ceramic Engineering and Science Proceeding has been published by The American Ceramic Society since 1980. This series contains a collection of papers dealing with issues in both traditional ceramics (i.e., glass, whitewares, refractories, and porcelain enamel) and advanced ceramics. Topics covered in the area of advanced ceramic include bioceramics, nanomaterials, composites, solid oxide fuel cells, mechanical properties and structural design, advanced ceramic coatings, ceramic armor, porous ceramics, and more.Table of ContentsPreface ix Introduction xi ADVANCED PROCESSING AND MANUFACTURING Development of High Temperature Joining and Thermomechanical Characterization Approaches for SiC/SiC Composites 3Michael C. Halbig, Mrityunjay Singh, and Jerry Lang Microstructural Observation of Interfaces in Diffusion Bonded Silicon Carbide Ceramics by TEM 13Hiroshi Tsuda, Shigeo Mori, Michael C. Halbig, Mrityunjay Singh, and Rajiv Asthana Preparation and Characterization of Rb-SiC Ceramics Fabricated from Phenolic Resin/SiC 21Akihiro Shimamura, Mikinori Hotta, Tatsuki Ohji, and Naoki Kondo New Combined Method of MPS and FEM for Simulating Friction Stir Processing 27Hisashi Serizawa and Fumikazu Miyasaka Novel Visualizing Technique of the Tips of the Cracks for Indentation Fracture Resistance Method 37H. Miyazaki and Y. Yoshizawa Slip-Casting by Water-Absorbing Resin Mold Enables Crack-Free Ceramic Molding System and Products with Partially Different Thicknesses 45Akio Matsumoto Influence of Lanthanoid Dopant and N/O Substitution on the Electronic Structure and Luminescent Properties of Lanthanum Silicon Oxynitride Phosphors 55I.A.M. Ibrahim, Z. Len éš, L. Benco, and P. Šajgalík Effect of Ti3SiC2 Particulates on the Mechanical and Tribological Behavior of Sn Matrix Composites 65T. Hammann, R. Johnson, M. F. Riyad, and S. Gupta Field Assisted Sintering of Silicate Glass-Containing Alumina 75Mattia Biesuz and Vincenzo M. Sglavo Modeling the First Activation Stages of the Fe(hfa)2TMEDA CVD Precursor on a Heated Growth Surface 83Gloria Tabacchi, Ettore Fois, Davide Barreca, Giorgio Carraro, Alberto Gasparotto, and Chiara Maccato Development of High Aspect Ratio Hexagonal Boron Nitride Filler by Mechanical Exfoliation 91Yuichi Tominaga, Kimiyasu Sato, Daisuke Shimamoto, Yusuke Imai, and Yuji Hotta Preparation and Characterization of Nanostructured Films: Study of Hydrophobicity and Antibacterial Properties for Surface Protection 101M. Barberio, S. Veltri, E. Sokullu, F. Xu, M.A. Gauthier, and P. Antici ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING AND 3D PRINTING 3-D Printing and Characterization of Polymer Composites with Different Reinforcements 115Anton Salem, Mrityunjay Singh, and Michael C. Halbig Additive Manufacturing of Drainage Segments for Cooling System of Crucible Melting Furnaces 123Miranda Fateri, Andreas Gebhardt, and Georg Renftle Additive Manufacturing of Silicon Carbide-Based Ceramics by 3-D Printing Technologies 133Shirley X. Zhu, Michael C. Halbig, and Mrityunjay Singh Additive Manufacturing of Light Weight Ceramic Matrix Composites for Gas Turbine Engine Applications 145Mrityunjay Singh, Michael C. Halbig, and Joseph E. Grady Application of Selective Separation Sintering in Ceramics 3D Printing 151J. Zhang and B. Khoshnevis Contour Crafting of Advanced Ceramic Materials 159Mahmood Shirooyeh, Mohammadaref Vali, David Shackleford, Payman Torabi, Paul W. Rehrig, Oh-Hun Kwon, and Behrokh Khoshnevis Author Index 169

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe Ceramic Engineering and Science Proceeding has been published by The American Ceramic Society since 1980. This series contains a collection of papers dealing with issues in both traditional ceramics (i.e., glass, whitewares, refractories, and porcelain enamel) and advanced ceramics. Topics covered in the area of advanced ceramic include bioceramics, nanomaterials, composites, solid oxide fuel cells, mechanical properties and structural design, advanced ceramic coatings, ceramic armor, porous ceramics, and more.Table of ContentsPreface vii Introduction ix Ceramics and Composites for Sustainable Nuclear and Fusion Energy Hoop Tensile Strength of CMC Tubes for LWRs Applications Using Internal Pressurization via Elastomeric Insert: New ASTM Method 3Michael G. Jenkins, Jonathan A. Salem, and Janine Gallego Properties of Al2O3–CaO Glass Joints of Silicon Carbide Tubes 11M. Gentile and T. Abram Corrosion-Resistant Ternary Carbides for use in Heavy Liquid Metal Coolants 19K. Lambrinou, T. Lapauw, A. Jianu, A. Weisenburger, J. Ejenstam, P. Szakálos, J. Wallenius, E. Ström, K. Vanmeensel, and J. Vleugels Development of Accident Tolerant SiC/SiC Composite for Nuclear Reactor Channel Box 35Shoko Suyama, Masaru Ukai, Masayuki Uchihashi, Hideaki Heki, Satoko Tajima, Kazunari Okonogi, and Kazuo Kakiuchi Thermal Diffusivity Measurement of Curved Samples using the Flash Method 43J. Zhang, H.E. Khalifa, C. Deck, J. Sheeder, and C. A. Back Ceramics for Energy Generation, Conversion, and Rechargeable Energy Storage Glass Ceramic Separators for Room Temperature Operating Sodium Batteries 59D. Wagner, A. Rost, J. Schilm, M. Fritsch, M. Kusnezoff, and A. Michaelis Avenue towards the Development of New Nanostructured Composite Cathode Materials for Lithium-Ion Batteries 69Nina Kosova Comparative Study of Polysulfide Encapsulation in the Different Carbons Performed by Analytical Tools 85Manu U. M. Patel and Robert Dominko Performance Study of Li-Ion Battery Electrodes Dried using Inline Microwave Hybrid System 101Ramesh D. Peelamedu and Donald A. Seccombe, Jr. Ceramic Materials and Processing for Photonics and Energy Copper Clad Ultra-Thin Flexible Ceramic Substrate for High Power Electronics 119John A. Olenick, Kathleen Olenick, and John Andresakis Roll-to-Roll Ultrathin Flexible Ceramic for Cost Effective Coating 131John A. Olenick, Viswanathan Venkateswaran, and Kathleen Olenick Nanomaterials for Energy Conversion—The Synthesis of Highly Crystalline Ytterbium (III) Fluoride Nanoparticles from Ionic Liquids 137Chantal Lorbeer and Anja-Verena Mudring Author Index 149

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe Ceramic Engineering and Science Proceeding has been published by The American Ceramic Society since 1980. This series contains a collection of papers dealing with issues in both traditional ceramics (i.e., glass, whitewares, refractories, and porcelain enamel) and advanced ceramics. Topics covered in the area of advanced ceramic include bioceramics, nanomaterials, composites, solid oxide fuel cells, mechanical properties and structural design, advanced ceramic coatings, ceramic armor, porous ceramics, and more.Table of ContentsPreface ix Introduction xi GEOPOLYMERS AND CHEMICALLY BONDED CERAMICS Properties of Granite Powder Reinforced Potassium Geopolymer 3Daniel S. Roper, Gregory P. Kutyla, and Waltraud M. Kriven Ceramic Felt Reinforced Geopolymer Composites 11Elias C. Koehler and Waltraud M. Kriven Ammonia-Borane Geopolymer (AB-G) Composite 21Lars Schomborg, Zeina Assi, J. Christian Buhl, Claus H. Rüscher, and Michael Wark Monitoring the Structural Evolution during Geopolymer Formation by 27Al NMR 37Ameni Gharzouni, Emmanuel Joussein, Isabel Sobrados, Jesus Sanz, Samir Baklouti, Basma Samet, and Sylvie Rossignol Recycled Geopolymer on New Formulations 49N. Essaidi, L. Vidal, F.Gouny, E. Joussein, and S. Rossignol Impact of Alkaline Solution and Curing Temperature on Microstructure and Mechanical Properties of Alkali-Activated Blast Furnace Slag 61Elodie Prud’homme, Jean Ambroise, and Marie Michel Long-Term Development of Mechanical Strengths of Alkali-Activated Metakaolin, Slag, Fly Ash, and Blends 77F. Jirasit, C. H. Rüscher, L. Lohaus, and P. Chindaprasirt Preparation of Geopolymer-Type Mortar and “Light-Weight Concrete” from Copper Floatation Waste and Coal Combustion By Products 89J. Temuujin, A. Minjigmaa, B. Davaabal, Ts. Zolzaya and U. Bayarzul, Ts.Jadambaa, and C. H. Rüscher Portland Cement with Luffa Fibers 103H. A. Colorado, S. A. Colorado, and R. Buitrago-Sierra VIRTUAL MATERIALS (COMPUTATIONAL) DESIGN AND CERAMIC GENOME Two-Phase Nanocrystalline/Amorphous Simulations of Anisotropic Grain Growth using Q-State Monte-Carlo 115J. B. Allen First Principles Calculations of Dopant Effects in Boron Suboxide 131J. S. Dunn, A. B. Rahane, and Vijay Kumar Composition Dependent Hardness of Covalent Solid Solutions and Its Electronic Structure Origin 143Qing-Miao Hu, Rui Yang, Börje Johansson, and Levente Vitos Experimental and Numerical Determination of the Elastic Moduli of Freeze Cast MMC with Different Lamellae Orientation 153Matthias Merzkirch, Yuri Sinchuk, Kay André Weidenmann, and Romana Piat Doping of CeO2 as a Tunable Buffer Layer for Coated Superconductors: A DFT Study of Mechanical and Electronic Properties 169Danny E. P. Vanpoucke Quantitative Analysis of (La0.8Sr0.2)0.98MnO3± Electronic Conductivity using CALPHAD Approach 179Shadi Darvish, Surendra K, Saxena, and Yu Zhong ADVANCED CERAMIC COATINGS The Effects of Ni3Al Binder Content on the Electrochemical Response of TiC-Ni3Al Cermets 193M. B. Holmes, A. Ibrahim, G. J. Kipouros, Z. N. Farhat, and K. P. Plucknett A Study of a NiAl Bondcoat Deposited onto CMSX-4 Superalloy for Thermal Barrier Applications 203A. D. Chandio, X. Zhao, Y. Chen, M. Bai, and P. Xiao Mechanical Properties of Air Plasma Sprayed Environmental Barrier Coating (EBC) Systems: Preliminary Assessments 219Bradley T. Richards, Dongming Zhu, Louis J. Ghosn, and Haydn N. G. Wadley Iron-Copper Nitride Thin Films Fabricated by Sputtering 239Xingwu Wang, James P. Parry, Hrishikesh Kamat, Ruikun Pan, and Hao Zeng MATERIALS FOR EXTREME ENVIRONMENTS: ULTRAHIGH TEMPERATURE CERAMICS AND NANOLAMINATED TERNARY CARBIDES AND NITRIDES Influence of Nitrogen Pressure on SHS Synthesis of Ti2AlN Powders 253L. Chlubny, J. Lis, and M. M. Buko Ultra High Temperature Ceramic Coatings for Environmental Protection of Cf/SiC Composites 261Franziska Uhlmann, Christian Wilhelmi, Steffen Beyer, Stephan Schmidt-Wimmer, and Stefan Laure MATERIALS DIAGNOSTICS AND STRUCTURAL HEALTH MONITORING OF CERAMIC COMPONENTS AND SYSTEMS Nanomonitoring of Ceramic Surface 275V. A. Lapina, P. P. Pershukevich, T. A. Pavich, S. B. Bushuk, and J. Opitz Semi-Automated Inspection Unit for Ceramics 283Christian Wolf, Andreas Lehmann, and Gregor Unglaube ADVANCED MATERIALS AND INNOVATIVE PROCESSING FOR THE INDUSTRIAL ROOT TECHNOLOGY Modelling of Fluid Flow in Tape Casting of Thin Ceramics: Analytical Approaches and Numerical Investigations 291Masoud Jabbari and Jesper Hattel 2ND EUROPEAN-USA ENGINEERING CERAMICS SUMMIT AND 4TH GLOBAL YOUNG INVESTIGATORS FORUM Wettability and Reactivity of Y2O3 with Liquid Nickel and Its Alloys 309N. Sobczak, R.M. Purgert, R. Asthana, J.J. Sobczak, M. Homa, R. Nowak, G. Bruzda, A. Siewiorek, and Z. Pirowski Computational Materials Science: Where Theory Meets Experiments 323Danny E. P. Vanpoucke Author Index 335

Read more less

Book SynopsisCovers theoretical concepts in offshore mechanics with consideration to new applications, including offshore wind farms, ocean energy devices, aquaculture, floating bridges, and submerged tunnels This comprehensive book covers important aspects of the required analysis and design of offshore structures and systems and the fundamental background material for offshore engineering. Whereas most of the books currently available in the field use traditional oil, gas, and ship industry examples in order to explain the fundamentals in offshore mechanics, this book uses more recent applications, including recent fixed-bottom and floating offshore platforms, ocean energy structures and systems such as wind turbines, wave energy converters, tidal turbines and hybrid marine platforms. Offshore Mechanics covers traditional and more recent methodologies used in offshore structure modelling (including SPH and hydroelasticity models). It also examines numerical techniquTable of ContentsAbout the Authors ix Preface xi Acknowledgements xiii 1 Preliminaries 1 2 Offshore Structures 7 2.1 Ship]shaped Offshore Structures 7 2.2 Oil and Gas Offshore Platforms 10 2.3 Offshore Wind Turbines 13 2.4 Wave Energy Converters 22 2.5 Tidal Energy Converters 28 2.6 Combined Offshore Energy Systems 32 2.7 Multipurpose Offshore Structures and Systems 35 2.8 Submerged Floating Tunnels 36 2.9 Floating Bridges 39 2.10 Aquaculture and Fish Farms 42 References 44 3 Offshore Environmental Conditions 51 3.1 Introduction 51 3.2 Wave Conditions 51 3.2.1 Basic Characteristics of Free Surface Normal Waves 52 3.2.2 Swells 54 3.2.3 Wave Propagation in Space 54 3.2.4 Wave Measurement 55 3.3 Wind 55 3.3.1 Global Wind Pattern 55 3.3.2 Wind Measurement 57 3.4 Currents 58 3.4.1 Tidal Currents 58 3.4.2 Wind]driven Currents 59 3.4.2.1 Global Wind]driven Currents 59 3.4.2.2 Longshore Currents 59 3.4.2.3 Rip Currents 59 3.4.2.4 Upwelling Currents 60 3.5 Joint Distribution of Waves and Winds 61 3.6 Oceanographic and Bathymetric Aspects 68 3.7 Scour and Erosion 71 3.8 Extreme Environmental Conditions 75 3.9 Environmental Impact of Offshore Structures’ Application 79 References 82 4 Hydrodynamic and Aerodynamic Analyses of Offshore Structures 87 4.1 Introduction 87 4.2 Wave Kinematics 87 4.2.1 Regular Waves 87 4.2.2 Ocean Waves 92 4.3 Wave Loads on Offshore Structures 95 4.3.1 Wave Loads Induced by Inviscid Flows 97 4.3.1.1 Inviscid Loads Due to Forced Oscillation of an Offshore Structure (Concept of Added Mass and Damping Coefficients) 99 4.3.1.2 Added Mass and Damping Coefficients in the Presence of a Free Surface 102 4.3.1.3 Considering Diffraction Effects on Calculating Wave Loads 104 4.3.2 Morison Equation 106 4.4 Tides and Currents Kinematics 107 4.5 Current Loads on Offshore Structures 109 4.6 Wind Kinematics 110 4.6.1 Wind Data Analysis 111 4.6.2 Extreme Wind Conditions 113 4.6.3 Wind Speed Variation with Height 114 4.7 Wind Loads on Offshore Structures 115 4.8 Aerodynamic Analysis of Offshore Wind Turbines 117 4.8.1 1D Momentum Theory 117 4.8.2 Effects of Wind Turbine Rotation on Wind Thrust Force 119 4.8.3 Blade Element Momentum Theory 121 References 124 5 Fundamentals of Structural Analysis 127 5.1 Background 127 5.1.1 Structural Components 128 5.1.2 Stress and Strain 134 5.2 Structural Analysis of Beams 139 5.2.1 Introduction 139 5.2.2 Beams under Torsion 141 5.2.3 Bending of Beams 147 5.2.4 Beam Deflections 152 5.2.5 Buckling of Beams 155 5.3 Mathematical Models for Structural Dynamics of Beams 159 5.3.1 Bernoulli–Euler Beam Theory 161 5.4 Frame Structures and Matrix Analysis 166 5.5 Plate Theories 172 5.5.1 Introduction 172 5.5.2 Plane Stress 174 5.5.3 Mathematical Models for Bending of Plates 176 References 178 6 Numerical Methods in Offshore Structural Mechanics 183 6.1 Structural Dynamics 183 6.2 Stress Analysis 188 6.3 Time]Domain and Frequency]Domain Analysis 189 6.4 Multibody Approach 197 6.5 Finite Element Method 199 6.6 Nonlinear Analysis 199 6.7 Extreme Response Analysis and Prediction 201 6.8 Testing and Validation of Offshore Structures 204 6.9 Examples 211 6.9.1 Example 6.1 211 6.9.2 Example 6.2 213 References 214 7 Numerical Methods in Offshore Fluid Mechanics 217 7.1 Introduction 217 7.2 Potential Flow Theory Approach 217 7.2.1 Three]dimensional Problem 222 7.2.2 Numerical Consideration 224 7.3 CFD Approach 225 7.3.1 Discretization of the Navier–Stokes Equation on Rectangular Structured Grids 226 7.3.2 Advection Terms 227 7.3.3 Viscous Terms 228 7.3.4 Pressure Term and Mass Conservation Equation 228 7.3.5 Solving Navier–Stokes Equations 229 7.3.6 Poisson Equation 230 7.3.7 The Effects of Free Surface 233 7.3.8 Volume of Fluid Method 234 7.3.9 Level Set Method 236 7.3.10 Discretization of Level Set Function 237 7.3.11 Discretization of Reinitialization Equation 240 7.3.12 Studying Solid–Fluid Interaction 241 7.3.13 Immersed Boundary Methods 242 7.3.14 Discretization of the NS Equation in a Mapped Coordinate System 244 7.3.15 Grid Generation in a Mapped Coordinate System: Stretched Grid 248 7.3.16 Grid Generation in the Mapped Coordinate System: Body]Fitted Grids 249 7.3.17 Body]Fitted Grid Generation by Using Unstructured Grids 251 References 252 8 Mooring and Foundation Analysis 255 8.1 Mooring Considerations 255 8.1.1 Catenary Moorings 261 8.1.2 Taut Moorings 263 8.2 Soil Mechanics 267 8.3 Foundation Design 275 References 285 Index 287

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe first book to focus on the role of glass as a material of critical importance to the wine industry For centuries glass has been the material of choice for storing, shipping, and sipping wine. How did that come to pass, and why? To what extent have glassmaking and wine making co-evolved over the centuries? The first book to focus on the role of glass as a material of critical importance to the wine industry, The Glass of Wine answers these and other fascinating questions. The authors deftly interweave compelling historical, technical, and esthetic narratives in their exploration of glass as the vessel of choice for holding, storing, and consuming wine. They discuss the traditions informing the shapes and sizes of wine bottles and wine glasses, and they demystify the selection of the right glass for red versus white varietals, as well as sparkling and dessert wines. In addition, they review the technology of modern glassmaking and consider the various rTrade ReviewPodcast: https://soundcloud.com/andy-fell/the-glass-of-wine Blog/Newsletter: https://www.ucdavis.edu/uc-davis-books/wine-place-glass-wineTable of ContentsPreface ix Acknowledgments xi About the Authors xiii 1. The Perfect Material – for Wine 1 2. A Brief History of Wine – Storing and Drinking Wine Before Glass 15 3. A Brief History of Glass – and How It Came to Dominate Wine Appreciation 27 4. Modern Winemaking – A Role for Materials Other Than Glass and Ceramics 41 5. Ceramics Around theWinery – Alternatives to Oak and Stainless Steel 59 6. Glass Around the Winery – From Barrel to Lab 65 7. Perfection Through Fire – Modern Glassmaking 77 8. Beauty of a Random Nature – Glass Structure on the Atomic Scale 87 9. The Heel of Achilles – Why Glass Breaks 97 10. Let It Be Perfectly Clear – Why Glass Is Transparent 106 11. The Shape of Things – I. Why Bottles Look theWay They Do 119 12. The Shape of Things – II. The Rise (and Fall?) of Varietal-Specific Stemware 130 13. The Controversy over Cork – Glass Stoppers to the Rescue? 141 14. Perfection through Air – Glass for Aerating and Decanting Wine 156 15. The Glass of Wine – Now and Forever? 162 Appendix A: A Primer on Primary Bonding 175 Appendix B: Glossary 183 Index 191

Read more less

Book SynopsisCovers the latest developments in modeling elastohydrodynamic lubrication (EHL) problems using the finite element method (FEM) This comprehensive guide introduces readers to a powerful technology being used today in the modeling of elastohydrodynamic lubrication (EHL) problems. It provides a general framework based on the finite element method (FEM) for dealing with multi-physical problems of complex nature (such as the EHL problem) and is accompanied by a website hosting a user-friendly FEM software for the treatment of EHL problems, based on the methodology described in the book. Finite Element Modeling of Elastohydrodynamic Lubrication Problems begins with an introduction to both the EHL and FEM fields. It then covers Standard FEM modeling of EHL problems, before going over more advanced techniques that employ model order reduction to allow significant savings in computational overhead. Finally, the book looks at applications that show how the developed modeling framework could be uTable of ContentsPreface xiii Nomenclature xvii About the CompanionWebsite xxv Part I Introduction 1 1 Elastohydrodynamic Lubrication (EHL) 3 1.1 EHL Regime 3 1.2 Governing Equations in Dimensional Form 7 1.2.1 Generalized Reynolds Equation 9 1.2.2 FilmThickness Equation 15 1.2.3 Linear Elasticity Equations 18 1.2.4 Load Balance Equation 24 1.2.5 Energy Equations 24 1.2.6 Shear Stress Equations 28 1.3 Governing Equations in Dimensionless Form 28 1.3.1 Dimensionless Parameters 29 1.3.2 Generalized Reynolds Equation 31 1.3.3 FilmThickness Equation 32 1.3.4 Linear Elasticity Equations 33 1.3.5 Load Balance Equation 34 1.3.6 Energy Equations 34 1.3.7 Shear Stress Equations 36 1.4 Lubricant Constitutive Behavior 36 1.4.1 Pressure and Temperature Dependence 37 1.4.1.1 Density 37 1.4.1.2 Viscosity 39 1.4.1.3 Thermal Conductivity and Heat Capacity 41 1.4.2 Shear Dependence of Viscosity 41 1.4.3 Limiting Shear Stress 43 1.5 Dimensionless Groups 44 1.6 Review of EHL Numerical Modeling Techniques 46 1.7 Conclusion 52 References 52 2 Finite ElementMethod (FEM) 59 2.1 FEM:The Basic Idea 59 2.2 Model PDE 61 2.3 Steady-State Linear FEM Analysis 63 2.3.1 Elementary Integral Formulations 64 2.3.1.1 Weighted-Residual Form 64 2.3.1.2 Weak Form 65 2.3.2 Solution Approximation 66 2.3.2.1 Meshing and Discretization 67 2.3.2.2 Lagrange Linear Elements 69 2.3.2.3 Lagrange Quadratic Elements 73 2.3.3 Galerkin Formulation 75 2.3.4 Integral Evaluations: Mapping between Reference and Actual Elements 78 2.3.5 Connectivity of Elements 85 2.3.6 Assembly Process and Treatment of B.C.’s 86 2.3.7 Resolution Process 90 2.3.8 Post-Processing of the Solution 91 2.3.9 One-Dimensional Example 92 2.4 Steady-State Nonlinear FEM Analysis 99 2.4.1 Newton Methods for Nonlinear Systems of Equations 99 2.4.1.1 Newton Method 100 2.4.1.2 Damped-NewtonMethod 102 2.4.2 Nonlinear FEM Formulation 105 2.5 Transient FEM Analysis 109 2.5.1 Space-Time Discretization 110 2.5.2 Time-Dependent FEM Formulation 111 2.6 Multi-Physical FEM Analysis 112 2.6.1 Multi-Physical FEM Formulation 113 2.6.2 Assembly Process 115 2.6.3 Coupling Strategies 116 2.6.3.1 Weak Coupling 117 2.6.3.2 Full/Strong Coupling 117 2.7 Stabilized FEM Formulations 118 2.7.1 Isotropic Diffusion 120 2.7.2 Streamline Upwind Petrov–Galerkin 121 2.7.3 Galerkin Least Squares 121 2.8 Conclusion 123 References 123 Part II Finite ElementModeling Techniques 125 3 Steady-State Isothermal Newtonian Line Contacts 127 3.1 Contact Configuration 127 3.2 Geometry, Computational Domains, and Meshing 128 3.2.1 Geometry 128 3.2.2 Computational Domains 128 3.2.3 Meshing and Discretization 130 3.3 Governing Equations and Boundary Conditions 132 3.3.1 Reynolds Equation 133 3.3.2 Linear Elasticity Equations 136 3.3.3 Load Balance Equation 138 3.4 FEM Model 138 3.4.1 Connectivity of Elements 139 3.4.2 Weak Form Formulation 139 3.4.3 Elementary Matrix Formulations 141 3.4.3.1 Elastic Part 142 3.4.3.2 Hydrodynamic Part 144 3.4.3.3 Load Balance Part 145 3.4.4 Stabilized Formulations 146 3.5 Overall Solution Procedure 150 3.6 Model Calibration and Preliminary Results 153 3.6.1 Mesh Sensitivity Analysis 153 3.6.2 Penalty Term Tuning 153 3.6.3 Solid Domain Size Calibration 156 3.6.4 Preliminary Results 157 3.7 Conclusion 161 References 161 4 Steady-State Isothermal Newtonian Point Contacts 165 4.1 Contact Configuration 165 4.2 Geometry, Computational Domains, and Meshing 166 4.2.1 Geometry 166 4.2.2 Computational Domains 166 4.2.3 Meshing and Discretization 169 4.3 Governing Equations and Boundary Conditions 170 4.3.1 Reynolds Equation 171 4.3.2 Linear Elasticity Equations 173 4.3.3 Load Balance Equation 174 4.4 FEM Model 175 4.4.1 Connectivity of Elements 175 4.4.2 Weak Form Formulation 176 4.4.3 Elementary Matrix Formulations 177 4.4.3.1 Elastic Part 178 4.4.3.2 Hydrodynamic Part 180 4.4.3.3 Load Balance Part 182 4.4.4 Stabilized Formulations 183 4.5 Overall Solution Procedure 187 4.6 Model Calibration and Preliminary Results 190 4.6.1 Mesh Sensitivity Analysis 190 4.6.2 Penalty Term Tuning 191 4.6.3 Preliminary Results 192 4.7 Conclusion 196 References 196 5 Steady-State Thermal Non-Newtonian Line Contacts 199 5.1 Contact Configuration 199 5.2 Geometry, Computational Domains, and Meshing 200 5.2.1 Geometry 200 5.2.2 Computational Domains 200 5.2.3 Meshing and Discretization 201 5.3 Governing Equations and Boundary Conditions 203 5.3.1 Generalized Reynolds Equation 204 5.3.2 Linear Elasticity Equations 205 5.3.3 Load Balance Equation 205 5.3.4 Energy Equations 205 5.3.5 Shear Stress Equation 207 5.4 FEM Model 208 5.4.1 Connectivity of Elements 208 5.4.2 Weak Form Formulation 210 5.4.3 Elementary Matrix Formulations 213 5.4.3.1 Elastic Part 215 5.4.3.2 Hydrodynamic Part 215 5.4.3.3 Load Balance Part 218 5.4.3.4 Thermal Part 219 5.4.3.5 Shear Stress Part 224 5.4.4 Stabilized Formulations 225 5.5 Overall Solution Procedure 227 5.6 Model Calibration and Preliminary Results 228 5.6.1 Mesh Sensitivity Analysis 230 5.6.2 Full versusWeak Coupling 230 5.6.3 Preliminary Results 239 5.7 Conclusion 240 References 241 6 Steady-State Thermal Non-Newtonian Point Contacts 243 6.1 Contact Configuration 243 6.2 Geometry, Computational Domains, and Meshing 244 6.2.1 Geometry 244 6.2.2 Computational Domains 244 6.2.3 Meshing and Discretization 245 6.3 Governing Equations and Boundary Conditions 247 6.3.1 Generalized Reynolds Equation 248 6.3.2 Linear Elasticity Equations 249 6.3.3 Load Balance Equation 249 6.3.4 Energy Equations 249 6.3.5 Shear Stress Equations 252 6.4 FEM Model 252 6.4.1 Connectivity of Elements 253 6.4.2 Weak Form Formulation 255 6.4.3 Elementary Matrix Formulations 258 6.4.3.1 Elastic Part 260 6.4.3.2 Hydrodynamic Part 261 6.4.3.3 Load Balance Part 264 6.4.3.4 Thermal Part 264 6.4.3.5 Shear Stress Part 270 6.4.4 Stabilized Formulations 273 6.5 Overall Solution Procedure 274 6.6 Model Calibration and Preliminary Results 275 6.6.1 Mesh Sensitivity Analysis 276 6.6.2 Preliminary Results 276 6.7 Conclusion 280 References 280 7 Transient Effects 281 7.1 Contact Configuration 281 7.2 Geometry, Computational Domains, and Meshing 281 7.3 Governing Equations, Boundary, and Initial Conditions 282 7.3.1 Reynolds Equation 282 7.3.2 Linear Elasticity Equations 284 7.3.3 Load Balance Equation 284 7.4 FEM Model 284 7.4.1 Connectivity of Elements 285 7.4.2 Weak Form Formulation 285 7.4.3 Elementary Matrix Formulations 286 7.4.3.1 Elastic Part 288 7.4.3.2 Hydrodynamic Part 288 7.4.3.3 Load Balance Part 289 7.5 Overall Solution Procedure 289 7.6 Preliminary Results 291 7.7 Conclusion 295 References 295 8 Model Order Reduction (MOR) Techniques 297 8.1 Introduction 297 8.2 Reduced Solution Space Techniques 299 8.2.1 Modal Reduction 302 8.2.2 Ritz-Vector-Like Method 303 8.2.3 EHL-Basis Technique 304 8.2.3.1 Typical Test Case Results 306 8.2.3.2 Performance Analysis: Reduced versus Full Model 310 8.3 Static Condensation with Splitting (SCS) 313 8.3.1 Static Condensation 315 8.3.2 Splitting 316 8.3.3 Overall Numerical Procedure 316 8.3.4 Results and Discussion 320 8.3.4.1 Typical Test Cases 320 8.3.4.2 Splitting Algorithm Tuning 321 8.3.4.3 Preservation of Solution Scheme Generality 327 8.3.4.4 Performance Analysis 329 8.4 Conclusion 335 References 337 Part III Applications 339 9 Pressure and Film Thickness Predictions 341 9.1 Introduction 341 9.2 Qualitative Parametric Analysis 341 9.2.1 Isothermal Newtonian Conditions 342 9.2.2 Thermal Non-Newtonian Conditions 345 9.3 Quantitative Predictions 348 9.4 Analytical FilmThickness Predictions 351 9.4.1 Numerical Experiments 352 9.4.2 Correction Factors and FilmThickness Formulas 353 9.4.3 Experimental Validation 355 9.5 Conclusion 357 References 359 10 Friction Predictions 361 10.1 Introduction 361 10.2 Quantitative Predictions 363 10.3 Friction Regimes 369 10.3.1 Relevant Dimensionless Numbers 370 10.3.1.1 Weissenberg Number 370 10.3.1.2 Nahme–Griffith Number 370 10.3.1.3 LSS Number 370 10.3.1.4 Roller Compliance Number 370 10.3.2 Delineation of Friction Regimes 371 10.3.2.1 Linear Regime 375 10.3.2.2 Nonlinear Viscous Regime 376 10.3.2.3 Plateau Regime 377 10.3.2.4 Thermoviscous Regime 378 10.3.3 Friction Regimes Chart 378 10.4 Conclusion 380 References 381 11 Coated EHL Contacts 383 11.1 Introduction 383 11.2 Modeling Subtleties 385 11.3 Influence of Coating Properties on EHL Contact Performance 388 11.3.1 Pressure and FilmThickness 389 11.3.2 Friction 391 11.3.3 Discussion 394 11.3.3.1 Influence of Coating Mechanical Properties 394 11.3.3.2 Influence of Coating Thermal Properties 396 11.4 Conclusion 402 References 403 Appendices 405 A Numerical Integration 407 A.1 Line Elements 412 A.2 Triangular Elements 412 A.3 Rectangular Elements 413 A.4 Tetrahedral Elements 414 A.5 Prism Elements 415 B Sparse Matrix Storage 417 B.1 Triplet Storage (TS) 418 B.2 Compressed Row Storage (CRS) 419 B.3 Compressed Column Storage (CCS) 419 C Shell T9 Lubricant Properties 423 C.1 Pressure and Temperature Dependence of Density 423 C.2 Pressure and Temperature Dependence of Viscosity 424 C.3 Shear Dependence of Viscosity 425 C.4 Pressure Dependence of Limiting Shear Stress 426 C.5 Pressure and Temperature Dependence ofThermal Properties 427 References 429 Index 431

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis volume contains a collection of 14 papers submitted from the below five symposia held during the 11th International Symposium on Ceramic Materials and Components for Energy and Environmental Applications (CMCEE-11), June 14-19, 2015 in Vancouver, BC, Canada: Photocatalysts for Energy and Environmental Applications Advanced Functional Materials, Devices, and Systems for the Environment Geopolymers, Inorganic Polymer Ceramics and Sustainable Composites Macroporous Ceramics For Environmental and Energy Applications Advanced Sensors for Energy, Environment, and Health Applications Table of ContentsPreface vii PHOTOCATALYSTS FOR ENERGY AND ENVIRONMENTAL APPLICATIONSEffect of Structural Properties on the Photoelectrochemical Performance of TiO2 Films 3A. K. Alves, A. C. Teloeken, F. A. Berutti, and C. P. Bergmann Photocatalytic Degradation of Dyes using MWCNT-TiO2 Composites as Catalyst 13F. A. Berutti, A. P. Garcia, A. K. Alves, S. Da Dalt, and C. P. Bergmann Synthesis of the TiO2-Long Lasting Phosphor (Sr4Al14O25:Eu2+,Dy3+) Composite and Its Photocatalytic Reaction Properties 23Jung-Sik Kim, Hyun-Je Sung, and Sang-Chul Jung Development of Microtextured Titanium Dioxide Surface by using Microcutting Techniques 35J. Shimizu, T. Yamamoto, L. Zhou, T. Onuki, and H. Ojima Morphology Control and Photocatalytic Activity of TiO2 Film 43Jinshu Wang, Hongyi Li, Junshu Wu, Qian Cai, Yilong Yang, and Bingxin Zhao ADVANCED FUNCTIONAL MATERIALS, DEVICES, AND SYSTEMS FOR THE ENVIRONMENT Electrochemical Devices with Oxide Ion Electrolytes for Formation of Hydrogen and Decomposition of Carbon Dioxide from the CH4–CO2 Mixed Biogas 59Yoshihiro Hirata, Soichiro Sameshima, and Taro Shimonosono Gastight, Closed Pore Inclusive Porous Ceramics through a Superplastically Foaming Method 69Akira Kishimoto, Atsuki Tohji, Takashi Teranishi, and Hidetaka Hayashi Cyanosilylation of Benzaldehyde with Trimethylsilyl Cyanide Over A-Site Metal Substituted Perovskite-Type Oxide Catalyst Prepared by Thermal Decomposition of Heteronuclear Cyano Complex Precursors 81Syuhei Yamaguchi, Hiroki Wada, Takahisa Okuwa, and Hidenori Yahiro GEOPOLYMERS, INORGANIC POLYMER CERAMICS, AND SUSTAINABLE COMPOSITES Nanoparticles Seeded Geopolymers 93Matteo Pernechele, Tom Troczynski, and Marek Pawlik NH3BH3 and NaBH4 Enclosed in Geopolymers and Zeolites 105C. H. Rüscher, L. Schomborg, Z. Assi, and J. C. Buhl MACROPOROUS CERAMICS FOR ENVIRONMENTAL AND ENERGY APPLICATIONS Silicon Carbide Membranes for Water Filtration Applications 121Melanie Kuhn, Abhaya Bakshi, Eric Sheridan, Fabiano Rodrigues, Adrien Vincent, Malte Moeller, and Ronald Neufert Fabrication of Porous Ceramics with Cylindrical Pores and Incorporating Pores by Unidirectional Solidification Process 129Shunkichi Ueno and Jun-Woo Lee ADVANCED SENSORS FOR ENERGY, ENVIRONMENT, AND HEALTH APPLICATIONS Printed Cantilevers and MOS Gas Sensors for Hazardous Gas Detection at Room Temperature 139Hélène Debéda, Van Son Nguyen, Fernando Almazán, Maria Pina Pilar, Véronique Jubéra, and Claude Lucat Sensing Characterization of the MOS Micro Gas Sensor Array on Gas Mixture 147Bum-Joon Kim and Jung-Sik Kim Author Index 159

Read more less

Book SynopsisA collection of 25 papers presented at the 11th International Symposium on Ceramic Materials and Components for Energy and Environmental Applications (CMCEE-11), June 14-19, 2015 in Vancouver, BC, Canada. Paper in this volume were presented in the below six symposia from Track 1 on the topic of Ceramics for Energy Conversion, Storage, and Distribution Systems: High-Temperature Fuel Cells and Electrolysis Ceramic-Related Materials, Devices, and Processing for Heat-to-Electricity Direct Conversion Material Science and Technologies for Advanced Nuclear Fission and Fusion Energy Advanced Batteries and Supercapacitors for Energy Storage Applications Materials for Solar Thermal Energy Conversion and Storage High Temperature Superconductors: Materials, Technologies, and Systems Table of ContentsPreface ix HIGH-TEMPERATURE FUEL CELLS AND ELECTROLYSIS Effect of Additives on Self-Healing of Plasma Sprayed Ceramic Coatings 3N. Sata, A. Ansar, and K. A. Friedrich Development of Ceramic Functional Layers for Solid Oxide Cells 19Günter Schiller, Rémi Costa, and K. Andreas Friedrich BICU(TI)VOX as a Low/Intermediate Temperature SOFC Electrolyte: Another Look 29Paul Fuierer, Kevin Ring, Joerg Exner, and Ralf Moos Symbolic Analysis of Multi-Stage Electrochemical Oxidation for Enhancement of Electric Efficiency of SOFCs 41Y. Matsuzaki, Y. Tachikawa, T. Hatae, H. Matsumoto, S. Taniguchi, and K. Sasaki Low Temperature AC Electric Field-Assisted Sintering of Unitary Anode-Supported Solid Oxide Fuel Cell 47R. Muccillo, E. N. S. Muccillo, F. C. Fonseca, and D. Z. de Florio SOFC System Development and Field Trials for Commercial Applications 61T. Pfeifer, S. Reuber, M. Hartmann, M. Barthel, and J. Baade Technology Readiness of SOFC Stacks—A Review 77C. Wunderlich High-Temperature Direct Fuel Cell Material Experience 89Chao-Yi Yuh, A. Hilmi, and R. Venkataraman Development of Highly-Efficient Energy Storage System using Solid Oxide Electrolysis Cell 101Masato Yoshino, Tsuneji Kameda, Hisao Watanabe, and Masahiko Yamada CERAMIC-RELATED MATERIALS, DEVICES, AND PROCESSING FOR HEAT-TO-ELECTRICITY DIRECT CONVERSION Thermoelectric Properties Higher Manganese Silicide Containing Small Amount of MnSi/Si Nano-Particles 115Swapnil Ghodke, A. Yamamoto, H. Ikuta, and T. Takeuchi Anomalous Temperature Gradient in Non-Maxwellian Gases 123George S. Levy Thermophysical Property of Poly-Si Phononic Crystals for Thermoelectrics 135Masahiro Nomura and Oliver Paul The Potential of Maximal ZT-Value for Thermoelectric Materials of Mn11Si19 HMS Phase by Calculating Electronic Structure 147Akio Yamamoto, Koichi Kitahara, Hidetoshi Miyazaki, Manabu Inukai, and Tsunehiro Takeuchi MATERIAL SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGIES FOR ADVANCED NUCLEAR FISSION AND FUSION ENERGY Development of Ga Doped Hollandites BaxCsy(Ga2x+yTi8-2x-y)O16 for Cs Immobilization 159Y. Xu, R. Grote, Y. Wen, L. Shuller-Nickles, and K.S. Brinkman Atomistic Simulations of Ceramic Materials Relevant for Nuclear Waste Management: Cases of Monazite and Pyrochlore 165Y. Li, P. M. Kowalski, G. Beridze, A.Blanca-Romero, Y. Ji, V. L. Vinograd, J. Gale, and D. Bosbach Development of Joining Method for Zircaloy and SiC/SiC Composite Tubes by using Fiber Laser 177Hisashi Serizawa, Yuuki Asakura, Joon-Soo Park, Hirotatsu Kishimoto, and Akira Kohyama ADVANCED BATTERIES AND SUPERCAPACITORS FOR ENERGY STORAGE APPLICATIONS An Investigation on the Cycle Performance of LiFePO4 Pouch Cells by a Combination of Synchrotron Based X-Ray Diffraction and Absorption Spectroscopy 187G. T. K. Fey, Y. C. Lin, K. P. Huang, P. J. Wu, J. K. Chang, and H. M. Kao The Influence of the Synthesis Route on Electrochemical Properties of Spinel Type High-Voltage Cathode Material LiNi0.5Mn15O4 for Lithium Ion Batteries 197M. Seidel, K. Nikolowski, M. Wolter, I. Kinski, and A. Michaelis MATERIALS FOR SOLAR THERMAL ENERGY CONVERSION AND STORAGE High Temperature Solar Receiver with Ceramic Materials 207Birgit Gobereit, Daniela Hofmann, Peter Schwarzbözl, and Ralf Uhlig Determination of Parameters for Improved Efficiency in Thermal Energy Storage using Encapsulated Phase Change Materials 219Laura Solomon, Alparslan Oztekin, Sudhakar Neti, and Himanshu Jain Tuning the Spectral Selectivity of SiC-Based Volumetric Solar Receivers with Ultra-High Temperature Ceramic Coatings 227Benoit Rousseau, Simon Guevelou, Jérôme Vicente, Cyril Caliot, and Gilles Flamant Thermo-Mechanical Analysis of a Silicon Carbide Honeycomb Component Applied as an Absorber for Concentrated Solar Radiation 239Thomas Fend, Peter Schwarzboezl, Olena Smirnova, Martin Schmuecker, Ferdinand Flucht, and Sven Dathe HIGH-TEMPERATURE SUPERCONDUCTORS: MATERIALS, TECHNOLOGIES, AND SYSTEMS Anomalous Proximity Effect and More than One Majorana Fermion 253S. Ikegaya and Y. Asano Atomic-Scale Study of the Superconducting Proximity Effect in Manganite/Cuprate Thin-Film Heterostructures 261Hao Zhang, Igor Fridman, Nicolas Gauquelin, Gianluigi Botton, and John Y. T. Wei Tunneling and Photoemission Spectra in Cuprate Superconductors: Evidence for Strong Multiple-Phonon Coupling and Polaronic Effects 273Guo-meng Zhao Author Index 289

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis volume contains a collection of 19 papers from the 11th International Symposium on Ceramic Materials and Components for Energy and Environmental Applications (CMCEE-11), June 14-19, 2015 in Vancouver, BC, Canada. Papers were presented in the below five symposia from Track 2 on the topic of Ceramics for Energy Conservation and Efficiency: Advanced Ceramics and Composites for Gas Turbine Engines Advanced Refractory Ceramic Materials and Technologies Advanced Ceramic Coatings for Power Systems Energy Efficient Advanced Bearings and Wear Resistant Materials Advanced Nitrides and Related Materials for Energy Applications Table of ContentsPreface ix ADVANCED CERAMICS AND COMPOSITES FOR GAS TURBINE ENGINES Damage of Ceramic Matrix Composites (CMCs) During Machining Operations 3R. Goller and A. Rösiger CMCS: The Key for Affordable Access to Space 11Johannes Petursson and Luis Gonzalez Numerical Determination of Effects of Temperature on Infiltration Dynamics of Liquid-Copper and Titanium/Solid-Carbon System 21Khurram Iqbal Oxidation and High Temperature Resistance of SiC/SiC Composites by NITE-Method 29Daisuke Hayasaka, Hirotatsu Kishimoto, Joon-Soo Park, and Akira Kohyama High Performance SiC/SiC Component by NITE-Method and Its Application to Energy and Environment 37A. Kohyama, D. Hayasaka, H. Kishimoto, and J. S. Park Ceramic Matrix Composites: Concurrent Development of Materials and Characterization Tools 53G. Ojard, I. Smyth, Y. Gowayed, U. Santhosh, and J. Ahmad Fabrication of EBC System with Oxide Eutectic Structure 65Shunkichi Ueno, Kyosuke Seya, and Byung-Koog Jang ADVANCED REFRACTORY CERAMIC MATERIALS AND TECHNOLOGIES The Use of Advanced Ceramic Materials in Oil and Gas Applications 75Richard A. Clark and Andrew J. Goshe Microstructure and Elastic Properties of Highly Porous Mullite Ceramics Prepared with Wheat Flour 83E. Gregorová, W. Pabst, and T. Uhlíová The Use of Advanced Refractory Ceramic Materials to Address Industrial Energy Efficiency Challenges 95J. G. Hemrick An Approach for Modeling Slag Corrosion of Lightweight Al2O3-MgO Castables in Refining Ladle 101Ao Huang, Huazhi Gu, Zou Yang, Lvping Fu, Pengfei Lian, and Linwen Jin Microstructure, Elastic Properties and High-Temperature Behavior of Silica Refractories 113W. Pabst, E. Gregorová, T. Uhlíová, V. Neina, J. Kloužek, and I. Sedláová Cement Free Magnesia Based Castables versus Magnesia-Spinel Bricks in Cement Rotary Kilns 125Jérôme Soudier Evaluation of Reoxidation Tendency of Refractory Materials in Steel Metallurgy by a New Test Method Based on Carrier Gas Hot Extraction 139Almuth Sax, Lisa Redecker, Stephan Clasen, Peter Quirmbach, and Christian Dannert Ceramic and Metal-Ceramic Components with Graded Microstructure 149U. Scheithauer, E. Schwarzer, C. Otto, T. Slawik, T. Moritz, and A. Michaelis ENERGY EFFICIENT WEAR RESISTANT MATERIALS High Speed Formation of Fine Ceramic Layers by Nanoparticles Filler Rod Thermal Spraying 163Soshu Kirihara and Kazuto Takai Development of Silicon Nitride Bearing Components by Powder Injection Molding using a Novel Binder System 169Zhang Weiru, Zheng Yu, Wang Tengfei, Li Bin1, Zou Jingliang, Wei Zhonghua, Zhang Zhe, Sun Feng, and Pompe Robert ADVANCED COATINGS Stability of alpha-Alumina Photonic Structures Formed at Low Temperatures Utilizing Chromia-Seeding 179Robert M. Pasquarelli, Martin Waleczek, Kornelius Nielsch, Gerold A. Schneider, and Rolf Janssen Polymer Derived Glass Ceramic Layers for Corrosion Protection of Metals 187Milan Parchovianský, Gilvan Barroso, Ivana Petríková, Gunter Motz, Dagmar Galusková, and Dušan Galusek Author Index 201

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis volume contains a collection of 22 papers submitted from the below seven symposia held during the 11th International Symposium on Ceramic Materials and Components for Energy and Environmental Applications (CMCEE-11), June 14-19, 2015 in Vancouver, BC, Canada: Additive Manufacturing Technologies Advanced Materials, Technologies, and Devices for Electro-optical and Biomedical Applications Multifunctional Coatings for Energy and Environmental Applications Novel, Green, and Strategic Processing and Manufacturing Technologies Powder Processing Technology for Advanced Ceramics Computational Design and Modeling Materials for Extreme Environments: Ultra-high Temperature Ceramics (UHTCs) and Nanolaminated Ternary Carbides and Nitrides (MAX Phases) Table of ContentsPreface ix ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGIES Additive Manufacturing of Micro Functional Structures through Diameter Variable Laser Stereolithography and Precursor Sintering Heat Treatments 3Soshu Kirihara Stereolithographic Additive Manufacturing of Solid Electrolyte Dendrites with Ordered Porous Structures for Fuel Cell Miniaturizations 11Soshu Kirihara Processing of Thermoplastic Suspensions for Additive Manufacturing of Ceramic- and Metal-Ceramic-Composites by Thermoplastic 3D-Printing (T3DP) 19U. Scheithauer, E. Schwarzer, A. Haertel, H.J. Richter, T. Moritz, and A. Michaelis Micro-Reactors Made by Lithography-Based Ceramic Manufacturing (LCM) 31U. Scheithauer, E. Schwarzer, G. Ganzer, A. Kornig, W. Beckert, E. Reichelt, M. Jahn, A. Hartel, H. J. Richter, T. Moritz, and A. Michaelis Functionally Graded Ceramic Based Materials using Additive Manufacturing: Review and Progress 43Li Yang, Hadi Miyanaji, Durga Janaki Ram, Amir Zandinejad, and Shanshan Zhang ADVANCED MATERIALS, TECHNOLOGIES, AND DEVICES FOR ELECTRO-OPTICAL AND BIOMEDICAL APPLICATIONS A Neutron Detector Based on Boron-10 Enriched Scintillating Glasses 59Dat Vu, Makena Dettmann, Victor Herrig, Luiz G. Jacobsohn, Matthew W. Kielty, James Wetzel, Yasar Onel, and Ugur Akgun Engineering Approach to Improve the Solid State Lighting Characteristics with Translucent Poly Crystalline Alumina 69Keiji Matsuhiro, Keiichiro Watanabe, Tsuneaki Ohashi, and Tomokatsu Hayakawa Single Crystal Fibers of Cladded Doped-YAG for High Power Laser and Amplifier Applications 83E. Gebremichael, B. Ponting, R. Magana, and G. Maxwell Single Crystal Growth of Ferroelectric LaBGeO5 for Optical Frequency Conversion Devices 97Shintaro Miyazawa, Mitsuyoshi Sakairi, Junji Hirohashi, Makoto Matsukura, Shunji Takekawa, and Yasunori Furukawa The Growth of Potassium Tantalate Niobate (KTaxNb1-xO3) Single Crystal by Vertical Bridgman Method 105Toshinori Taishi, Kazuya Hosokawa, Keigo Hoshikawa, Takahiro Kojima, Junya Osada, Masahiro Sasaura, Yasunori Furukawa, and Takayuki Komatsu Growth of Y3Al5O12 Single Crystals via Edge-Defined Film-Fed Growth Technique Using MO Crucibles 113T. Tokairin, J. Hayashi, G. Villora, and K. Shimamura MULTIFUNCTIONAL COATINGS FOR ENERGY AND ENVIRONMENTAL APPLICATIONS Nanoparticle Paste Injection into Gas-Flame Thermal Spray for Speedy Ceramic Coating 123Soshu Kirihara Contribution to Electrochemical Oxidation of a Xanthene Dye onto Cu2O Thin Film Electrode 131M. El hajji, A. Tara, Ph. Dony, O. Jbara, L. Bazzi, A. Benlhachemi, and N. Kireche Solution Precursor Plasma Sprayed Superhydrophobic Surface 141Yuxuan Cai, Gisele Azimi, Thomas W. Coyle, and Javad Mostaghimi Improvement of Interfacial Strength for Thermal Barrier Coatings by Formation of Wedge-Like Thermally Grown Oxide 149Kazuhiro Ogawa, Shun Hatta, and Hiroyuki Yamazaki Experimental Production of Industrial Roller Coated by Hard-Al2O3 Film using Aerosol Deposition Process 159Naoki Seto, Kazuteru Endo, Noriaki Honda, Nobuo Sakamoto, Shingo Hirose, and Jun Akedo NOVEL, GREEN, AND STRATEGIC PROCESSING AND MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGIES Stereolithographic Additive Manufacturing of Ceramics Dendrites to Modulate Energy and Material Flows 167Soshu Kirihara New Lightweight Kiln Furniture—Production Processes and Properties 177U. Scheithauer, T. Slawik, E. Schwarzer, F. Tscharntke, H.-J. Richter, T. Moritz, and A. Michaelis The Role of CALPHAD Approach in the Sintering of B4C with SiC as a Sintering Aid by Spark Plasma Sintering Technique 185Mohammad Asadikiya, Christopher Rudolf, Cheng Zhang, Benjamin Boesl, and Yu Zhong POWDER PROCESSING TECHNOLOGY FOR ADVANCED CERAMICS Effective Exfoliation of Laminated h–BN Particles by a Novel Rotating Disk Method 195Yuichi Tominaga, Daisuke Shimamoto, Kimiyasu Sato, Yusuke Imai, and Yuji Hotta COMPUTATIONAL DESIGN AND MODELING Feasible and Reliable Ab Initio Approach to Computation of Materials Relevant for Nuclear Waste Management 207Piotr M. Kowalski, George Beridze, Yan Li, Yaqi Ji, Christoph Friedrich, Ersoy a ýo lu, and Stefan Blügel MATERIALS FOR EXTREME ENVIRONMENTS Phase Evolution Phenomenon during Hot Pressing of the SHS obtained Ti3AlC2 Precursors Powders 221L. Chlubny, J. Lis, Cz. Kapusta, D. Zientara, K. Chabior, and P. Chachlowska Author Index 229

Read more less

Book SynopsisIncluding recent advances and historically important catalysts, this book overviews methods for developing and applying polymerization catalysts dealing with polymerization catalysts that afford commercially acceptable high yields of polymer with respect to catalyst mass or productivity. Contains the valuable data needed to reproduce syntheses or use the catalyst for new applications Offers a guide to the design and synthesis of catalysts, and their applications in synthesis of polymers Includes the information essential for choosing the appropriate reactions to maximize yield of polymer synthesized Presents new chapters on vanadium catalysts, Ziegler catalysts, laboratory homopolymerization, and copolymerizationTable of ContentsNotes on Contributors xvii Preface xxix Acknowledgments xxxiii 1 Industrial Metal Alkyls and Their Use in Polyolefin Catalysts 1Dennis B. Malpass 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Metal Alkyls in Ziegler–Natta Catalysts 2 1.3 Aluminum Alkyls 4 1.4 Manufacturers of Aluminum Alkyls 10 1.5 Pricing and Selection Criteria for Aluminum Alkyls 11 1.6 Methylaluminoxanes 13 1.7 Magnesium Alkyls 18 1.8 Organoboron Compounds 24 1.9 Organozinc Compounds 26 References 27 2 Porous Silica in Transition Metal Polymerization Catalysts 31Thomas J. Pullukat and Robert E. Patterson 2.1 Introduction 31 2.2 Production of Silica Gel Catalysts 33 2.3 Influence of Silica Gel Properties and Polymerization Conditions on Catalyst Performance 36 2.4 Conclusions 52 References 53 3 Activator Supports for Metallocene and Related Catalysts 57Ray Hoff 3.1 Introduction 57 3.2 Activator Support Studies 58 3.3 Activator Support Patents 60 3.4 Conclusion 62 References 64 4 Computational Modeling of Polymerization Catalysts 67Monika Srebro Hooper and Artur Michalak 4.1 Introduction 67 4.2 Computational Modeling of Chemical Reactions 68 4.3 Modeling the Catalyst Properties and the Polymerization Processes 76 4.4 Concluding Remarks 116 Acknowledgment 117 References 117 5 Computational Studies of Chromium: Silica Catalysts 131Zhen Liu and Boping Liu 5.1 Introduction 131 5.2 Mechanistic Proposals for Phillips Catalyst 132 5.3 Theoretical Study on Phillips Catalyst 137 5.4 The Limitation of the Current Computations and a Prospect for the Future 156 References 157 6 Laboratory Reactors and Procedures for Catalyst Evaluation 161Rinaldo Schiffino 6.1 Introduction 161 6.2 Setup in the Fume Hood 162 6.3 Autoclave Reactors and Safety Relief Devices 163 6.4 Purification Methods 164 6.5 Modular Reactor System 165 6.6 Catalyst Addition 168 6.7 Temperature Control 170 6.8 Autoclave Reactor Setup 172 6.9 Copolymerization 173 6.10 Gas-Phase Laboratory Reactors 175 References 176 7 Scale-Up of Catalyst Recipes to Commercial Production 177Chung Ping Cheng 7.1 Introduction 177 7.2 Fundamental of Process Scale-Up 178 7.3 Considerations in Scaling Up a Laboratory Recipe 180 7.4 A Modern Polymerization Catalyst Production Facility 182 7.5 Other Scale-Up Considerations 187 References 187 8 Supported Titanium/Magnesium Ziegler Catalysts for the Production of Polyethylene 189Yury V. Kissin, Thomas E. Nowlin, and Robert I. Mink 8.1 Introduction 189 8.2 Particle-Form Technology 192 8.3 General Architecture and Preparation of Supported Catalysts 193 8.4 Nonuniformity of Active Centers in Supported Ziegler Catalysts 205 8.5 Kinetics and Mechanism of Ethylene Polymerization Reactions with Ziegler Catalysts 209 8.6 Kinetic Interpretation of Ethylene Polymerization Reactions 217 8.7 Active Centers in Ziegler Catalysts 221 References 224 9 Stereospecific α-Olefin Polymerization with Heterogeneous Catalysts 229John Severn and Robert L. Jones, JR 9.1 Introduction 229 9.2 Traditional Ziegler–Natta Catalyst Systems 241 9.3 Stereospecific Single Site Catalysts 266 9.4 Conclusion 295 References 296 10 Olefin Polymerization by Vanadium Complex Catalysts 313Kotohiro Nomura and Xiaohua Hou 10.1 Introduction: Classical Ziegler-Type Vanadium Catalyst Systems 313 10.2 Vanadium Complexes Designed for Olefin Coordination Insertion Polymerization 315 10.3 Outlook 332 References 333 11 MgCl2-Supported Ti Catalysts for the Production of Morphology-Controlled Polyethylene 339Long Wu and Sieghard Wanke 11.1 Introduction 339 11.2 Preparation of Morphology-Controlled MgCl2/TiCl4 Catalysts 342 11.3 Polymerization Processes 345 11.4 Effect of Prepolymerization on Activity Profiles and Prepolymer Properties 349 11.5 Polymerization Behavior 358 11.6 Summary and Conclusions 364 References 365 12 Product Morphology in Olefin Polymerization with Polymer-Supported Metallocene Catalysts 369Long Wu and Sieghard Wanke 12.1 Introduction 369 12.2 Preparation of Polymer-Supported Metallocene Catalysts 371 12.3 Factors Affecting Morphology of Product Particles 379 12.4 Factors Affecting Product Morphology 389 12.5 Product Fines and Densities 394 12.6 Conclusions 396 References 396 13 A Review of the Phillips Chromium Catalyst for Ethylene Polymerization 401Max P. McDaniel 13.1 Historical and Commercial Background 401 13.2 Catalyst Preparation 404 13.3 Control of Catalyst Activity 414 13.4 Control of Molecular Weight and MW Distribution 439 13.5 Control of Crystallinity 482 13.6 Control of Elasticity 509 13.7 Concluding Remarks 542 References 546 14 Silica-Supported Silyl Chromate-Based Ethylene Polymerization Catalysts 573Kevin Cann 14.1 Introduction 573 14.2 Silyl Chromate Catalyst Development 573 14.3 Catalyst Structure 575 14.4 Polymerization Process 578 14.5 Product Characterization and Applications 579 14.6 Silica-Supported Reduced Silyl Chromate Catalyst Advancements 582 Acknowledgements 588 References 588 15 Late Transition Metal Catalyzed Co- and Terpolymerization of α-Olefins with Carbon Monoxide: Synthesis and Modification 591Timo M. J. Anselment, Manuela Zintl, Maria Leute, Rüdiger Nowack, and Bernhard Rieger 15.1 Introduction and Historical Overview 591 15.2 Polyketone Synthesis: General Concept and Mechanism 593 15.3 Influence of the Catalyst on the Polymer Structure in α-Olefin/CO Copolymerization Reactions 599 15.4 Other Olefins for the Copolymerization with CO 610 15.5 Chemical Modification of Polyketones 616 References 618 16 Ethylene Polymerization and α-Olefin Oligomerization Using Catalysts Derived from Phosphoranes and Ni(II) or Ni(0) Precursors 623Scott Collins 16.1 Introduction 623 16.2 Starting Materials 626 References 629 17 Overview of Ring-Opening Metathesis Polymerizations (ROMP) and Acyclic Diene Metathesis (ADMET) Polymerizations with Selected Ruthenium and Molybdenum Complexes 631Robert T. Mathers 17.1 Introduction 631 17.2 Ruthenium Catalysts 634 17.3 Molybdenum Complexes 646 17.4 Summary 651 References 651 18 Copolymerization of Ethylene with Conjugated Dienes 661Islem Belaid, Vincent Monteil, and Christophe Boisson 18.1 Introduction 661 18.2 ConventionalZiegler–Natta Catalysts 663 18.3 Group 4 Metallocene Systems 665 18.4 Group 4 Post-metallocene Catalysts 670 18.5 Vanadium Bis(imino)pyridyl Catalysts 673 18.6 Group 8-, 9-, and 10-Based Catalysts 674 18.7 Rare Earth Catalysts 675 18.8 Conclusion 686 References 687 Appendix A: Pyrophoricity of Metal Alkyls 693Dennis B. Malpass Appendix B: Rheological Terms for Polymerization Catalyst Chemists 705Gregory W. Kamykowski Index 711

Read more less

Book SynopsisCeramic materials are inorganic and non-metallic porcelains, tiles, enamels, cements, glasses and refractory bricks. Today, ceramics has gained a wider meaning as a new generation of materials influence on our lives; electronics, computers, communications, aerospace and other industries rely on a number of their uses.Table of ContentsPreface xiii Part 1 Design, Processing, and Properties 1 Development of Epitaxial Oxide Ceramics Nanomaterials Based on Chemical Strategies on Semiconductor Platforms 3 A. Carretero-Genevrier, R. Bachelet, G. Saint-Girons, R. Moalla, J. M. Vila-Fungueiriño, B. Rivas-Murias, F. Rivadulla, J. Rodriguez-Carvajal, A. Gomez, J. Gazquez, M. Gich and N. Mestres 1.1 Introduction 4 1.2 Integration of Epitaxial Functional Oxides Nanomaterials on Silicon Entirely Performed by Chemical Solution Strategies 8 1.2.1 Integration of Piezoelectric Quartz Thin Films on Silicon by Soft Chemistry 10 1.2.2 Controllable Textures of Epitaxial Quartz Thin Films 13 1.2.3 Integration of Functional Oxides by Quartz Templating 17 1.2.4 Highly Textured ZnO Thin Films 21 1.3 Integration of Functional Oxides by Combining Soft Chemistry and Physical Techniques 22 1.4 Conclusions 23 Acknowledgments 26 References 26 2 Biphasic, Triphasic, and Multiphasic Calcium Orthophosphates 33 Sergey V. Dorozhkin 2.1 Introduction 34 2.2 General Definitions and Knowledge 38 2.3 Various Types of Biphasic, Triphasic, and Multiphasic CaPO4 40 2.4 Stability 42 2.5 Preparation 44 2.6 Properties 51 2.7 Biomedical Applications 53 2.8 Conclusions 59 References 60 3 An Energy Efficient Processing Route for Advance Ceramic Composites Using Microwaves 97 Satnam Singh, Dheeraj Gupta and Vivek Jain 3.1 Introduction 98 3.2 Historical Developments in Materials Processing by Microwaves 99 3.3 Introduction to Microwave Heating Process 101 3.3.1 Microwave–materials Interaction Theory 102 3.3.2 Microwave Heating Mechanisms 104 3.4 Heating Methods by Microwaves 107 3.4.1 Direct Microwave Heating 107 3.4.2 Microwave Hybrid Heating 108 3.4.3 Selective Heating 109 3.4.4 Microwave-assisted Processing of Materials 109 3.5 Advantages/Limitations of Microwave Material Processing 110 3.5.1 Highly Energy Efficient Processing Method 110 3.5.2 Better Quality of Processed Materials 113 3.5.3 Cleaner Energy Processing 114 3.5.4 Compact Processing Unit 114 3.5.5 Restriction in Processing of All Varieties of Materials 115 3.5.6 Restrictions in Processing of Complex Shapes 115 3.5.7 Non-uniformity in Heating 115 3.5.8 Human Safety Issues 115 3.6 Application of Microwave Heating in Composite Processing 116 3.6.1 Recent Review of Work Carried Out in MMC/CMC/Alloys/Ceramic Processing by Microwaves 119 3.6.2 Microwave Melting/Casting of Metals/Metal Matrix Composites 127 3.7 Future Prospectives 130 3.8 Conclusion 133 References 133 Part 2 Composites: Fundamentals and Frontiers 4 Continuous Fiber-reinforced Ceramic Matrix Composites 147 Rebecca Gottlieb, Shannon Poges, Chris Monteleone and Steven L. Suib 4.1 Introduction 148 4.2 Parts of a CMC 149 4.2.1 Fibers 150 4.2.2 Interphase 151 4.2.3 Matrix 152 4.3 Modern Uses of CMCs 154 4.4 History 155 4.5 Ceramic Fibers 158 4.5.1 Oxide Fibers 158 4.5.1.1 Alumina Fibers 159 4.5.1.2 Stabilized Alumina Fibers 160 4.5.1.3 Alumina Silicate Fibers 160 4.5.1.4 Other Oxide Fibers 164 4.5.2 Non-oxide Fibers (SiC) 164 4.5.2.1 Oxidation 164 4.5.2.2 Irradiation 165 4.5.2.3 Sintering 165 4.5.3 Carbon Fibers 166 4.5.3.1 Polyacrylonitrile 167 4.5.3.2 Pitch 167 4.6 Interface/Interphase 168 4.6.1 Requirements 169 4.6.2 Non-oxide 170 4.6.3 Oxide 171 4.7 Matrix Materials 172 4.7.1 Carbon 172 4.7.2 Silicon Carbide 175 4.7.3 Oxides 178 4.8 Matrix Fabrication Techniques 179 4.8.1 Polymer Impregnation and Pyrolysis 180 4.8.2 Chemical Vapor Infiltration 181 4.8.3 Melt Infiltration 183 4.8.4 Slurry Infiltration 184 4.8.5 Metal Oxidation 185 4.9 Toughness of CMCs 185 4.9.1 Fiber/Matrix Interface 186 4.9.2 Modes of Failure 186 4.9.3 Energy-Absorbing Mechanisms 187 4.9.4 Stress Testing of Composites 188 4.10 Applications 188 4.10.1 Brakes and Friction 190 4.10.2 Biomedical Applications 191 Acknowledgments 193 References 193 5 Yytria- and Magnesia-doped Alumina Ceramic Reinforced with Multi-walled Carbon Nanotubes 201 Iftikhar Ahmad and Yanqiu Zhu 5.1 Introduction 202 5.2 Dispersions and Stability of MWCNTs 202 5.3 Influence of Yytria (Y2O3) Doping on MWCNT/Al2O3 Nanocomposites 205 5.3.1 Densification and Microstructure Development 205 5.3.2 Mechanical Performance and Toughening Mechanism 210 5.4 Magnesia (MgO)-Tuned MWCNT/Al2O3 Nanocomposites 215 5.4.1 Role of MgO on the Densification and Microstructural Features 215 5.4.2 Effect of MgO on the Grain Size and Fracture Behavior 217 5.4.3 Mechanical Response of MgO-Doped MWCNT/Al2O3 Nanocomposite 221 5.5 Conclusions 225 Acknowledgments 226 References 227 6 Oxidation-induced Crack Healing in MAX Phase Containing Ceramic Composites 231 Guoping Bei and Peter Greil 6.1 History of Crack Healing in Ceramics 232 6.2 High-temperature Crack Healing in MAX Phases 233 6.2.1 MAX Phases 233 6.2.2 Crack Healing in Al-contained MAX Phases 234 6.2.2.1 Ti3AlC2 234 6.2.2.2 Ti2AlC 235 6.2.2.3 Cr2AlC 238 6.3 Lower-temperature Crack Healing in MAX Phase-based Ceramics 241 6.3.1 Oxidation Behavior of Ti2Al(1–x)SnxC MAX Phase Solid-solution Powders 241 6.3.2 Oxidation-induced Crack Healing in Thermal-shocked Ti2SnC MAX Phase 244 6.3.3 Crack Healing in Ti2Al0.5Sn0.5C–Al2O3 Composites 249 6.4 Conclusions 255 Acknowledgments 256 References 256 7 SWCNTs versus MWCNTs as Reinforcement Agents in Zirconia- and Alumina-based Nanocomposites: Which One to Use 261 M.H. Bocanegra-Bernal, C. Dominguez-Rios, A. Garcia-Reyes, A. Aguilar-Elguezabal and J. Echeberria 7.1 Introduction 262 7.2 Single-walled Carbon Nanotubes 266 7.3 Multi-walled Carbon Nanotubes 269 7.4 The Effects of CNTs Types on the Mechanical Properties of Al2O3- and ZrO2-based Ceramics 274 7.5 Why SWCNTs? or Why MWCNTs? 285 7.6 Conclusions 287 Acknowledgments 289 References 289 Part 3 Functional and Applied Ceramics 8 Application of Organic and Inorganic Wastes in Clay Brick Production: A Chemometric Approach 301 Milica V. Vasić, Zagorka Radojević, and Lato Pezo 8.1 Introduction 302 8.2 Materials and Methods 305 8.2.1 Raw Materials and Laboratory Brick Samples 305 8.2.2 Macro Oxides Content of the Used Raw Materials 306 8.2.3 Response Surface Method 307 8.2.4 Fuzzy Synthetic Evaluation Algorithm 308 8.2.5 Artificial Neural Network modeling 309 8.3 Results and Discussion 312 8.3.1 Characteristics of Raw Materials 312 8.3.2 Changes Observed in Shaping and Drying in the Air 314 8.3.3 Characteristics of Fired Products 318 8.3.4 RSM and ANOVA Analysis 321 8.3.5 Neurons in the ANN Hidden Layer 323 8.3.6 Simulation of the ANNs 325 8.3.7 Principal Component Analysis 328 8.3.8 Optimization 330 8.4 Conclusions 331 Acknowledgments 332 References 332 9 Functional Tantalum-based Oxides: From the Structure to the Applications 337 Sebastian Zlotnik, Alexander Tkach and Paula M. Vilarinho 9.1 Functional Materials: Current Needs 338 9.2 Importance of Tantalum and Tantalum-based Oxides 342 9.3 Properties of Alkali Tantalates 343 9.3.1 Crystal and Electronic Structures 343 9.3.2 Thermochemistry 347 9.4 Processing of Alkali Tantalate Ceramics for Electronic Applications 351 9.5 Potential Applications of Alkali Tantalates 358 9.5.1 Sodium Tantalate as a Photocatalyst 358 9.5.2 Lithium Tantalate as a Piezoelectric Biomaterial 366 9.6 Conclusions 370 Acknowledgement 371 References 371 10 Application of Silver Tin Research on Hydroxyapatite 385 Ewa Skwarek 10.1 Introduction 386 10.1.1 Properties of Silver 386 10.1.2 Application of Silver 387 10.1.3 Hydroxyapatite (HAP)–Silver 391 10.2 Materials and Methods 399 10.2.1 Synthesis of Hydroxyapatite Using the Co-precipitation Method 399 10.2.2 Synthesis of Silver-doped Hydroxyapatite 400 10.2.3 Characteristics of Surfaces of Obtained Materials 400 10.3 Results and Discussion 402 10.3.1 The Results of XRD and Surface 402 10.3.2 Zeta Potential at the Hydroxyapatite/NaNO3 Electrolyte Solution Interface 404 10.3.3 Surface Charge Density 408 10.3.4 Adsorption of Silver Ions on Hydroxyapatite 410 10.3.5 Kinetics of Ag+ Ions Adsorption on the Hydroxyapatite Surface 413 10.4 Conclusion 414 References 415 Index 419

Read more less

Book SynopsisAdvanced Material Interfaces is a state-of-the-art look at innovative methodologies and strategies adopted for interfaces and their applications.Table of ContentsPreface xv Part 1 Interfaces Design, fabrication, and properties 1 Mixed Protein/Polymer Nanostructures at Interfaces 3 Aristeidis Papagiannopoulos and Stergios Pispas 1.1 Introduction 3 1.2 Neutral and Charged Macromolecules at Interfaces 4 1.3 Interfacial Experimental Methods 7 1.4 Interactions of Proteins with Polymer-Free Interfaces 9 1.5 Polymers and Proteins in Solution 11 1.6 Proteins at Polymer-Modified Interfaces 14 1.6.1 Steric Effects 15 1.6.2 Polyelectrolyte Multilayers: Electrostatic Nature of Interactions 21 1.6.3 Counterion Release: Charge Anisotropy 23 1.7 Protein-Loaded Interfaces with Potential for Applications 26 1.8 Conclusions 30 References 30 2 Exploitation of Self-Assembly Phenomena in Liquid-Crystalline Polymer Phases for Obtaining Multifunctional Materials 37 M. Giamberini and G. Malucelli 2.1 Introduction 37 2.2 Amphiphilic Self-Assembled LCPs 41 2.3 Self-Assembled LCPs Through External Stimuli 44 2.4 Supramolecular Self-Assembled LCPs 48 2.5 Self-Assembled LCPs Through Surface Effects 54 2.6 Conclusions and Perspectives 57 References 59 3 Scanning Probe Microscopy of Functional Materials Surfaces and Interfaces 63 Pankaj Sharma and Jan Seidel 3.1 Introduction 64 3.2 Scanning Probe Microscopy Approach 65 3.2.1 Piezoresponse Force Microscopy 68 3.2.1.1 Advanced Modes of PFM 73 3.2.1.2 Resonance-Enhanced PFM 73 3.2.1.3 PFM Spectroscopy and Switching Spectroscopy PFM (SS-PFM) 74 3.2.1.4 Multi-Frequency PFM 75 3.2.1.5 Enhancing Temporal Resolution 76 3.2.1.6 Stroboscopic PFM 76 3.2.1.7 High-Speed PFM 78 3.2.2 Conductive-Atomic Force Microscopy 79 3.2.3 Kelvin Probe Force Microscopy 81 3.3 Functional Material Surfaces and Interfaces 85 3.3.1 Ferroelectric Tunnel Junctions 86 3.3.2 Ferroic Domain Walls and Structural-Phase Boundaries 93 3.3.3 Complex-Oxide Thin Films and Heterostructures 95 3.3.4 Photovoltaics 104 3.4 Conclusion and Outlook 111 References 114 4 AFM Approaches to the Study of PDMS-Au and Carbon-Based Surfaces and Interfaces 127 Giorgio Saverio Senesi, Alessandro Massaro, Angelo Galiano, and Leonardo Pellicani 4.1 Introduction 127 4.2 AFM Characterization of Micro–Nano Surfaces and Interfaces of Carbon-Based Materials and PDMS-Au Nanocomposites 130 4.3 3D Image Processing: ImageJ tools 136 4.4 Scanning Capacitance Microscopy, Kelvin Probe Microscopy, and Electromagnetic Characterization 138 4.5 AFM Artifacts 141 4.6 Conclusions (General Guidelines for Material Characterization by AFM) 143 Acknowledgments 146 References 146 5 One-Dimensional Silica Nanostructures and Metal–Silica Nanocomposites: Fabrication, Characterization, and Applications 149 Francesco Ruffino 5.1 Introduction: The Weird World of Silica Nanowires and Metal–Silica Composite Nanowires 150 5.2 Silica Nanowires: Fabrication Methodologies, Properties, and Applications 155 5.2.1 Metal-Catalyzed Growth 158 5.2.2 Oxide-Assisted Growth 174 5.3 Metal NPs-Decorated Silica Nanowires: Fabrication Methodologies, Properties, and Applications 177 5.4 Metal NPs Embedded in Silica Nanowires: Fabrication Methodologies, Properties, and Applications 188 5.5 Conclusions: Open Points and Perspectives 197 References 197 6 Understanding the Basic Mechanisms Acting on Interfaces: Concrete Elements, Materials and Techniques 205 Dimitra V. Achilllopoulou 6.1 Summary 205 6.2 Introduction 207 6.3 Existing Knowledge on Force Transfer Mechanisms on Reinforced Concrete Interfaces 212 6.3.1 Concrete Interfaces 212 6.3.2 Reinforcement Effect on Concrete Interfaces 217 6.3.3 Interfaces of Strengthened RC Structural Elements 224 6.4 International Standards 236 6.4.1 Fib Bulletin 2010 237 6.4.2 ACI 318-08 238 6.4.3 Greek Retrofit Code (Gre. Co.) Attuned to EN-1998/part 3 238 6.5 Conclusions 241 References 242 7 Pressure-Sensitive Adhesives (PSA) Based on Silicone 249 Adrian Krzysztof Antosik and Zbigniew Czech 7.1 Introduction 249 7.2 Pressure-Sensitive Adhesives 250 7.2.1 Goal of Cross-Linking 251 7.3 Significant Properties of Pressure-Sensitive Adhesives 253 7.3.1 Tack (Initial Adhesion) 253 7.3.2 Peel Adhesion (Adhesion) 254 7.3.3 Shear Strength (Cohesion) 255 7.3.4 Shrinkage 255 7.4 Silicone PSAs 256 7.4.1 Properties 256 7.4.2 Effect of Cross-LinkingAgent to the Basic Properties Si–PSA 260 7.4.3 Application 267 7.5 Conclusion 272 References 273 Part 2 Functional Interfaces: Fundamentals and Frontiers 8 Interfacing Gelatin with (Hydr)oxides and Metal Nanoparticles: Design of Advanced Hybrid Materials for Biomedical Engineering Applications 277 Nathalie Steunou 8.1 Introduction 278 8.2 Physical Gelation of Gelatin 279 8.3 Synthesis of Gelatin-Based Hybrid Nanoparticles and Nanocomposites 282 8.3.1 Preparation of Hybrid Composites by Gelification and Complex Coacervation 282 8.3.2 Processing of Gelatin-Based Hybrid Materials into Monoliths, Films, Foams and Nanofibers 288 8.3.3 Synthesis of Hybrid and Core–Shell Nanoparticles and Nano-Objects 290 8.4 Characterization of Gelatin-Based Hybrid Nanoparticles and Nanocomposites 294 8.5 Mechanical Properties of Gelatin-Based Hybrid Nanoparticles and Nanocomposites 296 8.6 Design of Gelatin-Based Hybrid Nanoparticles for Drug Delivery 302 8.7 Design of Nanostructured Gelatin-Based Hybrid Scaffolds for Tissue Engineering and Regeneration Applications 310 8.8 Conclusions and Outlook 316 References 318 9 Implantable Materials for Local Drug Delivery in Bone Regeneration 325 9.1 Bone Morphology 325 9.2 Bone Fracture Healing Process 326 9.3 Current Materials for Bone Regeneration 327 9.3.1 Metals 329 9.3.2 Ceramics 330 9.3.2.1 Biodegradable Ceramics 330 9.3.2.2 Non-Absorbable Ceramics 332 9.3.3 Polymers 332 9.3.3.1 Natural Polymers 333 9.3.3.2 Synthetic Polymers 334 9.3.4 Composites 335 9.4 Therapeutic Molecules with Interest in Bone Regeneration 336 9.4.1 Antibiotics 337 9.4.2 Growth Factors 339 9.4.3 Bisphosphonates 340 9.4.4 Corticosteroids 341 9.4.5 Hormones 341 9.4.6 Antitumoral Drugs 341 9.4.7 Others 342 9.5 Mechanism for Loading Drugs into Implant Materials and Release Kinetics 343 9.5.1 Unspecific Adsorption 344 9.5.2 Physical Interactions 345 9.5.3 Physical Entrapment 348 9.5.4 Chemical Immobilization 350 9.6 In Vitro Drug Release Studies 350 9.6.1 Drug Release Kinetic Analysis 354 9.7 Translation to the Human Situation 355 9.8 Conclusions (Future Perspectives) 356 Acknowledgments 357 References 357 10 Interaction of Cells with Different Micrometer and Submicrometer Topographies 379 M.V. Tuttolomondo, P.N. Catalano, M.G. Bellino, and M.F. Desimone 10.1 Introduction 379 10.2 Synthesis of Substrates with Controlled Topography 380 10.3 Methods for Creating Micro- and Nanotopographical Features 381 10.4 Litography 381 10.4.1 Photolithography 381 10.4.2 Electron-Beam Lithography 382 10.4.3 Nanoimprint Lithography 383 10.4.4 Soft Lithography 384 10.5 Polymer Demixing 384 10.6 Self-Assembly 385 10.7 Cell Material Interactions 386 10.7.1 Lithography Method 386 10.7.2 Polymer Demixed 390 10.7.3 Cell Behaviour onto EISA obtained films 390 10.7.4 Biological Evidence 395 10.8 Conclusions 397 Acknowledgements 399 References 399 11 Nanomaterial—Live Cell Interface: Mechanism and Concern 405 Ark Mukhopadhyay and Hirak K. Patra 11.1 Introduction 405 11.2 Protein Destabilization 407 11.3 Nanomaterials-Induced Oxidative Stress 408 11.3.1 Transitional Metal–Oxide Nanomaterials and ROS 409 11.3.2 Prooxidant Effects of Metal Oxide Nanoparticles 409 11.3.3 CNT-Induced ROS Formation 412 11.3.3.1 CNT-Induced Inflammation and Genotoxicity and ROS 415 11.4 Nucleic Acid Damage 415 11.5 Damage to Membrane Integrity and Energy Transduction 418 11.6 Conclusions 418 References 419 12 Bioresponsive Surfaces and Interfaces Fabricated by Innovative Laser Approaches 427 F. Sima, E. Axente, C. Ristoscu, O. Gallet, K. Anselme, and I.N. Mihailescu 12.1 Introduction 428 12.2 Pulsed Laser Methods Applied for the Grown of Inorganic and Organic Coatings 430 12.3 Combinatorial Laser Approaches: New Tool for the Fabrication of Compositional Libraries of Hybrid Coatings 434 12.4 Thin Bioresponsive Coatings Synthesized by Lasers 437 12.4.1 Bioactive Inorganic Coatings Obtained by PLD 438 12.4.2 Bioactive Organic Coatings Obtained by MAPLE 439 12.4.3 Bioactive Inorganic–Organic Coatings Obtained by Pulsed Laser Techniques 440 12.4.4 Combinatorial Thin Coatings Libraries Synthesized by C-MAPLE 442 12.4.4.1 Tailoring Cell Signaling Response by Compositional Gradient Bioactive Coatings 442 12.4.4.2 Coatings for Protein Immobilization and Controlled Release 448 12.5 Conclusion and Perspectives 452 Acknowledgments 453 References 453 13 Polymeric and Non-Polymeric Platforms for Cell Sheet Detachment 463 Ana Civantos, Enrique Martinez-Campos, Maria E. Nash, Alberto Gallardo, Viviana Ramos and Inmaculada Aranaz 13.1 Introduction 463 13.2 The Extracellular Matrix 465 13.3 Platforms for Cell Detachment 466 13.3.1 Electroresponsive Platforms 466 13.3.1.1 Electroactive Self-Assembled Monolayers 466 13.3.1.2 Polyelectrolyte-Modified Surfaces 469 13.3.2 Light-Induced Detachment 469 13.3.2.1 Photosensitive Inorganic-Based Surfaces 469 13.3.2.2 Photosensitive Organic-Based Surfaces 471 13.3.3 pH-Sensitive Surfaces 472 13.4 Degradable Platforms 474 13.4.1 Other Detaching Systems 476 13.4.2 Mechanical Platforms 476 13.4.3 Magnetic Platforms 479 13.4.4 Thermoresponsive Platforms 479 13.4.5 Clinical Translation 485 13.5 Conclusions 487 References 487

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe engineering of materials with advanced features is driving the research towards the design of innovative materials with high performances. New materials often deliver the best solution for structural applications, precisely contributing towards the finest combination of mechanical properties and low weight.Table of ContentsPreface xiii Part 1 Engineering of Materials, Characterizations, and Applications 1 Mechanical Behavior and Resistance of Structural Glass Beams in Lateral–Torsional Buckling (LTB) with Adhesive Joints 3 Chiara Bedon and Jan Belis 1.1 Introduction 4 1.2 Overview on Structural Glass Applications in Buildings 5 1.3 Glass Beams in LTB 5 1.3.1 Susceptibility of Glass Structural Elements to Buckling Phenomena 5 1.3.2 Mechanical and Geometrical Influencing Parameters in Structural Glass Beams 8 1.3.3 Mechanical Joints 9 1.3.4 Adhesive Joints 10 1.4 Theoretical Background for Structural Members in LTB 14 1.4.1 General LTB Method for Laterally Unrestrained (LU) Members 14 1.4.2 LTB Method for Laterally Unrestrained (LU) Glass Beams 17 1.4.2.1 Equivalent Thickness Methods for Laminated Glass Beams 18 1.4.3 Laterally Restrained (LR) Beams in LTB 23 1.4.3.1 Extended Literature Review on LR Beams 23 1.4.3.2 Closed-form Formulation for LR Beams in LTB 24 1.4.3.3 LR Glass Beams Under Positive Bending Moment My 28 1.5 Finite-element Numerical Modeling 31 1.5.1 FE Solving Approach and Parametric Study 32 1.5.1.1 Linear Eigenvalue Buckling Analyses (lba) 32 1.5.1.2 Incremental Nonlinear Analyses (inl) 35 1.6 LTB Design Recommendations 38 1.6.1 LR Beams Under Positive Bending Moment My 38 1.6.2 Further Extension and Developments of the Current Outcomes 39 1.7 Conclusions 42 References 44 2 Room Temperature Mechanosynthesis of Nanocrystalline Metal Carbides and Their Microstructure Characterization 49 S.K. Pradhan and H. Dutta 2.1 Introduction 50 2.1.1 Application 50 2.1.2 Different Methods for Preparation of Metal Carbide 50 2.1.3 Mechanical Alloying 51 2.1.4 Planetary Ball Mill 51 2.1.5 The Merits and Demerits of Planetary Ball Mill 52 2.1.6 Review of Works on Metal Carbides by Other Authors 53 2.1.7 Significance of the Study 54 2.1.8 Objectives of the Study 55 2.2 Experimental 56 2.3 Theoretical Consideration 58 2.3.1 Microstructure Evaluation by X-ray Diffraction 58 2.3.2 General Features of Structure 60 2.4 Results and Discussions 60 2.4.1 XRD Pattern Analysis 60 2.4.2 Variation of Mol Fraction 65 2.4.3 Phase Formation Mechanism 69 2.4.4 Is Ball-milled Prepared Metal Carbide Contains Contamination? 71 2.4.5 Variation of Particle Size 72 2.4.6 Variation of Strain 74 2.4.7 High-Resolution Transmission Electron Microscopy Study 76 2.4.8 Comparison Study between Binary and Ternary Ti-based Metal Carbides 76 2.5 Conclusion 80 Acknowledgment 80 References 80 3 Toward a Novel SMA-reinforced Laminated Glass Panel 87 Chiara Bedon and Filipe Amarante dos Santos 3.1 Introduction 87 3.2 Glass in Buildings 89 3.2.1 Actual Reinforcement Techniques for Structural Glass Applications 92 3.3 Structural Engineering Applications of Shape-Memory Alloys (SMAs) 93 3.4 The Novel SMA-Reinforced Laminated Glass Panel Concept 94 3.4.1 Design Concept 94 3.4.2 Exploratory Finite-Element (FE) Numerical Study 96 3.4.2.1 General FE Model Assembly Approach and Solving Method 96 3.4.2.2 Mechanical Characterization of Materials 98 3.5 Discussion of Parametric FE Results 101 3.5.1 Roof Glass Panel (M1) 101 3.5.1.1 Short-term Loads and Temperature Variations 102 3.5.1.2 First-cracking Configuration 106 3.5.2 Point-supported Façade Panel (M2) 109 3.5.2.1 Short-term Loads and Temperature Variations 111 3.6 Conclusions 114 References 117 4 Sustainable Sugarcane Bagasse Cellulose for Papermaking 121 Noé Aguilar-Rivera 4.1 Pulp and Paper Industry 122 4.2 Sugar Industry 123 4.3 Sugarcane Bagasse 124 4.4 Advantageous Utilizations of SCB 129 4.5 Applications of SCB Wastes 130 4.6 Problematic of Nonwood Fibers in Papermaking 131 4.7 SCB as Raw Material for Pulp and Paper 134 4.8 Digestion 135 4.9 Bleaching 135 4.10 Properties of Bagasse Pulps 136 4.10.1 Pulp Strength 137 4.10.2 Pulp Properties 137 4.10.3 Washing Technology 138 4.10.4 Paper Machine Operation 138 4.11 Objectives 138 4.12 Old Corrugated Container Pulps 139 4.13 Synergistic Delignification SCB–OCC 141 4.14 Elemental Chlorine-Free Bleaching of SCB Pulps 150 4.15 Conclusions 156 References 158 5 Bio-inspired Composites: Using Nature to Tackle Composite Limitations 165 F. Libonati 5.1 Introduction 166 5.2 Bio-inspiration: Bone as Biomimetic Model 169 5.3 Case Studies Using Biomimetic Approach 172 5.3.1 Fiber-reinforced Bone-inspired Composites 172 5.3.2 Fiber-reinforced Bone-inspired Composites with CNTs 176 5.3.3 Bone-inspired Composites via 3D Printing 177 5.4 Methods 179 5.4.1 Composite Lamination 180 5.4.2 Additive Manufacturing 181 5.4.3 Computational Modeling 182 5.5 Conclusions 183 References 185 Part 2 Computational Modeling of Materials 6 On the Electronic Structure and Band Gap of ZnSxSe1–x 193 Ghassan H. E. Al-Shabeeb and A. K. Arof 6.1 Introduction 193 6.2 Computational Method 194 6.3 The k·p Perturbation Theory with the Effect of Spin–Orbit Interaction 197 6.4 Results and Discussion 202 Acknowledgment 205 References 205 7 Application of First Principles Theory to the Design of Advanced Titanium Alloys 207 Y. Song, J. H. Dai, and R. Yang 7.1 Introduction 207 7.2 Basic Concepts of First Principles 208 7.3 Theoretical Models of Alloy Design 211 7.3.1 The Hume-Rothery Theory 211 7.3.2 Discrete Variational Method and d-Orbital Method 216 7.3.2.1 Discrete Variational Method 216 7.3.2.2 d-Electrons Alloy Theory 218 7.4 Applications 219 7.4.1 Phase Stability 219 7.4.1.1 Binary Alloy 219 7.4.1.2 Multicomponent Alloys 222 7.4.2 Elastic Properties 223 7.4.3 Examples 226 7.4.3.1 Gum Metal 226 7.4.3.2 Ti2448 (Ti–24Nb–4Zr–8Sn) 227 7.5 Conclusions 230 Acknowledgment 230 References 230 8 Digital Orchid: Creating Realistic Materials 233 Iftikhar B. Abbasov 8.1 Introduction 234 8.2 Conclusion 243 References 243 9 Transformation Optics-based Computational Materials for Stochastic Electromagnetics 245 Ozlem Ozgun and Mustafa Kuzuoglu 9.1 Introduction 246 9.2 Theory of Transformation Optics 249 9.3 Scattering from Rough Sea Surfaces 252 9.3.1 Numerical Validation and Monte Carlo Simulations 256 9.4 Scattering from Obstacles with Rough Surfaces or Shape Deformations 258 9.4.1 Numerical Validation and Monte Carlo Simulations 263 9.4.2 Combining Perturbation Theory and Transformation Optics for Weakly Perturbed Surfaces 264 9.5 Scattering from Randomly Positioned Array of Obstacles 268 9.5.1 Separate Transformation Media 269 9.5.1.1 Numerical Validation & Monte Carlo Simulations 271 9.5.2 A Single Transformation Medium 273 9.5.2.1 Numerical Validation & Monte Carlo Simulations 275 9.5.3 Recurring Scaling and Translation Transformations 276 9.5.3.1 Numerical Validation & Monte Carlo Simulations 278 9.6 Propagation in a Waveguide with Rough or Randomly Varying Surface 278 9.3.1 Numerical Validation and Monte Carlo Simulations 283 9.7 Conclusion 287 References 288 10 Superluminal Photons Tunneling through Brain Microtubules Modeled as Metamaterials and Quantum Computation 291 Luigi Maxmilian Caligiuri and Takaaki Musha 10.1 Introduction 292 10.2 QED Coherence in Water: A Brief Overview 295 10.3 “Electronic” QED Coherence in Brain Microtubules 301 10.4 Evanescent Field of Coherent Photons and Their Superluminal Tunneling through MTs 305 10.5 Coupling between Nearby MTs and their Superluminal Interaction through the Exchange of Virtual Superradiant Photons 312 10.6 Discussion 316 10.7 Brain Microtubules as “Natural” Metamaterials and the Amplification of Evanescent Tunneling Wave Amplitude 319 10.8 Quantum Computation by Means of Superluminal Photons 325 10.9 Conclusions 329 References 330 11 Advanced Fundamental-solution-based Computational Methods for Thermal Analysis of Heterogeneous Materials 335 Hui Wang and Qing-Hua Qin 11.1 Introduction 336 11.2 Basic Formulation of MFS 338 11.2.1 Standard MFS 338 11.2.2 Modified MFS 340 11.2.2.1 RBF Interpolation for the Particular Solution 341 11.2.2.2 MFS for the Homogeneous Solution 342 11.2.2.3 Complete Solution 343 11.3 Basic Formulation of HFS-FEM 344 11.3.1 Problem Statement 344 11.3.2 Implementation of the HFS-FEM 346 11.3.4 Recovery of Rigid-body Motion 349 11.4 Applications in Functionally Graded Materials 349 11.4.1 Basic Equations in Functionally Graded Materials 349 11.4.2 MFS for Functionally Graded Materials 350 11.4.3 HFS-FEM for Functionally Graded Materials 353 11.5 Applications in Composite Materials 357 11.5.1 Basic Equations of Composite Materials 357 11.5.2 MFS for Composite Materials 360 11.5.2.1 MFS for the Matrix Domain 360 11.5.2.2 MFS for the Fiber Domain 360 11.5.2.3 Complete Linear Equation System 361 11.5.3 HFS-FEM for Composite Materials 362 11.5.3.1 Special Fundamental Solutions 362 11.5.3.2 Special n-Sided Fiber/Matrix Elements 363 11.6 Conclusions 365 Acknowledgments 366 Conflict of Interest 366 References 366 12 Understanding the SET/RESET Characteristics of Forming Free TiOx/TiO2–x Resistive-Switching Bilayer Structures through Experiments and Modeling 373 P. Bousoulas and D. Tsoukalas 12.1 Introduction 374 12.2 Experimental Methodology 376 12.3 Bipolar Switching Model 378 12.3.1 Resistive-Switching Performance 378 12.3.2 Resistive-Switching Model 383 12.4 RESET Simulations 389 12.4.1 I–V Response 389 12.4.2 Influence of TE on the CFs Broken Region 393 12.5 SET Simulations 398 12.6 Simulation of Time-dependent SET/RESET Processes 401 12.7 Conclusions 403 Acknowledgments 404 References 404 13 Advanced Materials and Three-dimensional Computer-aided Surgical Workflow in Cranio-maxillofacial Reconstruction 411 Luis Miguel Gonzalez-Perez, Borja Gonzalez-Perez-Somarriba Gabriel Centeno, Carpóforo Vallellano, and Juan Jose Egea-Guerrero 13.1 Introduction 412 13.2 Methodology 413 13.3 Findings 418 13.4 Discussion 427 References 436 14 Displaced Multiwavelets and Splitting Algorithms 439 Boris M. Shumilov 14.1 An Algorithm with Splitting of Wavelet Transformation of Splines of the First Degree 443 14.1.1 “Lazy” Wavelets 444 14.1.2 Examples of Wavelet Decomposition of a Signal of Length 8 447 14.1.3 “Orthonormal” Wavelets 450 14.1.4 An Example of Function of Harten 454 14.2 An Algorithm for Constructing Orthogonal to Polynomials Multiwavelet Bases 456 14.2.1 Creation of System of Basic Multiwavelets of Any Odd Degree on a Closed Interval 456 14.2.2 Creation of the Block of Filters 459 14.2.3 Example of Orthogonal to Polynomials Multiwavelet Bases 461 14.2.4 The Discussion of Approximation on a Closed Interval 463 14.3 The Tridiagonal Block Matrix Algorithm 464 14.3.1 Inverse of the Block of Filters 464 14.3.2 Example of the Hermite Quintic Spline Function Supported on [−1, 1] 465 14.3.3 Example of the Hermite Septimus Spline Function Supported on [−1, 1] 467 14.3.4 Numerical Example of Approximation of Polynomial Function 470 14.3.5 Numerical Example with Two Ruptures of the First Kind and a Corner 471 14.4 Problem of Optimization of Wavelet Transformation of Hermite Splines of Any Odd Degree 475 14.4.1 An Algorithm with Splitting for Wavelet Transformation of Hermite Splines of Fifth Degree 478 14.4.2 Examples 485 14.5 Application to Data Processing of Laser Scanning of Roads490 14.5.1 Calculation of Derivatives on Samples 490 14.5.2 Example of Wavelet Compression of One Track of Data of Laser Scanning 490 14.5.3 Modeling of Surfaces 490 14.5.4 Functions of a Package of Applied Programs for Modeling of Routes and Surfaces of Highways 492 14.6 Conclusions 494 References 494

Read more less

Book SynopsisOverall, this book presents a detailed and comprehensive overview of the state-of-the-art development of different nanoscale intelligent materials for advanced applications. Apart from fundamental aspects of fabrication and characterization of nanomaterials, it also covers key advanced principles involved in utilization of functionalities of these nanomaterials in appropriate forms. It is very important to develop and understand the cutting-edge principles of how to utilize nanoscale intelligent features in the desired fashion. These unique nanoscopic properties can either be accessed when the nanomaterials are prepared in the appropriate form, e.g., composites, or in integrated nanodevice form for direct use as electronic sensing devices. In both cases, the nanostructure has to be appropriately prepared, carefully handled, and properly integrated into the desired application in order to efficiently access its intelligent features. These aspects are reviewed in detail in three themed sTable of ContentsPreface xvii Part 1 Nanomaterials, Fabrication and Biomedical Applications 1 Electrospinning Materials for Skin Tissue Engineering 3 Beste Kinikoglu 1.1 Skin Tissue Engineering Scaffolds 4 1.2 Conclusions 14 References 15 2 Electrospinning: A Versatile Technique to Synthesize Drug Delivery Systems 21 Xueping Zhang, Dong Liu and Tianyan You 2.1 Introduction 21 2.2 The Types of Delivered Drugs 22 2.3 Polymers Used in Electrospinning 29 2.4 The Development of Electrospinning Process for Drug Delivery 36 2.5 Conclusions 41 Acknowledgment 42 References 42 3 Electrospray Jet Emission: An Alternative Interpretation Invoking Dielectrophoretic Forces 51 Francesco Aliotta, Oleg Gerasymov and Pietro Calandra 3.1 Introduction 52 3.2 Electrospray: How It Works? 54 3.3 Historical Background 63 3.4 How the Current (and Wrong) Description of the Electrospray Process Has Been Generated? 65 3.5 What Is Wrong in the Current Description? 68 3.6 Some Results Shedding More Light 70 3.7 Discriminating between Electrophoretic and Dielectrophoretic Forces 72 3.8 Some Theoretical Aspects of Dielectrophoresis 76 3.9 Conclusions 83 References 86 4 Advanced Silver and Oxide Hybrids of Catalysts During Formaldehyde Production 91 Anita Kovač Kralj 4.1 Introduction 92 4.2 The Catalysis 93 4.3 Case Study 95 4.4 Limited Hybrid Catalyst Method for Formaldehyde Production 97 4.5 Conclusion 104 4.6 Nomenclatures 105 References 105 5 Physico-chemical Characterization and Basic Research Principles of Advanced Drug Delivery Nanosystems 107 Natassa Pippa, Stergios Pispas and Costas Demetzos 5.1 Introduction 108 5.2 Basic Research Principles and Techniques for the Physicochemical Characterization of Advanced Drug Delivery Nanosystems 108 5.3 Conclusions 122 References 122 6 Nanoporous Alumina as an Intelligent Nanomaterial for Biomedical Applications 127 Moom Sinn Aw and Dusan Losic 6.1 Introduction 127 6.2 Nanoporous Anodized Alumina as a Drug Nano-carrier 129 6.3 Biocompatibility of NAA and NNAA Materials 138 6.4 NAA for Diabetic and Pancreatic Applications 143 6.5 NAA Applications in Orthopedics 144 6.6 NAA Applications for Heart, Coronary, and Vasculature Treatment 148 6.7 NAA in Dentistry 150 6.8 Conclusions and Future Prospects 152 Acknowledgment 153 References 154 7 Nanomaterials: Structural Peculiarities, Biological Effects, and Some Aspects of Applications 161 N.F. Starodub, M.V. Taran, A.M. Katsev, C. Bisio and M. Guidotti 7.1 Introduction 162 7.2 Physicochemical Properties Determining the Bioavailability and Toxicity of NPS 164 7.3 Current Nanoecotoxicological Knowledge 168 7.4 Modern Direction of the Application of Nanocomposites as Basis for Detoxication Process 187 7.5 Conclusions 189 Acknowledgments 190 References 190 8 Biomedical Applications of Intelligent Nanomaterials 199 M. D. Fahmy, H. E. Jazayeri, M. Razavi, M. Hashemi, M. Omidi, M. Farahani, E. Salahinejad, A. Yadegari, S. Pitcher and Lobat Tayebi 8.1 Introduction 200 8.2 Polymeric Nanoparticles 202 8.3 Lipid-based Nanoparticles 206 8.4 Carbon Nanostructures 213 8.5 Nanostructured Metals 219 8.6 Hybrid Nanostructures 223 8.7 Concluding Remarks 228 References 229 Part 2 Nanomaterials for Energy, Electronics, and Biosensing 9 Phase Change Materials as Smart Nanomaterials for Thermal Energy Storage in Buildings 249 M. Kheradmand, M. Abdollahzadeh, M. Azenha and J.L.B. de Aguiar 9.1 Introduction 250 9.2 Phase Change Materials: Definition, Principle of Operation, and Classifications 252 9.3 PCM-enhanced Cement-based Materials 254 9.4 Hybrid PCM for Thermal Storage 255 9.5 Numerical Simulations 267 9.6 Thermal Modeling of Phase Change 269 9.7 Nanoparticle-enhanced Phase Change Material 280 9.8 Conclusions (General Remarks) 288 References 289 10 Nanofluids with Enhanced Heat Transfer Properties for Thermal Energy Storage 295 Manila Chieruzzi, Adio Miliozzi, Luigi Torre and José Maria Kenny 10.1 Introduction 296 10.2 Thermal Energy Storage 298 10.3 Nanofluids for Thermal Energy Storage 313 10.4 Nanofluids Based on Molten Salts: Enhancement of Thermal Properties 330 10.5 Conclusions 349 References 351 11 Resistive Switching of Vertically Aligned Carbon Nanotubes for Advanced Nanoelectronics Devices 361 O.A. Ageev, Yu. F. Blinov, M.V. Il’ina, B.G. Konoplev and V.A. Smirnov 11.1 Introduction 362 11.2 Theoretical Description of Resistive Switching Mechanism of Structures Based on VACNT 363 11.3 Techniques for Measuring the Electrical Resistivity and Young’s Modulus of VACNT Based on Scanning Probe Microscopy 377 11.4 Experimental Studies of Resistive Switching in Structures Based on VACNT Using Scanning Tunnel Microscopy 384 References 391 12 Multi-objective Design of Nanoscale Double Gate MOSFET Devices Using Surrogate Modeling and Global Optimization 395 T. Bentrcia, F. Djeffal and E. Chebaki 12.1 Introduction 396 12.2 Downscaling Parasitic Effects 400 12.3 Modeling Framework 405 12.4 Simulation and Results 412 12.5 Concluding Remarks 422 References 422 13 Graphene-based Electrochemical Biosensors: New Trends and Applications 427 Georgia-Paraskevi Nikoleli, Stephanos Karapetis, Spyridoula Bratakou, Dimitrios P. Nikolelis, Nikolaos Tzamtzis and Vasillios N. Psychoyios 13.1 Introduction 428 13.2 Scope of This Review 429 13.3 Graphene and Sensors 430 13.4 Graphene Nanomaterials Used in Electrochemical (Bio)sensors Fabrication 430 13.5 Graphene-based Enzymatic Electrodes 432 13.6 Graphene-based Electrochemical DNA Sensors 437 13.7 Graphene-based Electrochemical Immunosensors 439 13.8 Commercial Activities in the Field of Graphene Sensors 442 13.9 Recent Developments in the Field of Graphene Sensors 442 13.10 Conclusions and Future Prospects 443 Acknowledgments 445 References 445 Part 3 Smart Nanocomposites, Fabrication, and Applications 14 Carbon Fibers-based Silica Aerogel Nanocomposites 451 Agnieszka Ślosarczyk 14.1 Introduction to Nanotechnology 451 14.2 Chemistry of Sol–gel Process 454 14.3 Types of Silica Aerogel Nanocomposites 462 14.4 Carbon Fiber-based Silica Aerogel Nanocomposites 476 14.5 Conclusions 493 References 494 15 Hydrogel–carbon Nanotubes Composites for Protection of Egg Yolk Antibodies 501 Bellingeri Romina, Alustiza Fabrisio, Picco Natalia, Motta Carlos, Grosso Maria C, Barbero Cesar, Acevedo Diego and Vivas Adriana 15.1 Introduction 502 15.2 Polymeric Hydrogels 504 15.3 Carbon Nanotubes 507 15.4 Polymer–CNT Composites 511 15.5 Egg Yolk Antibodies Protection 515 15.6 In Vitro Evaluation of Nanocomposite Performance 517 15.7 In Vivo Evaluation of Nanocomposite Performance 518 15.8 Concluding Remarks and Future Trends 521 References 522 16 Green Fabrication of Metal Nanoparticles 533 Anamika Mubayi, Sanjukta Chatterji and Geeta Watal 16.1 Introduction 533 16.2 Development of Herbal Medicines 535 16.3 Green Synthesis of Nanoparticles 536 16.4 Characterization of Phytofabricated Nanoparticles 539 16.5 Impact of Plant-mediated Nanoparticles on Therapeutic Efficacy of Medicinal Plants 540 16.6 Conclusions 550 References 551

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe book outlines first the importance of Extra Cellular Matrix (ECM), which is a natural surface for most of cells. In the following chapters the influence of biological, chemical, mechanical, and physical properties of surfaces in micro and nano-scale on stem cell behavior are discussed including the mechanotransduction. Biomimetic and bioinspired approaches are highlighted for developing microenvironment of several tissues, and surface engineering applications are discussed in tissue engineering, regenerative medicine and different type of biomaterials in various chapters of the book. This book brings together innovative methodologies and strategies adopted in the research and development of Advanced Surfaces in Stem Cell Research. Well-known worldwide researchers deliberate subjects including: Extracellular matrix proteins for stem cell fateThe superficial mechanical and physical properties of matrix microenvironment as stem cell fate regulatorEffects of mechanotransduction on sTable of ContentsPreface xv 1 Extracellular Matrix Proteins for Stem Cell Fate 1 Betül Çelebi-Saltik 1.1 Human Stem Cells, Sources, and Niches 2 1.2 Role of Extrinsic and Intrinsic Factors 5 1.2.1 Shape 5 1.2.2 Topography Regulates Cell Fate 6 1.2.3 Stiffness and Stress 6 1.2.4 Integrins 7 1.2.5 Signaling via Integrins 9 1.3 Extracellular Matrix of the Mesenchyme: Human Bone Marrow 11 1.4 Biomimetic Peptides as Extracellular Matrix Proteins 13 References 15 2 The Superficial Mechanical and Physical Properties of Matrix Microenvironment as Stem Cell Fate Regulator 23 Mohsen Shahrousvand, Gity Mir Mohamad Sadeghi and Ali Salimi 2.1 Introduction 24 2.2 Fabrication of the Microenvironments with Different Properties in Surfaces 25 2.3 Effects of Surface Topography on Stem Cell Behaviors 28 2.4 Role of Substrate Stiffness and Elasticity of Matrix on Cell Culture 31 2.5 Stem Cell Fate Induced by Matrix Stiffness and Its Mechanism 32 2.6 Competition/Compliance between Matrix Stiffness and Other Signals and Their Effect on Stem Cells Fate 33 2.7 Effects of Matrix Stiffness on Stem Cells in Two Dimensions versus Three Dimensions 34 2.8 Effects of External Mechanical Cues on Stem Cell Fate from Surface Interactions Perspective 34 2.9 Conclusions 35 Acknowledgments 36 References 36 3 Effects of Mechanotransduction on Stem Cell Behavior 43 Bahar Bilgen and Sedat Odabas 3.1 Introduction 43 3.2 The Concept of Mechanotransduction 45 3.3 The Mechanical Cues of Cell Differentiation and Tissue Formation on the Basis of Mechanotransduction 46 3.4 Mechanotransduction via External Forces 47 3.4.1 Mechanotransduction via Bioreactors 48 3.4.2 Mechanotransduction via Particle-based Systems 51 3.4.3 Mechanotransduction via Other External Forces 53 3.5 Mechanotransduction via Bioinspired Materials 54 3.6 Future Remarks and Conclusion 54 Declaration of Interest 55 References 55 4 Modulation of Stem Cells Behavior Through Bioactive Surfaces 65 Eduardo D. Gomes, Rita C. Assunção-Silva, Nuno Sousax, Nuno A. Silva and António J. Salgado 4.1 Lithography 66 4.2 Micro and Nanopatterning 70 4.3 Microfluidics 71 4.4 Electrospinning 71 4.5 Bottom-up/Top-down Approaches 74 4.6 Substrates Chemical Modifications 75 4.6.1 Biomolecules Coatings 76 4.6.2 Peptide Grafting 77 4.7 Conclusion 78 References 79 Contents vii 5 Influence of Controlled Micro- and Nanoengineered Environments on Stem Cell Fate 85 Anna Lagunas, David Caballero and Josep Samitier 5.1 Introduction to Engineered Environments for the Control of Stem Cell Differentiation 86 5.1.1 Stem Cells Niche In Vivo: A Highly Dynamic and Complex Environment 86 5.1.2 Mimicking the Stem Cells Niche In Vitro: Engineered Biomaterials 88 5.2 Mechanoregulation of Stem Cell Fate 89 5.2.1 From In Vivo to In Vitro: Influence of the Mechanical Environment on Stem Cell Fate 89 5.2.2 Regulation of Stem Cell Fate by Surface Roughness 90 5.2.3 Control of Stem Cell Differentiation by Micro- and Nanotopographic Surfaces 92 5.2.4 Physical Gradients for Regulating Stem Cell Fate 96 5.3 Controlled Surface Immobilization of Biochemical Stimuli for Stem Cell Differentiation 100 5.3.1 Micro- and Nanopatterned Surfaces: Effect of Geometrical Constraint and Ligand Presentation at the Nanoscale 100 5.3.2 Biochemical Gradients for Stem Cell Differentiation 107 5.4 Three-dimensional Micro- and Nanoengineered Environments for Stem Cell Differentiation 112 5.4.1 Three-dimensional Mechanoregulation of Stem Cell Fate 113 5.4.2 Three-dimensional Biochemical Patterns for Stem Cell Differentiation 119 5.5 Conclusions and Future Perspectives 122 References 122 6 Recent Advances in Nanostructured Polymeric Surface: Challenges and Frontiers in Stem Cells 141 Ilaria Armentano, Samantha Mattioli, Francesco Morena, Chiara Argentati, Sabata Martino, Luigi Torre and Josè Maria Kenny 6.1 Introduction 142 6.2 Nanostructured Surface 144 6.3 Stem Cell 146 6.4 Stem Cell/Surface Interaction 147 6.5 Microscopic Techniques Used in Estimating Stem Cell/Surface 148 6.5.1 Fluorescence Microscopy 148 6.5.2 Electron Microscopy 149 6.5.3 Atomic Force Microscopy 153 6.5.3.1 Instrument 154 6.5.3.2 Cell Nanomechanical Motion 156 6.5.3.3 Mechanical Properties 156 6.6 Conclusions and Future Perspectives 158 References 158 7 Laser Surface Modification Techniques and Stem Cells Applications 165 Çağrı Kaan Akkan 7.1 Introduction 166 7.2 Fundamental Laser Optics for Surface Structuring 166 7.2.1 Definitive Facts for Laser Surface Structuring 167 7.2.1.1 Absorptivity and Reflectivity of the Laser Beam by the Material Surface 167 7.2.1.2 Effect of the Incoming Laser Light Polarization 168 7.2.1.3 Operation Mode of the Laser 169 7.2.1.4 Beam Quality Factor 170 7.2.1.5 Laser Pulse Energy/Power 171 7.2.2 Ablation by Laser Pulses 172 7.2.2.1 Focusing the Laser Beam 172 7.2.2.2 Ablation Regime 173 7.3 Methods for Laser Surface Structuring 174 7.3.1 Physical Surface Modifications by Lasers 174 7.3.1.1 Direct Structuring 175 7.3.1.2 Beam Shaping Optics 177 7.3.1.3 Direct Laser Interference Patterning 180 7.3.2 Chemical Surface Modification by Lasers 181 7.3.2.1 Pulsed Laser Deposition 181 7.3.2.2 Laser Surface Alloying 184 7.3.2.3 Laser Surface Oxidation and Nitriding 186 7.4 Stem Cells and Laser-Modified Surfaces 187 7.5 Conclusions 191 References 192 8 Plasma Polymer Deposition: A Versatile Tool for Stem Cell Research 197 M. N. Macgregor-Ramiasa and K. Vasilev 8.1 Introduction 197 8.2 The Principle and Physics of Plasma Methods for Surface Modification 199 8.2.1 Plasma Sputtering, Etching an Implantation 200 8.2.2 Plasma Polymer Deposition 201 8.3 Surface Properties Influencing Stem Cell Fate 202 8.3.1 Plasma Methods for Tailored Surface Chemistry 203 8.3.1.1 Oxygen-rich Surfaces 204 8.3.1.2 Nitrogen-rich Surfaces 208 8.3.1.3 Systematic Studies and Copolymers 210 8.3.2 Plasma for Surface Topography 211 8.3.3 Plasma for Surface Stiffness 213 8.3.4 Plasma for Gradient Substrata 215 8.3.5 Plasma and 3D Scaffolds 218 8.4 New Trends and Outlook 219 8.5 Conclusions 219 References 220 9 Three-dimensional Printing Approaches for the Treatment of Critical-sized Bone Defects 231 Sara Salehi, Bilal A. Naved and Warren L. Grayson 9.1 Background 232 9.1.1 Treatment Approaches for Critical-sized Bone Defects 232 9.1.2 History of the Application of 3D Printing to Medicine and Biology 233 9.2 Overview of 3D Printing Technologies 234 9.2.1 Laser-based Technologies 235 9.2.1.1 Stereolithography 235 9.2.1.2 Selective Laser Sintering 236 9.2.1.3 Selective Laser Melting 236 9.2.1.4 Electron Beam Melting 237 9.2.1.5 Two-photon Polymerization 237 9.2.2 Extrusion-based Technologies 238 9.2.2.1 Fused Deposition Modeling 238 9.2.2.2 Material Jetting 238 9.2.3 Ink-based Technologies 239 9.2.3.1 Inkjet 3D Printing 239 9.2.3.2 Aerosol Jet Printing 239 9.3 Surgical Guides and Models for Bone Reconstruction 240 9.3.1 Laser-based Surgical Guides 240 9.3.2 Extrusion-based Surgical Guides 240 9.3.3 Ink-based Surgical Guides 241 9.4 Three-dimensionally Printed Implants for Bone Substitution 242 9.4.1 Laser-based Technologies for Metallic Bone Implants 244 9.4.2 Extrusion-based Technologies for Bone Implants 245 9.4.3 Ink-based Technologies for Bone Implants 246 9.5 Scaffolds for Bone Regeneration 246 9.5.1 Laser-based Printing for Regenerative Scaffolds 247 9.5.2 Extrusion-based Printing for Regenerative Scaffolds 247 9.5.3 Ink-based Printing for Regenerative Scaffolds 249 9.5.4 Pre- and Postprocessing Techniques 250 9.5.4.1 Preprocessing 250 9.5.4.2 Postprocessing: Sintering 256 9.5.4.3 Postprocessing: Functionalization 256 9.6 Bioprinting 257 9.7 Conclusion 262 List of Abbreviation 263 References 264 10 Application of Bioreactor Concept and Modeling Techniques to Bone Regeneration and Augmentation Treatments 277 Oscar A. Deccó and Jésica I. Zuchuat 10.1 Bone Tissue Regeneration 278 10.1.1 Proinflammatory Cytokines 279 10.1.2 Transforming Growth Factor Beta 279 10.1.3 Angiogenesis in Regeneration 280 10.2 Actual Therapeutic Strategies and Concepts to Obtain an Optimal Bone Quality and Quantity 281 10.2.1 Guided Bone Regeneration Based on Cells 282 10.2.1.1 Embryonic Stem Cells 282 10.2.1.2 Adult Stem Cells 282 10.2.1.3 Mesenchymal Stem Cells 283 10.2.2 Guided Bone Regeneration Based on PRP and Growth Factors 284 10.2.2.1 Bone Morphogenetic Proteins 287 10.2.3 Guided Bone Regeneration Based on Barrier Membranes 288 10.2.4 Guided Bone Regeneration Based on Scaffolds 290 10.3 Bioreactors Employed for Tissue Engineering in Guided Bone Regeneration 291 10.4 Bioreactor Concept in Guided Bone Regeneration and Tissue Engineering: In Vivo Application 294 10.5 New Multidisciplinary Approaches Intended to Improve and Accelerate the Treatment of Injured and/or Diseased Bone 303 10.5.1 Application of Bioreactor in Dentistry: Therapies for the Treatment of Maxillary Bone Defects 304 10.5.2 Application of Bioreactor in Cases of Osteoporosis 307 10.6 Computational Modeling: An Effective Tool to Predict Bone Ingrowth 310 References 311 11 Stem Cell-based Medicinal Products: Regulatory Perspectives 321 DenizOzdil and Halil Murat Aydin 11.1 Introduction 321 11.2 Defining Stem Cell-based Medicinal Products 323 11.3 Regional Regulatory Issues for Stem Cell Products 326 11.4 Regulatory Systems for Stem Cell-based Technologies 327 11.4.1 The US Regulatory System 328 11.5 Stem Cell Technologies: The European Regulatory System 336 References 340 12 Substrates and Surfaces for Control of Pluripotent Stem Cell Fate and Function 341 Akshaya Srinivasan, Yi-Chin Toh, Xian Jun Loh and Wei Seong Toh 12.1 Introduction 342 12.2 Pluripotent Stem Cells 342 12.3 Substrates for Maintenance of Self-renewal and Pluripotency of PSCs 344 12.3.1 Cellular Substrates 344 12.3.2 Acellular Substrates 345 12.3.2.1 Biological Matrices 345 12.3.2.2 ECM Components 348 12.3.2.3 Decellularized Matrices 350 12.3.2.4 Cell Adhesion Molecules 351 12.3.2.5 Synthetic Substrates 352 12.4 Substrates for Promoting Differentiation of PSCs 355 12.4.1 Cellular Substrates 355 12.4.2 Acellular Substrates 356 12.4.2.1 Biological Matrices 356 12.4.2.2 ECM Components 358 12.4.2.3 Decellularized Matrices 362 12.4.2.4 Cell Adhesion Molecules 363 12.4.2.5 Synthetic Substrates 363 12.5 Conclusions 366 Acknowledgments 367 References 367 13 Silk as a Natural Biopolymer for Tissue Engineering 379 Ayşe Ak Can and Gamze Bölükbaşi Ateş 13.1 Introduction 380 13.2 SF as a Biomaterial 383 13.2.1 Fibroin Hydrogels and Sponges 384 13.2.2 Fibroin Films and Membranes 386 13.2.3 Nonwoven and Woven Silk Scaffolds 386 13.2.4 Silk Fibroin as a Bioactive Molecule Delivery 386 13.3 Biomedical Applications of Silk-based Biomaterials 387 13.3.1 Bone Tissue Engineering 387 13.3.2 Cartilage Tissue Engineering 389 13.3.3 Ligament and Tendon Tissue Engineering 391 13.3.4 Cardiovascular Tissue Engineering 391 13.3.5 Skin Tissue Engineering 393 13.3.6 Other Applications of Silk Fibroin 393 13.4 Conclusion and Future Directions 393 References 394 14 Applications of Biopolymer-based, Surface-modified Devices in Transplant Medicine and Tissue Engineering 399 Ashim Malhotra, Gulnaz Javan and Shivani Soni 14.1 Introduction to Cardiovascular Disease 400 14.2 Need Assessment for Biopolymer-based Devices in Cardiovascular Therapeutics 400 14.3 Emergence of Surface Modification Applications in Cardiovascular Sciences: A Historical Perspective 401 14.4 Nitric Oxide Producing Biosurface Modification 403 14.5 Surface Modification by Extracellular Matrix Protein Adherence 404 14.6 The Role of Surface Modification in the Construction of Cardiac Prostheses 405 14.7 Biopolymer-based Surface Modification of Materials Used in Bone Reconstruction 406 14.8 The Use of Biopolymers in Nanotechnology 409 14.8.1 Protein Nanoparticles 410 14.8.1.1 Albumin-based Nanoparticles and Surface Modification 411 14.8.1.2 Collagen-based Nanoparticles and Surface Modification 412 14.8.1.3 Gelatin-based Nanoparticle Systems 413 14.8.2 Polysaccharide-based Nanoparticle Systems 413 14.8.2.1 The Use of Alginate for Surface Modifications 413 14.8.2.2 The Use of Chitosan-based Nanoparticles and Chitosan-based Surface Modification 414 14.8.2.3 The Use of Chitin-based Nanoparticles and Chitin-based Surface Modification 416 14.8.2.4 The Use of Cellulose-based Nanoparticles and Cellulose-based Surface Modification 417 References 418 15 Stem Cell Behavior on Microenvironment Mimicked Surfaces 423 M. Özgen Öztürk Öncel and Bora Garipcan 15.1 Introduction 424 15.2 Stem Cells 425 15.2.1 Definition and Types 425 15.2.1.1 Embryonic Stem Cells 426 15.2.1.2 Adult Stem Cells 426 15.2.1.3 Reprogramming and Induced Pluripotent Stem Cells 427 15.2.2 Stem Cell Niche 427 15.3 Stem Cells: Microenvironment Interactions 428 15.3.1 Extracellular Matrix 429 15.3.2 Signaling Factors 429 15.3.3 Physicochemical Composition 430 15.3.4 Mechanical Properties 430 15.3.5 Cell–Cell Interactions 431 15.4 Biomaterials as Stem Cell Microenvironments 431 15.4.1 Surface Chemistry 431 15.4.2 Surface Hydrophilicity and Hydrophobicity 434 15.4.3 Substrate Stiffness 435 15.4.4 Surface Topography 435 15.5 Biomimicked and Bioinspired Approaches 436 15.5.1 Bone Tissue Regeneration 439 15.5.2 Cartilage Tissue Regeneration 440 15.5.3 Cardiac Tissue Regeneration 441 15.6 Conclusion 442 References 442

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book covers the recent advances in electrode materials and their novel applications at the cross-section of advanced materials. The book is divided into two sections: State-of-the-art electrode materials; and engineering of applied electrode materials. The chapters deal with electrocatalysis for energy conversion in view of bionanotechnology; surfactant-free materials and polyoxometalates through the concepts of biosensors to renewable energy applications; mesoporous carbon, diamond, conducting polymers and tungsten oxide/conducting polymer-based electrodes and hybrid systems. Numerous approaches are reviewed for lithium batteries, fuel cells, the design and construction of anode for microbial fuel cells including phosphate polyanion electrodes, electrocatalytic materials, fuel cell reactions, conducting polymer based hybrid nanocomposites and advanced nanomaterials.Table of ContentsPreface xv Part 1 State-of-the-art electrode materials 1 Advances in Electrode Materials 3 J. Sołoducho, J. Cabaj and D. Zając 1.1 Advanced Electrode Materials for Molecular Electrochemistry 4 1.1.1 Graphite and Related sp2-Hybridized Carbon Materials 4 1.1.2 Graphene 6 1.1.2.1 Graphene Preparation 6 1.1.2.2 Engineering of Graphene 7 1.1.3 Carbon Nanotubes 8 1.1.3.1 Carbon Nanotube Networks for Applications in Flexible Electronics 9 1.1.4 Surface Structure of Carbon Electrode Materials 11 1.2 Electrode Materials for Electrochemical Capacitors 12 1.2.1 Carbon-based Electrodes 12 1.2.2 Metal Oxide Composite Electrodes 13 1.2.3 Conductive Polymers-based Electrodes 15 1.2.4 Nanocomposites-based Electrode Materials for Supercapacitor 16 1.3 Nanostructure Electrode Materials for Electrochemical Energy Storage and Conversion 16 1.3.1 Assembly and Properties of Nanoparticles 17 1.4 Progress and Perspective of Advanced Electrode Materials 18 Acknowledgments 19 References 19 2 Diamond-based Electrodes 27 Emanuela Tamburri and Maria Letizia Terranova 2.1 Introduction 27 2.2 Techniques for Preparation of Diamond Layers 28 2.2.1 HF-CVD Diamond Synthesis 30 2.2.2 MW-CVD Diamond Synthesis 31 2.2.3 RF-CVD Diamond Synthesis 31 2.3 Why Diamond for Electrodes? 32 2.4 Diamond Doping 33 2.4.1 In Situ Diamond Doping 34 2.4.2 Ion Implantation 37 2.5 Electrochemical Properties of Doped Diamonds 37 2.6 Diamond Electrodes Applications 39 2.6.1 Water Treatment and Disinfection 39 2.6.2 Electroanalytical Sensors 40 2.6.3 Energy Technology 45 2.6.3.1 Supercapacitors 45 2.6.3.2 Li Ion Batteries 49 2.6.3.3 Fuel Cells 51 2.7 Conclusions 52 References 53 3 Recent Advances in Tungsten Oxide/Conducting Polymer Hybrid Assemblies for Electrochromic Applications 61 Cigdem Dulgerbaki and Aysegul Uygun Oksuz 3.1 Introduction 62 3.2 History and Technology of Electrochromics 63 3.3 Electrochromic Devices 63 3.3.1 Electrochromic Contrast 64 3.3.2 Coloration Efficiency 64 3.3.3 Switching Speed 65 3.3.4 Stability 65 3.3.5 Optical Memory 65 3.4 Transition Metal Oxides 67 3.5 Tungsten Oxide 67 3.6 Conjugated Organic Polymers 69 3.7 Hybrid Materials 70 3.8 Electrochromic Tungsten Oxide/Conducting Polymer Hybrids 71 3.9 Conclusions and Perspectives 95 Acknowledgments 99 References 99 Contents vii 4 Advanced Surfactant-free Nanomaterials for Electrochemical Energy Conversion Systems: From Electrocatalysis to Bionanotechnology 103 Yaovi Holade, Teko W. Napporn and Kouakou B. Kokoh 4.1 Advanced Electrode Materials Design: Preparation and Characterization of Metal Nanoparticles 104 4.1.1 Current Strategies for Metal Nanoparticles Preparation: General Consideration 104 4.1.2 Emerged Synthetic Methods without Organic Molecules as Surfactants 109 4.2 Electrocatalytic Performances Toward Organic Molecules Oxidation 114 4.2.1 Electrocatalytic Properties of Metal Nanoparticles in Alkaline Medium 114 4.2.1.1 Electrocatalytic Properties Toward Glycerol Oxidation 114 4.2.1.3 Electrocatalytic Properties Toward Carbohydrates Oxidation 116 4.2.2 Spectroelectrochemical Characterization of the Electrode–Electrolyte Interface 118 4.2.2.1 Spectroelectrochemical Probing of Electrode Materials Surface by CO Stripping 118 4.2.2.2 Spectroelectrochemical Probing of Glycerol Electrooxidation Reaction 120 4.2.2.3 Spectroelectrochemical Probing of Glucose Electrooxidation Reaction 121 4.2.3 Electrochemical Synthesis of Sustainable Chemicals: Electroanalytical Study 123 4.2.4 Electrochemical Energy Conversion: Direct Carbohydrates Alkaline Fuel Cells 128 4.3 Metal Nanoparticles at Work in Bionanotechnology 131 4.3.1 Metal Nanoparticles at Work in Closed-Biological Conditions: Toward Implantable Devices 131 4.3.2 Activation of Implantable Biomedical and Information Processing Devices by Fuel Cells 133 4.4 Conclusions 136 Acknowledgments 137 Notes 137 References 138 Part 2 Engineering of applied electrode materials 5 Polyoxometalate-based Modified Electrodes for Electrocatalysis: From Molecule Sensing to Renewable Energy-related Applications 149 Cristina Freire, Diana M. Fernandes, Marta Nunes and Mariana Araújo 5.1 Introduction 150 5.2 POM and POM-based (Nano)Composites 151 5.2.1 Polyoxometalates 151 5.2.2 Polyoxometalate-based (Nano)Composites 154 5.2.3 General Electrochemical Behavior of POMs 157 5.3 POM-based Electrocatalysis for Sensing Applications 160 5.3.1 Reductive Electrocatalysis 161 5.3.1.1 Nitrite Reduction 161 5.3.1.2 Bromate Reduction 167 5.3.1.3 Iodate Reduction 168 5.3.1.4 Hydrogen Peroxide Reduction Reaction 170 5.3.2 Oxidative Electrocatalysis 173 5.3.2.1 Dopamine and Ascorbic Acid Oxidations 173 5.3.2.2 l-Cysteine Oxidation 177 5.4 POM-based Electrocatalysis for Energy Storage and Conversion Applications 178 5.4.1 Oxygen Evolution Reaction 179 5.4.2 Hydrogen Evolution Reaction 183 5.4.3 Oxygen Reduction Reaction 185 5.5 Concluding Remarks 191 Acknowledgments 193 List of Abbreviations and Acronyms 193 References 196 6 Electrochemical Sensors Based on Ordered Mesoporous Carbons 213 Xiangjie Bo and Ming Zhou 6.1 Introduction 213 6.2 Electrochemical Sensors Based on OMCs 217 6.3 Electrochemical Sensors Based on Redox Mediators/OMCs 222 6.4 Electrochemical Sensors Based on NPs/OMCs 226 6.4.1 Electrochemical Sensors Based on Transition Metal NPs/OMCs 228 6.4.2 Electrochemical Sensors Based on Noble Metal NPs/OMCs 230 6.5 Conclusions 233 Acknowledgments 236 References 236 7 Non-precious Metal Oxide and Metal-free Catalysts for Energy Storage and Conversion 243 Tahereh Jafari, Andrew Meguerdichian, Ting Jiang, Abdelhamid El-Sawy and Steven L. Suib 7.1 Metal–Nitrogen–Carbon (M–N–C) Electrocatalysts 244 7.1.1 Introduction 244 7.1.2 Catalysts for Hydrogen Evolution Reaction 245 7.1.3 Catalysts for Oxygen Evolution Reaction 248 7.1.4 Catalysts for Oxygen Reduction Reaction 249 7.1.5 None-Heat-treated M–N–C Electrocatalysts 250 7.1.6 Heat-treated M–N–C Electrocatalysts 254 7.1.7 Conclusion 261 7.2 Transition Metal Oxide Electrode Materials for Oxygen Evolution Reaction, Oxygen Reduction Reaction and Bifuctional Purposes (OER/ORR) 262 7.2.1 Introduction 262 7.2.2 Oxygen Evolution Reaction 266 7.2.2.1 Synthesis Methodology 267 7.2.2.2 OER Properties of Catalyst 272 7.2.2.3 Morphology or Microstructure Analysis of TM Oxide for OER 274 7.2.3 Oxygen Reduction Reaction 276 7.2.3.1 Morphology or Microstructure Analysis 277 7.2.3.2 ORR Properties of Catalyst 278 7.2.3.3 Synthesis Methodology 278 7.2.3.4 Theoretical Analyses of ORR Active Catalysts 279 7.2.4 Hydrogen Evolution Reaction 279 7.2.5 Bifunctional Oxide Materials (OER/ORR) 281 7.2.5.1 Bifunctional Properties of Catalyst 281 7.2.5.2 Dopant Effects 283 7.2.5.3 Morphology or Microstructure Analysis 283 7.2.5.4 Synthesis Methodology 284 7.2.6 Conclusion 285 7.3 Transition Metal Chalcogenides, Nitrides, Oxynitrides, and Carbides (By: Ting Jiang) 285 7.3.1 Transition Metal Chalcogenides 285 7.3.2 Transition Metal Nitrides 294 7.3.3 Transition Metal Oxynitrides 296 7.3.4 Transition Metal Carbides 298 7.4 Oxygen Reduction Reaction for Metal-free 300 7.4.1 Different Doping Synthesis Strategies 300 7.4.2 ORR Activity in Different Carbon Source 303 7.4.2.1 1D Carbon Nanotube Doped 303 7.4.2.2 2D Graphene 306 7.4.3 Oxygen Evolution Reaction 308 References 310 8 Study of Phosphate Polyanion Electrodes and Their Performance with Glassy Electrolytes: Potential Application in Lithium Ion Solid-state Batteries 321 S. Terny and M.A. Frechero 8.1 Introduction 321 8.2 Glass Samples Preparation 323 8.3 Nanostructured Composites Sample Preparation 324 8.4 X-Ray Powder Diffraction 325 8.4.1 X-Ray Powder Diffraction Patterns of Glassy Materials 325 8.4.2 X-Ray Powder Diffraction Patterns of Composites Materials 326 8.5 Thermal Analysis 326 8.5.1 Thermal Analysis of Glassy Systems 326 8.5.2 Thermal Analysis of Nanocomposites Materials 329 8.6 Density and Appearance 330 8.6.1 Density and Oxygen Packing Density of Glassy Materials 330 8.6.2 Materials’ Appearance 331 8.6.2.1 Glasses 331 8.6.2.2 Nanostructured Composites 332 8.7 Structural Features 332 8.7.1 Glassy Materials 332 8.7.1.1 FTIR and Raman Spectroscopy 334 8.7.2 Nanocomposites Materials 337 8.8 Electrical Behavior 342 8.8.1 Glasses Materials 342 8.8.2 Composite Materials 347 8.9 All-solid-state Lithium Ion Battery 349 8.10 Final Remarks 350 Acknowledgments 352 References 352 9 Conducting Polymer-based Hybrid Nanocomposites as Promising Electrode Materials for Lithium Batteries 355 O.Yu. Posudievsky, O.A. Kozarenko, V.G. Koshechko and V.D. Pokhodenko 9.1 Introduction 356 9.2 Electrode Materials of Lithium Batteries Based on Conducting Polymer-based Nanocomposites Prepared by Chemical and Electrochemical Methods 357 9.2.1 Host–Guest Hybrid Nanocomposites 357 9.2.2 Core–Shell Hybrid Nanocomposites 361 9.3 Mechanochemical Preparation of Conducting Polymer-based Hybrid Nanocomposites as Electrode Materials of Lithium Batteries 368 9.3.1 Principle of Mechanochemical Synthesis 368 9.3.2 Mechanochemically Prepared Conducting Polymer-based Hybrid Nanocomposite Materials for Lithium Batteries 370 9.4 Conclusion 384 References 385 10 Energy Applications: Fuel Cells 397 Mutlu Sönmez Çelebi 10.1 Introduction 398 10.2 Catalyst Supports for Fuel Cell Electrodes 399 10.2.1 Commercial Carbon Supports 399 10.2.2 Carbon Nanotube (CNT) Supports 401 10.2.3 Graphene Supports 403 10.2.4 Mesoporous Carbon Supports 405 10.2.5 Other Carbon Supports 406 10.2.6 Conducting Polymer Supports 408 10.2.7 Hybrid Supports 410 10.2.8 Non-carbon Supports 411 References 421 11 Novel Photoelectrocatalytic Electrodes Materials for Fuel Cell Reactions 435 Mingshan Zhu, Chunyang Zhai and Cheng Lu 11.1 Introduction 435 11.2 Basic Understanding on the Improved Catalytic Performance of Photo-Responsive Metal/ Semiconductor Electrodes 438 11.3 Synthetic Methods for Metal/Semiconductor Electrodes 440 11.3.1 Electrochemical Deposition 441 11.3.2 Chemical Reduction Method 442 11.3.3 Physical Mixing Method 443 11.3.4 Hydrothermal/Solvothermal Method 444 11.3.5 Microwave-assisted Method 445 11.3.6 Other Preparation Methods 445 11.4 Photo-responsive Metal/Semiconductor Anode Catalysts 446 11.4.1 TiO2 Nanoparticles 446 11.4.2 One-dimensional Well-aligned TiO2 Nanotube Arrays 448 11.4.3 Other Semiconductor Supports 450 11.5 Conclusions and Future Outlook 452 References 453 12 Advanced Nanomaterials for the Design and Construction of Anode for Microbial Fuel Cells 457 Ming Zhou, Lu Bai and Chaokang Gu 12.1 Introduction 457 12.2 Carbon Nanotubes-based Anode Materials for MFCs 459 12.3 Graphene-based Anode Materials for MFCs 466 12.4 Other Anode Materials for MFCs 470 12.5 Conclusions 474 Acknowledgments 475 References 475 13 Conducting Polymer-based Electrochemical DNA Biosensing 485 Filiz Kuralay 13.1 Introduction 486 13.2 Electrochemical DNA Biosensors 487 13.3 Conducting Polymer-based Electrochemical DNA Biosensors 489 13.4 Conclusions and Outlook 493 Acknowledgments 494 References 494

Read more less

Book SynopsisComposites materials is basically the combining of unique properties of materials to have synergistic effects. A combination of materials is needed to adapt to certain properties for any application area. There is an everlasting desire to make composite materials stronger, lighter or more durable than traditional materials.Table of ContentsPreface xv 1 Composite Materials for Application in Printed Electronics 1 Kamil Janeczek 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Filler Materials 5 1.3 Conductive Polymers 9 1.4 Preparation of Electronics Materials for Printing 10 1.5 Overview of Application Fields 13 1.6 Conclusions 30 References 31 2 Study of Current-limiting Defects in Superconductors Using Low-temperature Scanning Laser Microscopy 45 Pei Li and Dmytro Abraimov 2.1 Introduction 46 2.2 Introduction of Low-temperature Scanning Laser Microscopy and Its Application in Defect Studies in Superconductors 50 2.3 Case Studies of Using LTSLM to Study Defects in Superconductors 64 2.4 Conclusions 85 Reference 86 3 Innovative High-tech Ceramics Materials 93 Hüsnügül Yılmaz Atay 3.1 Introduction 93 3.2 Ceramic Structure 100 3.3 Raw Materials 108 3.4 Processing of Ceramics 111 3.5 Properties 118 3.6 Some Important Advanced Ceramics 121 3.7 Conclusions 149 References 150 4 Carbon Nanomaterials-based Enzymatic Electrochemical Sensing 155 Rooma Devi, Lipsy Chopra, C.R. Suri, D.K. Sahoo and C.S. Pundir 4.1 Introduction 155 4.2 Carbon Nanomaterials 157 4.3 Carbon Nanotubes Paste Electrodes 165 4.4 Carbon Nanotube-based Electrodes with Immobilized Enzymes 166 4.5 Fullerene-modified Electrode 173 4.6 Carbon Nanoonion (CNO)-modified Electrode 174 4.7 Carbon Nanodiamond-modified Electrode 174 4.8 Carbon Nanohorns-modified Electrode 174 4.9 Carbon Nanofibers-based Electrode 175 4.10 Carbon Nanodot-based Electrode 176 4.11 Electrochemical Biosensor 177 4.12 Conclusions 192 4.13 Future Developments 194 Acknowledgment 195 References 195 5 Nanostructured Ceramics and Bioceramics for Bone Cancer Treatment 209 B. Palazzo, S. Scialla, F. Scalera, N. Margiotta and F. Gervaso1 5.1 Overview 210 5.2 General Concepts onto Bone Cancer and Bone Metastases 210 5.3 Intrinsically Anticancer Nanoceramics 224 5.4 Imprinting Anticancer Properties to Bioceramics by Chemotherapeutic Functionalization 238 5.5 Composite Magnetic Bioceramics 249 5.6 Conclusions and Outlook 254 Acknowledgements 256 References 256 6 Therapeutic Strategies for Bone Regeneration: The Importance of Biomaterials Testing in Adequate Animal Models 275 P.O. Pinto, L.M. Atayde, J.M. Campos, A.R. Caseiro, T. Pereira, C. Mendonça, J.D. Santos and A.C. Maurício 6.1 Introduction 276 6.2 Animal Models Used for In Vivo Testing Bone of Grafting Products 292 6.3 Histomorphometric Analyses 298 6.4 Histologic Analysis 301 6.5 Conclusions 303 Acknowledgments 306 References 306 7 Tuning Hydroxyapatite Particles’ Characteristics for Solid Freeform Fabrication of Bone Scaffolds 321 F. Miculescu, A. Maidaniuc, G.E. Stan, M. Miculescu, S.I. Voicu, A. Cîmpean, V. Mitran and D. Batalu 7.1 Introduction 322 7.2 Powder-based Solid Freeform Fabrication of Naturally Derived Ceramic Components 326 7.3 Tuning of Naturally Derived Calcium Phosphates for Solid Freeform Fabrication 362 7.4 Conclusions 383 Acknowledgments 384 References 384 8 Carbon Nanotubes-reinforced Bioceramic Composite: An Advanced Coating Material for Orthopedic Applications 399 D. Gopi, E. Shinyjoy, L. Kavitha and D. Rajeswari 8.1 Introduction 400 8.2 Materials and Method 407 8.3 Results and Discussion 417 8.4 Conclusion 444 Acknowledgments 445 References 445 Index 453

Read more less

Book Synopsis

Read more less

Book SynopsisAn authoritative guide to the various systems related to navigation, control, and other instrumentation used in a typical aircraft Aircraft Systems offers an examination of the most recent developments in aviation as it relates to instruments, radio navigation, and communication. Written by a noted authority in the field, the text includes in-depth descriptions of traditional systems, reviews the latest developments, as well as gives information on the technologies that are likely to emerge in the future. The author presents material on essential topics including instruments, radio propagation, communication, radio navigation, inertial navigation, and puts special emphasis on systems based on MEMS. This vital resource also provides chapters on solid state gyroscopes, magnetic compass, propagation modes of radio waves, and format of GPS signals. Aircraft Systems is an accessible text that includes an investigation of primary and secondary radar, theTable of ContentsAcknowledgments xiii About the Companion Website xv 1 Historical Development 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 The Advent of Instrument Flight 2 1.3 Development of Flight Instruments Based on Air Pressure 5 1.3.1 The Altimeter 5 1.3.2 The Vertical Speed Indicator (Variometer) 7 1.3.3 The Airspeed Indicator 8 1.4 Development of Flight Instruments Based on Gyroscopes 10 1.5 Development of Aircraft Voice Communications 12 1.6 Development of Aircraft Digital Communications 19 1.6.1 Communication Via Satellite (SATCOM) 19 1.6.2 Secondary Surveillance Radar (SSR) and Traffic Alert and Collision Avoidance System (TCAS) 20 1.6.3 Aircraft Communications Addressing and Reporting System (ACARS) 23 1.7 Development of Radio Navigation 24 1.7.1 Radio Direction Finding 24 1.7.2 Guided Radio Beam Navigation 28 1.7.3 VHF/UHF Radio Navigation Systems 31 1.8 Area and Global Navigation Systems 40 1.8.1 Hyperbolic Navigation 40 1.8.2 Global Navigation Satellite Systems (GNSS) 44 1.8.3 Inertial Navigation Systems (INS) 48 1.8.4 Combining Systems: Performance-Based Navigation (PBN) and Required Navigation Performance (RNP) 53 1.9 Development of Auto Flight Control Systems 57 References 65 2 Pressure Instruments 67 2.1 Layers of the Atmosphere 67 2.2 The International Standard Atmosphere (ISA) 68 2.3 Nonstandard Atmospheres 72 2.4 Dynamic Pressure and the Bernoulli Equation 73 2.5 Definition of Sea Level and Elevation 77 2.6 Definition of Height, Altitude, and Flight Level 77 2.7 Pitot and Static Sources 80 2.8 Pressure Altimeter 81 2.8.1 Basic Principles of the Pressure Altimeter 81 2.8.2 Altimeter Display 86 2.8.3 Servo Altimeter 89 2.8.4 Altimeter with Digital Encoder 91 2.9 Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI) 93 2.9.1 Instantaneous Vertical Speed Indicator (IVSI) 98 2.10 Airspeed Indicator 100 2.11 Mach Meter 105 2.11.1 Critical Mach Number 105 2.11.2 Direct-Reading Mach Meter 107 2.12 OAT Probe 109 2.12.1 Ram Rise and Total Air Temperature 109 2.12.2 Direct-Reading Thermometer for Low Airspeeds 110 2.12.3 Resistance Thermometer Probes 110 2.13 Pitot–Static Systems 113 2.14 Air Data Computer (ADC) 117 2.14.1 Altitude and Vertical Speed 117 2.14.2 TAS and Mach number in Compressible Flow 117 2.14.3 ADC Inputs and Outputs 119 Problems 121 References 121 3 Gyroscopic and Magnetic Instruments 123 3.1 Mechanical Gyroscopes and Instruments 123 3.1.1 Basic Properties of Mechanical Gyroscopes 123 3.1.2 Gyroscope Wander 124 3.1.3 Labeling of Aircraft Axes and Rotations 125 3.1.4 Types of Gyroscope 126 3.1.5 Power for Gyroscopic Instruments 126 3.1.6 Direction Indicator (DI) 127 3.1.7 Earth Rate 129 3.1.8 Transport Wander 131 3.1.9 Attitude Indicator (AI) 134 3.1.10 Turn and Slip Indicator and Turn Coordinator 138 3.2 Solid-State Gyroscopes 141 3.2.1 The Advantages of Solid-State Gyroscopes 141 3.2.2 The Sagnac Effect 141 3.2.3 Fiber-Optic Gyroscope 142 3.2.4 Ring Laser Gyroscope 143 3.2.5 Micro-Electromechanical System (MEMS) Gyroscopes 146 3.2.6 MEMS Accelerometers 148 3.3 Magnetic Compass 149 3.3.1 Terrestrial Magnetism 149 3.3.2 Direct Indicating Magnetic Compass 151 3.3.3 Flux Gate Sensor 156 3.3.4 Miniature Magnetometers 159 3.4 Attitude Heading and Reference System (AHRS) 161 3.5 Sensor Fusion 162 Problems 163 References 165 4 Radio Propagation and Communication 167 4.1 Basic Properties of Radio Waves 167 4.2 Propagation of Radio Waves 169 4.2.1 Attenuation 169 4.2.2 Non-Ionospheric Propagation 171 4.2.2.1 Surface (or Ground) Wave: 20 kHz to 50 MHz (LF–HF) 171 4.2.2.2 Space (or Direct) Wave: >50 MHz (VHF) 172 4.2.3 Ionospheric Propagation (Skywaves) 173 4.2.3.1 Origin of the Ionosphere 173 4.2.3.2 Reflection and Absorption of Radio Waves by the Ionosphere 176 4.2.3.3 Ducting Propagation of Very Low Frequency (VLF) Waves 178 4.3 Transmitters, Receivers, and Signal Modulation 178 4.3.1 Basic Continuous Wave Morse Code Transmitter/Receiver 178 4.3.2 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation of Carrier 180 4.3.3 Superheterodyne Receivers and Demodulation of QAM Signals 182 4.3.4 Amplitude Modulated (AM) Transmission 184 4.3.5 Channel Spacing in the VHF Band for AM Voice Transmission 187 4.3.6 Frequency Modulation 189 4.3.7 Modulation for Digital Data Transmission 193 4.3.7.1 Pulsed Modulation 193 4.3.7.2 Binary Phase Shift Keying (BPSK) 193 4.3.7.3 Binary Continuous Phase Frequency Shift Keying (BCPFSK) 196 4.3.8 ITU Codes for Radio Emissions 198 4.4 Antennas 198 4.4.1 Basic Antenna Theory 198 4.4.2 Resonant Half-Wave Dipole and Quarter-Wave Monopole Antennas for VHF and UHF 206 4.4.3 Effect of Ground and Airframe on Radiation Pattern 211 4.4.4 Feeders, Transmission Lines, Impedance Matching, and Standing Wave Ratio 212 4.4.5 HF Antennas for Sky wave Communications 215 4.4.6 Low-Frequency Small Loop Antenna 215 4.4.7 Directional Antennas in the VHF and UHF Bands 216 4.4.7.1 Yagi–Uda Antenna 217 4.4.7.2 Log-Periodic Antenna 219 4.4.8 Directional Antennas in the SHF Band 220 4.4.8.1 Waveguides as Feeders 220 4.4.8.2 Horn Antenna 222 4.4.8.3 Parabolic Dish Antenna 226 4.4.8.4 Slotted Array 229 4.4.8.5 Patch or Micro strip Antenna 231 4.5 VHF Communications System 233 4.6 Long-Range HF Communications System 237 4.6.1 Coverage and Frequency Bands 237 4.6.2 Selective Calling (SELCAL) 240 4.6.3 HF Ground Station Network 240 4.6.4 HF Data Link (HFDL) 242 4.7 Satellite Communications 242 4.8 Aircraft Communications Addressing and Reporting System (ACARS) 245 Problems 247 References 248 5 Primary and Secondary Radar 249 5.1 Primary Radar 249 5.2 Ground Radar 257 5.3 Airborne Weather Radar 258 5.4 Secondary Surveillance Radar (SSR) 272 5.4.1 Mode A and Mode C Interrogation Pulses 273 5.4.2 Mode A Reply from the Aircraft 274 5.4.3 Mode C Reply from the Aircraft 275 5.4.4 Conflicts Between Mode A and Mode C Replies from Different Aircraft 276 5.4.5 Mode S 276 5.4.6 Mode S All Call Interrogation 277 5.4.7 Mode S Selective Call Interrogation 278 5.4.8 Mode S Reply from Aircraft 279 5.4.9 Traffic Surveillance by Mode S 280 5.4.10 Squitters and Automatic Dependent Surveillance Broadcast (ADS-B) 281 5.4.11 Universal Access Transceivers (UAT) and ADS-B 283 5.4.12 Surveillance by ADS-B 286 5.5 Traffic Collision Avoidance System (TCAS) 288 5.6 Radio Altimeter 291 Problems 293 References 294 6 General Principles of Navigation 295 6.1 Coordinate Reference System for the Earth 295 6.1.1 Latitude and Longitude 295 6.1.2 Great Circle Routes, Rhumb Lines, and Departure 297 6.2 Compass Heading, Variation, and Deviation 302 6.3 Aviation Charts 305 6.3.1 General Chart Properties: Chart Scale, Orthomorphism, and Conformality 305 6.3.2 Chart Projections 308 6.3.2.1 Mercator Projection 308 6.3.2.2 Conical Projection 311 6.3.2.3 Gnomic and Polar Stereographic Projection 313 6.4 Non-Sphericity of the Earth and the WGS84 Model 315 6.5 Navigation by Dead Reckoning 319 6.5.1 Calculating the True Airspeed 320 6.5.2 Calculating the Heading and Ground Speed in a Known Wind 321 6.5.3 Pilot Log for a Visual Flight Rules (VFR) Navigation 324 6.5.4 Correcting Track Errors 327 Problems 331 References 332 7 Short-Range Radio Navigation 333 7.1 Automatic Direction Finder (ADF) 334 7.1.1 Principle of Operation 334 7.1.2 ADF Cockpit Instrumentation 336 7.2 VHF Omnidirectional Range (VOR) 342 7.2.1 Principle of Operation 342 7.2.2 Conventional VOR (CVOR) 344 7.2.3 Doppler VOR (DVOR) 348 7.2.4 VOR Cockpit Instrumentation 351 7.2.5 VOR Track Errors 354 7.2.6 Airways System Defined by VORs 358 7.2.7 Area Navigation (RNAV) 360 7.3 Distance Measuring Equipment (DME) 365 7.4 Instrument Landing System (ILS) 366 7.4.1 ILS Localizer 367 7.4.2 ILS Glide Slope 375 7.4.3 ILS Cockpit Instrumentation 378 7.4.4 Categories of ILS 379 7.5 Microwave Landing System (MLS) 381 Problems 383 References 385 8 Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS) 387 8.1 Basic Principle of Satellite Navigation 387 8.2 The Constellation of Space Vehicles (SVs) 389 8.2.1 Orbital Radius of the GPS Constellation 389 8.2.2 Orbital Arrangement for Optimal Coverage by the GPS Constellation 391 8.3 Transmissions by the GPS SVs 395 8.3.1 GPS Time and UTC 395 8.3.2 Transmission Channels 396 8.3.3 Construction of the C/A Code 398 8.3.4 Multiplexed Decoding of the Navigation Message 400 8.3.5 Format of the Navigation Message 405 8.3.6 Precision P(Y) Code 413 8.3.7 Additional GPS Signals 413 8.3.7.1 L2C Signal 414 8.3.7.2 L5 Safety of Life Signal 415 8.3.7.3 L1C Signal 416 8.3.7.4 L3 and L4 Signals 416 8.4 Control Segment 419 8.5 Sources of GPS Errors 421 8.5.1 Geometric Dilution of Position 421 8.5.2 Ionospheric Propagation Error 421 8.5.3 Other Sources of Error 423 8.6 Relativity Corrections Required for GPS 424 8.7 Augmentation Systems 425 8.7.1 Wide Area Augmentation Systems (WAAS) 425 8.7.2 Local Area Augmentation Systems (LAAS) 426 8.7.3 Aircraft-Based Augmentation Systems (ABAS) and Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring (RAIM) 426 8.8 GPS Cockpit Instrumentation 428 8.9 Spoofing, Meaconing, and Positioning, Navigation, and Timing (PNT) Resilience 430 Problems 430 References 431 9 Inertial Navigation and Kalman Filtering 433 9.1 Basic Principle of Inertial Navigation 433 9.2 Gimbaled Systems 435 9.2.1 Stabilized Platforms 435 9.2.2 Obtaining Latitude and Longitude 436 9.2.3 Correcting the Platform Orientation for Earth Rate and Transport Wander 437 9.2.4 Initializing the Platform 439 9.3 Strapdown Systems 440 9.4 Accelerations Not due to Changes in Aircraft Motion 442 9.5 Schüler Oscillations 443 9.6 Earth-Loop Oscillations 445 9.7 Summary of Inertial Guidance Errors 445 9.7.1 Sensor Bias 446 9.7.2 Random Walk Position Error Produced by Sensor Noise 447 9.7.3 Environmental Factors 447 9.7.4 True Wander 448 9.8 Cockpit Instrumentation 449 9.9 Kalman Filter 451 9.9.1 Basic Principle of the Kalman Filter 451 9.9.2 Kalman Filter for One-Dimensional (Single Value) Data 454 9.9.3 Kalman Filtering of Multiple values 455 Problems 460 References 461 Appendix A Radiation from Wire Antennas 463 Appendix B Theory of Transmission Lines and Waveguides 475 Appendix C Effective Aperture of a Receiving Antenna 481 Appendix D Acronyms 485 Index 489

Read more less

Book SynopsisStructural Reliability Analysis and Prediction, Third Edition is a textbook which addresses the important issue of predicting the safety of structures at the design stage and also the safety of existing, perhaps deteriorating structures. Attention is focused on the development and definition of limit states such as serviceability and ultimate strength, the definition of failure and the various models which might be used to describe strength and loading. This book emphasises concepts and applications, built up from basic principles and avoids undue mathematical rigour. It presents an accessible and unified account of the theory and techniques for the analysis of the reliability of engineering structures using probability theory. This new edition has been updated to cover new developments and applications and a new chapter is included which covers structural optimization in the context of reliability analysis. New examples and end of chapter problems are also now includeTable of ContentsPreface xv Preface to the Second Edition xvii Preface to the First Edition xviii Acknowledgements xx 1 Measures of Structural Reliability 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Deterministic Measures of Limit State Violation 2 1.2.1 Factor of Safety 2 1.2.2 Load Factor 3 1.2.3 Partial Factor (‘Limit State Design’) 4 1.2.4 A Deficiency in Some Safety Measures: Lack of Invariance 5 1.2.5 Invariant Safety Measures 8 1.3 A Partial Probabilistic Safety Measure of Limit State Violation—The Return Period 8 1.4 Probabilistic Measure of Limit State Violation 12 1.4.1 Introduction 12 1.4.2 The Basic Reliability Problem 14 1.4.3 Special Case: Normal Random Variables 17 1.4.4 Safety Factors and Characteristic Values 19 1.4.5 Numerical Integration of the Convolution Integral 23 1.5 Generalized Reliability Problem 24 1.5.1 Basic Variables 24 1.5.2 Generalized Limit State Equations 25 1.5.3 Generalized Reliability Problem Formulation 26 1.5.4 Conditional Reliability Problems∗ 27 1.6 Conclusion 29 2 Structural Reliability Assessment 31 2.1 Introduction 31 2.2 Uncertainties in Reliability Assessment 33 2.2.1 Identification of Uncertainties 33 2.2.2 Phenomenological Uncertainty 34 2.2.3 Decision Uncertainty 34 2.2.4 Modelling Uncertainty 34 2.2.5 Prediction Uncertainty 35 2.2.6 Physical Uncertainty 36 2.2.7 Statistical Uncertainty 36 2.2.8 Uncertainties Due to Human Factors 37 2.2.8.1 Human Error 37 2.2.8.2 Human Intervention 40 2.2.8.3 Modelling of Human Error and Intervention 43 2.2.8.4 Quality Assurance 44 2.2.8.5 Hazard Management 45 2.3 Integrated Risk Assessment 45 2.3.1 Calculation of the Probability of Failure 45 2.3.2 Analysis and Prediction 47 2.3.3 Comparison to Failure Data 48 2.3.4 Validation—a Philosophical Issue 50 2.3.5 The Tail Sensitivity ‘Problem’ 50 2.4 Criteria for Risk Acceptability 51 2.4.1 Acceptable Risk Criterion 51 2.4.1.1 Risks in Society 51 2.4.1.2 Acceptable or Tolerable Risk Levels 53 2.4.2 Socio-economic Criterion 54 2.5 Nominal Probability of Failure 56 2.5.1 General 56 2.5.2 Axiomatic Definition 56 2.5.3 Influence of Gross and Other Errors 57 2.5.4 Practical Implications 58 2.5.5 Target Values for Nominal Failure Probability 59 2.6 Hierarchy of Structural Reliability Measures 60 2.7 Conclusion 61 3 Integration and Simulation Methods 63 3.1 Introduction 63 3.2 Direct and Numerical Integration 63 3.3 Monte Carlo Simulation 65 3.3.1 Introduction 65 3.3.2 Generation of Uniformly Distributed Random Numbers 65 3.3.3 Generation of Random Variates 66 3.3.4 Direct Sampling (‘Crude’ Monte Carlo) 68 3.3.5 Number of Samples Required 69 3.3.6 Variance Reduction 72 3.3.7 Stratified and Latin Hypercube Sampling 73 3.4 Importance Sampling 73 3.4.1 Theory of Importance Sampling 73 3.4.2 Importance Sampling Functions 75 3.4.3 Observations About Importance Sampling Functions 76 3.4.4 Improved Sampling Functions 79 3.4.5 Search or Adaptive Techniques 80 3.4.6 Sensitivity 81 3.5 Directional Simulation∗ 82 3.5.1 Basic Notions 82 3.5.2 Directional Simulation with Importance Sampling 84 3.5.3 Generalized Directional Simulation 85 3.5.4 Directional Simulation in the Load Space 87 3.5.4.1 Basic Concept 87 3.5.4.2 Variation of Strength with Radial Direction 89 3.5.4.3 Line Sampling 90 3.6 Practical Aspects of Monte Carlo Simulation 90 3.6.1 Conditional Expectation 90 3.6.2 Generalized Limit State Function – Response Surfaces 91 3.6.3 Systematic Selection of Random Variables 92 3.6.4 Applications 92 3.7 Conclusion 93 4 Second-Moment and Transformation Methods 95 4.1 Introduction 95 4.2 Second-Moment Concepts 95 4.3 First-Order Second-Moment (FOSM) Theory 97 4.3.1 The Hasofer–Lind Transformation 97 4.3.2 Linear Limit State Function 98 4.3.3 Sensitivity Factors and Gradient Projection 101 4.3.4 Non-Linear Limit State Function—General Case 102 4.3.5 Non-Linear Limit State Function—Numerical Solution 106 4.3.6 Non-Linear Limit State Function—HLRF Algorithm 106 4.3.7 Geometric Interpretation of Iterative Solution Scheme 109 4.3.8 Interpretation of First-Order Second-Moment (FOSM) Theory 110 4.3.9 General Limit State Functions—Probability Bounds 112 4.4 The First-Order Reliability (FOR) Method 112 4.4.1 Simple Transformations 112 4.4.2 The Normal Tail Transformation 114 4.4.3 Transformations to Independent Normal Basic Variables 116 4.4.3.1 Rosenblatt Transformation 117 4.4.3.2 Nataf Transformation 118 4.4.4 Algorithm for First-Order Reliability (FOR) Method 121 4.4.5 Observations 124 4.4.6 Asymptotic Formulation 125 4.5 Second-Order Reliability (SOR) Methods 126 4.5.1 Basic Concept 126 4.5.2 Evaluation Through Sampling 126 4.5.3 Evaluation Through Asymptotic Approximation 127 4.6 Application of FOSM/FOR/SOR Methods 128 4.7 Mean Value Methods 129 4.8 Conclusion 130 5 Reliability of Structural Systems 131 5.1 Introduction 131 5.2 Systems Reliability Fundamentals 132 5.2.1 Structural System Modelling 132 5.2.1.1 Load Modelling 132 5.2.1.2 Material Modelling 133 5.2.1.3 System Modelling 135 5.2.2 Solution Approaches 136 5.2.2.1 Failure Mode Approach 136 5.2.2.2 Survival Mode Approach 137 5.2.2.3 Upper and Lower Bounds—Plastic Theory 138 5.2.3 Idealizations of Structural Systems 139 5.2.3.1 Series Systems 139 5.2.3.2 Parallel Systems—General 141 5.2.3.3 Parallel Systems—Ideal Plastic 143 5.2.3.4 Combined and Conditional Systems 146 5.3 Monte Carlo Techniques for Systems 147 5.3.1 General Remarks 147 5.3.2 Importance Sampling 147 5.3.2.1 Series Systems 147 5.3.2.2 Parallel Systems 149 5.3.2.3 Search-Type Approaches in Importance Sampling 150 5.3.2.4 Failure Modes Identification in Importance Sampling 151 5.3.3 Directional Simulation 151 5.3.4 Directional Simulation in the Load Space 151 5.4 System Reliability Bounds 153 5.4.1 First-Order Series Bounds 153 5.4.2 Second-Order Series Bounds 154 5.4.3 Second-Order Series Bounds by Loading Sequences 157 5.4.4 Series Bounds by Modes and Loading Sequences 158 5.4.5 Improved Series Bounds and Parallel System Bounds 158 5.4.6 First-Order Second-Moment Method in Systems Reliability 159 5.4.7 Correlation Effects 164 5.4.8 Bounds by Matrix Operations and Linear Programming* 164 5.5 Implicit Limit States 168 5.5.1 Introduction 168 5.5.2 Response Surfaces 169 5.5.2.1 Basics of Response Surfaces 169 5.5.2.2 Fitting the Response Surface 170 5.5.3 Applications of Response Surfaces 172 5.5.4 Other Techniques for Obtaining Surrogate Limit States 173 5.6 Functionally Dependent Limit States 173 5.6.1 Effect of Order of Loading 173 5.6.2 Failure Mode Enumeration and Reduction 174 5.6.3 Reduction of Number of Limit States—Truncation 175 5.6.4 Applications 176 5.7 Conclusion 177 6 Time-Dependent Reliability 179 6.1 Introduction 179 6.2 Time-Integrated Approach 182 6.2.1 Basic Notions 182 6.2.2 Conversion to a Time-Independent Format* 184 6.3 Discretized Approach 185 6.3.1 Known Number of Discrete Events 185 6.3.2 Random Number of Discrete Events 187 6.3.3 Return Period 188 6.3.4 Hazard Function 189 6.4 Stochastic Process Theory 191 6.4.1 Stochastic Process 191 6.4.2 Stationary Processes 192 6.4.3 Derivative Process 193 6.4.4 Ergodic Processes 194 6.4.5 First-Passage Probability 194 6.4.6 Distribution of Local Maxima 196 6.5 Stochastic Processes and Outcrossings 196 6.5.1 Discrete Processes 196 6.5.1.1 Borges Processes 196 6.5.1.2 Poisson Counting Process 197 6.5.1.3 Filtered Poisson process 198 6.5.1.4 Poisson Spike Process 199 6.5.1.5 Poisson Square Wave Process 200 6.5.1.6 Renewal Processes 201 6.5.2 Continuous Processes 202 6.5.3 Barrier (or Level) Upcrossing Rate 202 6.5.4 Outcrossing Rate 205 6.5.4.1 Generalization from Barrier Crossing Rate 205 6.5.4.2 Outcrossings for Discrete Processes 207 6.5.4.3 Outcrossings for Continuous Gaussian Processes 209 6.5.4.4 General Regions and Processes 213 6.5.5 Numerical Evaluation of Outcrossing Rates 214 6.6 Time-Dependent Reliability 215 6.6.1 Introduction 215 6.6.2 Sampling Methods for Unconditional Failure Probability 216 6.6.2.1 Importance and Conditional Sampling 216 6.6.2.2 Directional Simulation in the Load Process Space 217 6.6.3 FOSM/FOR Methods for Unconditional Failure Probability 218 6.6.4 Summary for Time-Dependent Reliability Estimation 225 6.7 Load Combinations 226 6.7.1 Introduction 226 6.7.2 General Formulation 226 6.7.3 Discrete Processes 228 6.7.4 Simplifications 230 6.7.4.1 Load Coincidence Method 230 6.7.4.2 Borges Processes 231 6.7.4.3 Deterministic Load Combination—Turkstra’s Rule 233 6.8 Ensemble Crossing Rate and Barrier Failure Dominance 234 6.8.1 Introduction 234 6.8.2 Ensemble Crossing Rate Approximation 234 6.8.3 Application to Turkstra’s Rule and the Point Crossing Formula 235 6.8.4 Barrier Failure Dominance 236 6.8.5 Validity 237 6.9 Dynamic Analysis of Structures 237 6.9.1 Introduction 237 6.9.2 Frequency Domain Analysis 238 6.9.3 Reliability Analysis 240 6.10 Fatigue Analysis 241 6.10.1 General Formulation 241 6.10.2 The S-N Model 242 6.10.3 Fracture Mechanics Models 243 6.11 Conclusion 244 7 Load and Load Effect Modelling 247 7.1 Introduction 247 7.2 Wind Loading 248 7.3 Wave Loading 252 7.4 Floor Loading 255 7.4.1 General 255 7.4.2 Sustained Load Representation 256 7.4.3 Equivalent Uniformly Distributed Load 260 7.4.4 Distribution of Equivalent Uniformly Distributed Load 263 7.4.5 Maximum (Lifetime) Sustained Load 265 7.4.6 Extraordinary Live Loads 267 7.4.7 Total Live Load 268 7.4.8 Permanent and Construction Loads 269 7.5 Conclusion 271 8 Resistance Modelling 273 8.1 Introduction 273 8.2 Basic Properties of Hot-Rolled Steel Members 273 8.2.1 Steel Material Properties 273 8.2.2 Yield Strength 274 8.2.3 Moduli of Elasticity 277 8.2.4 Strain-Hardening Properties 278 8.2.5 Size Variation 278 8.2.6 Properties for Reliability Assessment 279 8.3 Properties of Steel Reinforcing Bars 280 8.4 Concrete Statistical Properties 281 8.5 Statistical Properties of Structural Members 284 8.5.1 Introduction 284 8.5.2 Methods of Analysis 284 8.5.3 Second-moment Analysis 284 8.5.4 Simulation 287 8.6 Connections 290 8.7 Incorporation of Member Strength in Design 290 8.8 Conclusion 292 9 Codes and Structural Reliability 293 9.1 Introduction 293 9.2 Structural Design Codes 294 9.3 Safety-Checking Formats 296 9.3.1 Probability-Based Code Rules 296 9.3.2 Partial Factors Code Format 297 9.3.3 Simplified Partial Factors Code Format 299 9.3.4 Load and Resistance Factor Code Format 300 9.3.5 Some Observations 300 9.4 Relationship Between Level 1 and Level 2 Safety Measures 301 9.4.1 Derivation from FOSM / FOR Theory 302 9.4.2 Special Case: Linear Limit State Function 303 9.5 Selection of Code Safety Levels 304 9.6 Code Calibration Procedure 305 9.7 Example of Code Calibration 310 9.8 Observations 315 9.8.1 Applications 315 9.8.2 Some Theoretical Issues 316 9.9 Performance-Based Design 317 9.10 Conclusion 319 10 Probabilistic Evaluation of Existing Structures 321 10.1 Introduction 321 10.2 Assessment Procedures 323 10.2.1 Overall Procedure 323 10.2.2 Service-Proven Structures 325 10.2.3 Proof Loading 326 10.3 Updating Probabilistic Information 327 10.3.1 Bayes Theorem 327 10.3.2 Updating Failure Probabilities for Proof Loads 328 10.3.3 Updating Probability Density Functions 328 10.3.4 Pre-Posterior Analysis 332 10.4 Analytical Assessment 333 10.4.1 General 333 10.4.2 Models for Deterioration 334 10.5 Acceptance Criteria for Existing Structures 338 10.5.1 Nominal Probabilities 338 10.5.2 Semi-Probabilistic Safety Checking Formats 339 10.5.3 Probabilistic Criteria 340 10.5.4 Decision-Theory-Based Criteria 340 10.5.5 Life-Cycle Decision Approach 342 10.6 Conclusion 343 11 Structural Optimization and Reliability 345 11.1 Introduction 345 11.2 Types of Reliability-based Optimization Problems 346 11.2.1 Introduction 346 11.2.2 Deterministic Design Optimization (DDO) 347 11.2.2.1 Formulation 347 11.2.2.2 Example of DDO Using FOSM 348 11.2.3 Reliability-Based Design Optimization (RBDO) 349 11.2.3.1 Formulation 349 11.2.3.2 Example of RBDO using FOSM 350 11.2.4 Life-Cycle Cost and Risk Optimization (LCRO) 351 11.2.4.1 Formulation 351 11.2.4.2 Example of LCRO using FOSM 352 11.2.5 Comparison, Summary and Outlook 353 11.3 Reliability Based Design Optimization (RBDO) Using First Order Reliability (FOR) 354 11.3.1 Introduction 354 11.3.2 Alternative Robust Solutions Schemes 354 11.3.3 Comparison Between RIA and PMA Solution Schemes 357 11.3.4 Solution of Nested Optimization Problems 358 11.3.5 Example of RBDO Using RIA and PMA 358 11.3.6 Decoupling Techniques for Solving RBDO Problems 361 11.3.6.1 Decoupling: Serial Single Loop Methods 361 11.3.6.2 Decoupling: Uni-level Methods 361 11.3.6.3 Sequential Approximate Programming (SAP) 361 11.4 RBDO with System Reliability Constraints 362 11.4.1 Formulation of System RBDO 362 11.4.2 Structural Systems RBDO with Component Reliability Constraints 363 11.4.3 Structural System RBDO—solution Schemes 363 11.5 Simulation-based Design Optimization 363 11.5.1 Introduction 363 11.5.2 Problem Formulation 364 11.5.3 Remarks About Solutions 365 11.6 Life-cycle Cost and Risk Optimization 367 11.6.1 Introduction 367 11.6.2 Optimal Structural Design Under Stochastic Loads 367 11.6.3 Optimal Structural Design Considering Inspections and Maintenance 368 11.7 Discussion and Conclusion 368 A Summary of Probability Theory 371 A.1 Probability 371 A.2 Mathematics of Probability 371 A.2.1 Axioms 371 A.2.2 Derived Results 372 A.2.2.1 Multiplication Rule 372 A.2.2.2 Complementary Probability 372 A.2.2.3 Conditional Probability 372 A.2.2.4 Total Probability Theorem 372 A.2.2.5 Bayes’ Theoremx 372 A.3 Description of Random Variables 373 A.4 Moments of Random Variables 373 A.4.1 Mean or Expected Value (First Moment) 373 A.4.2 Variance and Standard Deviation (Second Moment) 374 A.4.3 Bounds on the Deviations from the Mean 374 A.4.4 Skewness 𝛾1 (Third Moment) 374 A.4.5 Coefficient 𝛾2 of Kurtosis (Fourth Moment) 375 A.4.6 Higher Moments 375 A.5 Common Univariate Probability Distributions 375 A.5.1 Binomial B(n, p) 375 A.5.2 Geometric G(p) 376 A.5.3 Negative Binomial NB(k, p) 376 A.5.4 Poisson PN(𝜈t) 377 A.5.5 Exponential EX(𝜈) 377 A.5.6 Gamma GM(k, 𝜈) [and Chi-squared 𝜒2(n)] 378 A.5.7 Normal (Gaussian) N(𝜇, 𝜎) 379 A.5.8 Central Limit Theorem 381 A.5.9 Lognormal LN(𝜆, 𝜀) 381 A.5.10 Beta BT(a, b, q, r) 383 A.5.11 Extreme Value Distribution Type I EV – I(𝜇, 𝛼) [Gumbel distribution] 385 A.5.12 Extreme Value Distribution Type II EV - II(u, k) [Frechet Distribution] 386 A.5.13 Extreme Value Distribution Type III EV - III(𝜀, u, k) [Weibull] 388 A.5.14 Generalized Extreme Value distribution GEV 390 A.6 Jointly Distributed Random Variables 390 A.6.1 Joint Probability Distribution 390 A.6.2 Conditional Probability Distributions 391 A.6.3 Marginal Probability Distributions 391 A.7 Moments of Jointly Distributed Random Variables 392 A.7.1 Mean 392 A.7.2 Variance 393 A.7.3 Covariance and Correlation 393 A.8 Bivariate Normal Distribution 393 A.9 Transformation of Random Variables 397 A.9.1 Transformation of a Single Random Variable 397 A.9.2 Transformation of Two or More Random Variables 397 A.9.3 Linear and Orthogonal Transformations 398 A.10 Functions of Random Variables 398 A.10.1 Function of a Single Random Variable 398 A.10.2 Function of Two or More Random Variables 398 A.10.3 Some Special Results 399 A.10.3.1 Y = X1 + X2 399 A.10.3.2 Y = X1X2 399 A.11 Moments of Functions of Random Variables 400 A.11.1 Linear Functions 400 A.11.2 Product of Variates 400 A.11.3 Division of Variates 401 A.11.4 Moments of a Square Root [Haugen, 1968] 401 A.11.5 Moments of a Quadratic Form [Haugen, 1968] 402 A.12 Approximate Moments for General Functions 402 B Rosenblatt and Other Transformations 403 B.1 Rosenblatt Transformation 403 B.2 Nataf Transformation 405 B.3 Orthogonal Transformation of Normal Random Variables 407 B.4 Generation of Dependent Random Vectors 410 C Bivariate and Multivariate Normal Integrals 415 C.1 Bivariate Normal Integral 415 C.1.1 Format 415 C.1.2 Reductions of Form 417 C.1.3 Bounds 417 C.2 Multivariate Normal Integral 419 C.2.1 Format 419 C.2.2 Numerical Integration of Multi-Normal Integrals 419 C.2.3 Reduction to a Single Integral 420 C.2.4 Bounds on the Multivariate Normal Integral 420 C.2.5 First-Order Multi-Normal (FOMN) Approach 421 C.2.5.1 Basic Method: B-FOMN 421 C.2.5.2 Improved Method: I-FOMN 424 C.2.5.3 Generalized Method: G-FOMN 425 C.2.6 Product of Conditional Marginals (PCM) Approach 426 D Complementary Standard Normal Table 429 D.1 Standard Normal Probability Density Function 𝜙(x) 432 E Random Numbers 433 F Selected Problems 435 References 457 Index497

Read more less

Book SynopsisStatistics is confusing, even for smart, technically competent people. And many students and professionals find that existing books and web resources don't give them an intuitive understanding of confusing statistical concepts. That is why this book is needed. Some of the unique qualities of this book are: Easy to Understand: Uses unique graphics that teach such as concept flow diagrams, compare-and-contrast tables, and even cartoons to enhance rememberability. Easy to Use: Alphabetically arranged, like a mini-encyclopedia, for easy lookup on the job, while studying, or during an open-book exam. Wider Scope: Covers Statistics I and Statistics II and Six Sigma Black Belt, adding such topics as control charts and statistical process control, process capability analysis, and design of experiments. As a result, this book will be useful for business professionals and industrial engineers in addition to students and professionals in the Table of ContentsOTHER CONCEPTS COVERED IN THE ARTICLES xi WHY THIS BOOK IS NEEDED xix WHAT MAKES THIS BOOK UNIQUE? xxiii HOW TO USE THIS BOOK xxv ALPHA, 𝜶 1 ALPHA AND BETA ERRORS 9 ALPHA, p, CRITICAL VALUE, AND TEST STATISTIC –HOW THEY WORK TOGETHER 14 ALTERNATIVE HYPOTHESIS 22 ANALYSIS OF MEANS (ANOM) 27 ANOVA – PART 1: WHAT IT DOES 32 ANOVA – PART 2: HOW IT DOES IT 36 ANOVA – PART 3: 1-WAY (AKA SINGLE FACTOR) 42 ANOVA – PART 4: 2-WAY (AKA 2-FACTOR) 47 ANOVA vs. REGRESSION 54 BINOMIAL DISTRIBUTION 62 CHARTS/GRAPHS/PLOTS – WHICH TO USE WHEN 69 CHI-SQUARE – THE TEST STATISTIC AND ITS DISTRIBUTIONS 76 CHI-SQUARE TEST FOR GOODNESS OF FIT 82 CHI-SQUARE TEST FOR INDEPENDENCE 89 CHI-SQUARE TEST FOR THE VARIANCE 98 CONFIDENCE INTERVALS – PART 1: GENERAL CONCEPTS 101 CONFIDENCE INTERVALS – PART 2: SOME SPECIFICS 108 CONTROL CHARTS – PART 1: GENERAL CONCEPTS AND PRINCIPLES 113 CONTROL CHARTS – PART 2: WHICH TO USE WHEN 119 CORRELATION – PART 1 124 CORRELATION – PART 2 129 CRITICAL VALUE 135 DEGREES OF FREEDOM 141 DESIGN OF EXPERIMENTS (DOE) – PART 1 146 DESIGN OF EXPERIMENTS (DOE) – PART 2 151 DESIGN OF EXPERIMENTS (DOE) – PART 3 158 DISTRIBUTIONS – PART 1: WHAT THEY ARE 165 DISTRIBUTIONS – PART 2: HOW THEY ARE USED 171 DISTRIBUTIONS – PART 3: WHICH TO USE WHEN 177 ERRORS – TYPES, USES, AND INTERRELATIONSHIPS 178 EXPONENTIAL DISTRIBUTION 184 F 189 FAIL TO REJECT THE NULL HYPOTHESIS 195 HYPERGEOMETRIC DISTRIBUTION 200 HYPOTHESIS TESTING – PART 1: OVERVIEW 202 HYPOTHESIS TESTING – PART 2: HOW TO 208 INFERENTIAL STATISTICS 212 MARGIN OF ERROR 220 NONPARAMETRIC 223 NORMAL DISTRIBUTION 230 NULL HYPOTHESIS 235 p, p-VALUE 241 p, t, AND F: “>”OR “<”? 246 POISSON DISTRIBUTION 250 POWER 254 PROCESS CAPABILITY ANALYSIS (PCA) 259 PROPORTION 266 r, MULTIPLE R, r2, R2, R SQUARE, R2 ADJUSTED 274 REGRESSION – PART 1: SUMS OF SQUARES 277 REGRESSION – PART 2: SIMPLE LINEAR 285 REGRESSION – PART 3: ANALYSIS BASICS 292 REGRESSION – PART 4: MULTIPLE LINEAR 297 REGRESSION – PART 5: SIMPLE NONLINEAR 305 REJECT THE NULL HYPOTHESIS 311 RESIDUALS 315 SAMPLE, SAMPLING 320 SAMPLE SIZE – PART 1: PROPORTIONS FOR COUNT DATA 326 SAMPLE SIZE – PART 2: FOR MEASUREMENT/CONTINUOUS DATA 334 SAMPLING DISTRIBUTION 339 SIGMA 343 SKEW, SKEWNESS 344 STANDARD DEVIATION 348 STANDARD ERROR 352 STATISTICALLY SIGNIFICANT 357 SUMS OF SQUARES 363 t – THE TEST STATISTIC AND ITS DISTRIBUTIONS 364 t-TESTS – PART 1: OVERVIEW 370 t-TESTS – PART 2: CALCULATIONS AND ANALYSIS 376 TEST STATISTIC 385 VARIABLES 392 VARIANCE 397 VARIATION/VARIABILITY/DISPERSION/SPREAD 404 WHICH STATISTICAL TOOL TO USE TO SOLVE SOME COMMON PROBLEMS 408 Z 412

Read more less

Book SynopsisTheory of Elasticity and Stress Concentration Yukitaka Murakami, Kyushu University, Japan A comprehensive guide to elasticity and stress concentration Theory of Elasticity and Stress Concentration comprehensively covers elasticity and stress concentration and demonstrates how to apply the theory to practical engineering problems. The book presents a new approach to the topic without the need for complicated mathematics, and the principles and meaning of stress concentration are covered without reliance on numerical analysis. The book consists of two parts: Part I - Theory of Elasticity and Part II - Stress Concentration. Part I treats the theory of elasticity from the viewpoint of helping the reader to comprehend the essence of it. Part II treats the principle and meaning of stress concentration and guides the reader to a better understanding of it. Throughout the book, many useful and interesting applications of the basic new way of thinking are presented and explained. Key fTable of ContentsPart I Preface for the book Preface for the part Chapter 1 Stress 1.1 Stress at the surface of a body 1.1.1 Normal stress 1.1.2 Shear stress 1.2 Stress in the interior of a body 1.3 Two-dimensional (2D) stress state, three-dimensional (3D) stress state and stress transformation 1.3.1 Normal stress 1.3.2 Shear stress 1.3.3 Stress in an arbitary direction 1.3.3.1 Two-dimensional stress transformation 1.3.3.2 Three-dimensional stress transformation 1.3.4 Principal stresses 1.3.4.1 Principal stresses in two-dimensional stress state 1.3.4.2 Principal stresses in three-dimensional stress state 1.3.5 Pricipal shear stresses Problems of Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Strains 2.1 Strains in two-dimensional problems 2.2 Strains in three-dimensional problems 2.3 Strains in an arbitrary direction 2.3.1 Two-dimensional case 2.3.2 Three-dimensional case 2.4 Principal strains 2.5 Conditions of compatibility Problems of Chapter 2 Chapter 3 The Relationship between Stresses and Strains: The Generalized Hooke’s law Problems of Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Equilibrium Equations Problems of Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Saint Venant’s Principle and Boundary Conditions 5.1 Saint Venant’s Principle 5.2 Boundary conditions Problems of Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Two-Dimensional Problems 6.1 Plane stress and plane strain 6.2 Basic conditions for exact solutions: Nature of solutions 6.3 Airy’s stress function 6.4 Hollow cylinder 6.5 Stress concentration at a circular hole 6.6 Stress concentration at an elliptical hole 6.7 Stress concentration at a hole in a finite width plate 6.8 Stress concentration at a crack 6.9 Stress field due to a point force applied at the edge of a semi-infinite plate 6.10 Circular disk subjected to a concentrated force Problems of Chapter 6 Appendix of Chapter 6 Chapter 7 Torsion of a Bar with Uniform Section 7.1 Torsion of cylindrical bars 7.2 Torsion of bars having thin closed section 7.3 Saint Venant’s torsion problems 7.4 Stress function in torsion 7.5 Membrane analogy: Solution of torsion problems by using the deformation of pressurized membrane 7.6 Torsion of bars having thin unclosed section 7.7 Comparison of torsional rigidity between a bar with an open section and a bar with a closed section Problems of Chapter 7 Chapter 8 Energy Principles 8.1 Strain energy 8.2 Uniqueness of the solutions of elasticity problems 8.3 Principle of the virtual work 8.4 Principle of the minimum potential energy 8.5 Castigliano’s theorem 8.6 The reciprocal theorem Problems of Chapter 8 Chapter 9 The Finite Elemenet Method, FEM 9.1 FEM for one-dimensional problems 9.2 Analaysis of plane stress problems by the finite element method 9.2.1 Approximation of 2D plane stress problems by a set of triangular elements 9.2.2 Relationship between stress and strain in plane stress problemm 9.2.3 Stiffness matrix of a triangular plate element 9.2.4 Stiffness matrix of the total structure 9.2.5 Expression of boundary conditions and basic knowledge for element meshing Problems of Chapter 9 Chapter 10 Bending of Plates 10.1 Simple examples of plate bending 10.2 General problems of plate bending 10.3 Transformation of bending moment and torsional moment 10.4 Differential equations for a plate subjected to loads on the surface and their applications 10.5 Boundary conditions in plate bending problems 10.6 Polar coordinate expression of the quantities of plate bending 10.7 Stress concentration in plate bending problems 10.8 Bending of a circular plate Problems of Chapter 10 Chapter 11 Deformation and Stress in Cylindrical Shells 11.1 Basic equations 11.2 Various problems of cylindrical shells Problems of Chapter 11 Chapter 12 Thermal Stress 12.1 Therrmal stress in a rectangular plate – Simple examples of thermal stress 12.2 Thermal stress in a circular plate 12.3 Thermal stress in a cylinder Problems of Chapter 12 Chapter 13 Contact Stress 13.1 Two-dimensional contact stress 13.2 Three-dimensional contact stress Problems of Chapter 13 Appendix Appendix 1 Rule of direction cosines Appendix 2 Green’s theorem and Gauss’ divergence theorem Answers and Hints for the Problems

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe Ceramic Engineering and Science Proceeding has been published by The American Ceramic Society since 1980. This series contains a collection of papers dealing with issues in both traditional ceramics (i.e., glass, whitewares, refractories, and porcelain enamel) and advanced ceramics. Topics covered in the area of advanced ceramic include bioceramics, nanomaterials, composites, solid oxide fuel cells, mechanical properties and structural design, advanced ceramic coatings, ceramic armor, porous ceramics, and more.Table of ContentsForeword ix Preface xi Acknowledgments xiii ENERGY AND GLASS MELTING Strength of Glass and Glass Fibers 3Hong Li Operating Experience with OPTIMELT Regenerative Thermo-Chemical Heat Recovery for Oxy-Fuel Fired Glass Furnaces 17A. Gonzalez, E. Solorzano, S. Laux, U. Iyoha, K.T. Wu, and H. Kobayashi BATCHING Optimization Program for Batch Wetting Offers Benefits in Furnace Life, Energy Efficiency, and Operational Reliability 29Thomas S. Hughes, F. Philip Yu, and Blaine Krause Effect of Borate Raw Material Choices on the Batch Reactions of Alkali-Lean Borosilicate Glasses 43Mathieu Hubert, Anne Jans Faber, Simon Cook, and David Lever Glass Cullet: Impact of Color Sorting on Glass Redox State 57Stefano Ceola, Nicola Favaro, and Antonio Daneo COMBUSTION, REFRACTORIES, AND SENSORS Oxygen-Solid Fuel Combustion in Glass Melting Furnaces 71Mark D. D’Agostini, Jinghong Wang, and Juping Zhao Hydroprime® Gas Generators Provide Low Cost, Reliable Hydrogen for Float Glass Manufacturing 83Goutam Shahani, Kyle Finley, and Nick Onelli Corrosion of AZS Refractories—Source of Defects in Tableware Glass 89P. Šimurka, J. Kraxner, P. Vrábel, and T. Pauèo How Fused Cast AZS Take Care of Secure and High Quality Glass Manufacturing 103Michel Gaubil, Isabelle Cabodi, Jessy Gillot, and Jie Lu Advanced Furnace Inspection and Monitoring Based on Radar Sensors 117Yakup Bayram, Alexander C. Ruege, Peter Hagan, Elmer Sperry, and Dan Cetnar ENVIRONMENTAL Optimizing Low Momentum Oxy-Fuel Burner Performance in Glass Furnaces to Minimize Furnace Emissions and Alkali Volatilization 135Uyi Iyoha, Hisashi Kobayashi, Euan Evenson, and Elmer Sperry Heat Oxy-Combustion: An Innovative Energy Saving Solution for Glass Industry 149Hwanho Kim, Taekyu Kang, Kenneth Kaiser, Scott Liedel, Luc Jarry, Xavier Paubel, Youssef Jumani, and Levent Kaya MODELING Intelligent Furnace Design and Control to Increase Overall Glass Furnace Efficiency 159Erik Muijsenberg Glass Melt Quality Optimization by CFD Simulations and Laboratory Experiments 169A.F.J.A. Habraken, A.M. Lankhorst, O.S. Verheijen, and M. Rongen FORMING Forehearth Heating 181Alan Stephens, Clive Morgan, and Stephen Sherlock 185 Improvements to Emhart Glass Vertiflow Mold Cooling Applications in Glass Container Production 185Pierre S. Lankeu Ngankeu Multi-Layer Glass Thickness Measurement 193Jason Ness, Filipp Ignatovich, and Steve Heveron-Smith The Qualification of a New Glass Strengthening Process 201Steven Brown and Dubravko Stuhne Author Index 207

Read more less

Book SynopsisCovers the advantages of using photothermal spectroscopy over conventional absorption spectroscopy, including facilitating extremely sensitive measurements and non-destructive analysis This unique guide to the application and theory of photothermal spectroscopy has been newly revised and updated to include new methods and applications and expands on applications to chemical analysis and material science. The book covers the subject from the ground up, lists all practical considerations needed to obtain accurate results, and provides a working knowledge of the various methods in use. Photothermal Spectroscopy Methods, Second Edition includes the latest methods of solid state and materials analysis, and describes new chemical analysis procedures and apparatuses in the analytical chemistry sections. It offers a detailed look at the optics, physical principles of heat transfer, and signal analysis. Information in the temperature change and optical elements inTable of ContentsAbout the Authors xiii Preface xv Acknowledgments xix 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Photothermal Spectroscopy 1 1.2 Basic Processes in Photothermal Spectroscopy 3 1.3 Photothermal Spectroscopy Methods 5 1.4 Application of Photothermal Spectroscopy 9 1.5 Illustrative History and Classification of Photothermal Spectroscopy Methods 10 1.5.1 Nature of the Photothermal Effect 10 1.5.2 Photoacoustic Spectroscopy 11 1.5.3 Single-Beam Photothermal Lens Spectroscopy 14 1.5.4 Photothermal Z-scan Technique 18 1.5.5 Photothermal Interferometry 20 1.5.6 Two-Beam Photothermal Lens Spectroscopy 25 1.5.7 Photothermal Lens Microscopy 27 1.5.8 Photothermal Deflection, Refraction, and Diffraction 31 1.5.9 Photothermal Mirror 38 1.5.10 Photothermal IR Microspectroscopy 41 1.5.11 Photothermal Radiometry 44 1.5.12 Historic Summary 47 1.6 Some Important Features of Photothermal Spectroscopy 48 References 50 2 Absorption, Energy Transfer, and Excited State Relaxation 57 2.1 Factors Affecting Optical Absorption 57 2.2 Optical Excitation 63 2.2.1 Kinetic Treatment of Optical Transitions 63 2.2.2 Nonradiative Transitions 69 2.3 Excited State Relaxation 72 2.3.1 Rotational and Vibrational Relaxation 73 2.3.2 Electronic States and Transitions 78 2.3.3 Electronic State Relaxation 80 2.4 Relaxation Kinetics 85 2.5 Nonlinear Absorption 88 2.5.1 Multiphoton Absorption 90 2.5.2 Optical Saturation of Two-Level Transitions 91 2.5.3 Optical Bleaching 93 2.5.4 Response Times During Optical Bleaching 95 2.5.5 Optical Bleaching of Organic Dyes 96 2.5.6 Relaxation for Impulse Excitation 98 2.5.7 Multiple Photon Absorption 99 2.6 Absorbed Energy 101 References 104 3 Hydrodynamic Relaxation: Heat Transfer and Acoustics 107 3.1 Local Equilibrium 107 3.2 Thermodynamic and Optical Parameters in Photothermal Spectroscopy 108 3.2.1 Enthalpy and Temperature 108 3.2.2 Energy and Dynamic Change 111 3.3 Conservation Equations 111 3.4 Hydrodynamic Equations 116 3.5 Hydrodynamic Response to Photothermal Excitation 118 3.5.1 Solving the Hydrodynamic Equations 119 3.5.2 Thermal Diffusion Mode 121 3.5.3 Fourier–Laplace Solutions for the Thermal Diffusion Equation 122 3.5.4 Propagating Mode 124 3.5.5 Summary of Hydrodynamic Mode Solutions 125 3.6 Density Response to Impulse Excitation 126 3.6.1 One-Dimensional Case 127 3.6.2 Two-Dimensional Cylindrically Symmetric Example 129 3.6.3 Coupled Solutions 137 3.7 Solutions Including Mass Diffusion 138 3.8 Effect of Hydrodynamic Relaxation on Temperature 143 3.9 Thermodynamic Fluctuation 145 3.10 Noise Equivalent Density Fluctuation 146 3.11 Summary 150 Appendix 3.A Thermodynamic Parameter Calculation 150 Appendix 3.B Propagating Mode Impulse Response for Polar Coordinates in Infinite Media 151 References 153 4 Temperature Change, Thermoelastic Deformation, and Optical Elements in Homogeneous Samples 155 4.1 Temperature Change from Gaussian Excitation Sources 156 4.1.1 Thermal Diffusion Approximation 156 4.1.2 Gaussian Laser Excitation of Optically Thin Samples 157 4.1.3 Short Pulse Laser Excitation 159 4.1.4 Continuous Laser Excitation 160 4.1.4.1 Laser Heating 160 4.1.4.2 On-axis Temperature Change 161 4.1.4.3 Post-excitation Cooling 162 4.1.5 Chopped Laser Excitation 165 4.1.6 On-axis Temperature Change for Periodic Excitation 167 4.1.7 Gaussian Laser Excitation of Absorbing and Opaque Samples 168 4.1.7.1 Short Pulse Laser Excitation 169 4.1.7.2 Continuous Laser Excitation 170 4.1.8 Thermal Gratings 170 4.2 Thermodynamic Parameters 174 4.2.1 Thermodynamic Parameters Affecting Temperature 174 4.2.2 Convection Heat Transfer 178 4.3 Thermoelastic Displacement 180 4.3.1 Continuous Laser Excitation 181 4.3.2 Short Pulse Laser Excitation 182 4.4 Optical Elements 182 4.4.1 Phase Shift and Optical Path Length Difference 184 4.4.2 Phase Shift and Optical Path Length Difference Under Thermoelastic Deformation 185 4.4.3 Deflection Angle 189 4.4.4 Thermal Lens Focal Length 190 4.4.5 Grating Strength 193 4.5 Temperature-dependent Refractive Index Change 194 4.5.1 Density and Temperature Dependence of Refractive Index 195 4.5.2 Population Dependence on Refractive Index 199 4.5.3 Soret Effect 200 4.5.4 Other Factors Affecting Refractive Index 203 4.6 Temperature Change and Thermoelastic Displacement from Top-hat Excitation Sources 204 4.6.1 Temperature Change from Top-hat Excitation Sources 204 4.6.2 Thermoelastic Displacement from Top-hat Excitation Sources 205 4.7 Limitations 206 4.7.1 Excitation Beam Waist Radius Changes 207 4.7.2 Effects of Scattering and Optically Thick Samples 208 4.7.3 Finite Extent Sample Effects 210 4.7.4 Accounting for Finite Cell Radius 211 References 215 5 Photothermal Spectroscopy in Homogeneous Samples 219 5.1 Photothermal Interferometry 219 5.2 Photothermal Deflection 224 5.2.1 Deflection Angle for Pulsed Laser Excitation 224 5.2.1.1 Collinear Probe Geometry 224 5.2.1.2 Crossed-beam Probe Geometry 226 5.2.2 Deflection Angle for Continuous and Chopped Laser Excitation 227 5.2.2.1 Continuous Excitation with Parallel Probe Geometry 227 5.2.2.2 Continuous Excitation with Crossed-probe Geometry 230 5.2.2.3 Chopped Excitation with Parallel Probe 230 5.2.3 Deflection Angle Detection 231 5.2.3.1 Probe Laser Beam Waist Effect 231 5.2.3.2 Straightedge Apparatus 234 5.2.3.3 Position Sensing Detectors 235 5.2.3.4 Other Methods to Detect Deflection Angle 236 5.2.3.5 Differential Deflection Angle 238 5.3 Thermal Lens Focal Length 239 5.3.1 Pulsed Excitation Thermal Lens Focal Length 239 5.3.1.1 Time-dependent Focal Length 239 5.3.1.2 Sample Path Length Limitations 240 5.3.1.3 Crossed-beam Arrangement 242 5.3.2 Continuous and Chopped Excitation Thermal Lens Focal Length 243 5.3.2.1 Continuous Excitation 243 5.3.2.2 Sample Path Length Limitations 243 5.3.2.3 Crossed-beam Geometry 244 5.3.2.4 Chopped Excitation 245 5.3.3 Focal Length for Periodic Excitation 245 5.4 Detecting the Thermal Lens 248 5.4.1 Signal for Symmetric Lens 248 5.4.2 Signal for Different x and y Focal Lengths 250 5.4.3 Lock-in Amplifier or Pulse Height Detected Signal 253 5.4.4 Signal Development with Large Apertures 254 5.4.5 Signal Development Based on Image Analysis and Other Optical Filters 255 5.5 Types of Photothermal Lens Apparatuses 258 5.5.1 Single-laser Apparatus 258 5.5.2 Differential Single-laser Apparatus 260 5.5.3 Two-laser Apparatus 261 5.6 Two-laser Photothermal Lens Spectroscopy 267 5.6.1 Excitation Wavelength Dependence in Two-laser Photothermal Spectroscopy 268 5.7 Differential Two-laser Apparatuses 269 5.8 Diffraction Effects 271 5.8.1 Probe Laser Diffraction Effects for Pulsed Excitation 272 5.8.2 Probe Laser Diffraction Effects for Continuous Excitation 278 5.8.3 Diffraction Effects for Single-laser Photothermal Lens 281 5.8.4 Effect of Diffraction on the Thermal Lens Enhancement Factor 281 References 283 6 Analytical Measurement and Data Processing Considerations 285 6.1 Sensitivity of Photothermal Spectroscopy 286 6.1.1 Photothermal Lens Enhancement Factors 286 6.1.2 Relative Sensitivity of Photothermal Lens and Deflection Spectroscopies 291 6.1.3 Relative Sensitivity of Photothermal Lens and Photothermal Interferometry Spectroscopies 292 6.1.4 Relating Photothermal Signals to Absorbance and Enhancement 295 6.1.5 Intrinsic Enhancement of Two-Laser Methods 295 6.1.6 Enhancement Limitations 297 6.1.7 The Choice of Solvents for Photothermal Lens Measurements 299 6.1.7.1 Aqueous Solutions of Electrolytes 300 6.1.7.2 Aqueous Solutions of Surfactants and Water-Soluble Polymers 302 6.1.7.3 Organo-aqueous Mixtures 303 6.1.7.4 Soret Effect in Mixed Media 305 6.2 Optical Instrumentation for Analysis 306 6.2.1 Dynamic Reserve 306 6.2.2 Differential Measurements 307 6.2.3 Spectroscopic Measurement 310 6.2.4 Fiber Optics 313 6.3 Processing Photothermal Signals 316 6.3.1 Analog Signal Processing 320 6.3.2 Digital Signal Processing 321 6.4 Photothermal Data Processing 326 6.4.1 Excitation Irradiance Curves 327 6.4.2 Calibration 327 6.4.3 Metrological Parameters of Photothermal Lens Spectrometry 329 6.4.3.1 Accuracy of Photothermal Lens Measurements 329 6.4.3.2 Instrumental and Method Detection Limits 329 6.4.3.3 Photothermal Limits of Detection 331 6.4.3.4 Photothermal Error Curves 333 6.5 Considerations for Trace Analysis 336 6.5.1 Unstability of Dilute Solutions 337 6.5.2 Sources of Losses and Contamination 337 6.5.3 Changes in Sensitivity and Selectivity Due to Chemistry at the Trace Level 339 6.5.4 Statistical Features at the Level of Low Concentrations 340 6.6 Tracking Down and Reducing Noise 340 References 342 7 Analytical Applications 347 7.1 Areas of Analytical Application 347 7.2 Applications to Stationary Homogeneous Samples 348 7.2.1 Photothermal Techniques 348 7.2.2 Gas Phase Samples 351 7.2.3 Liquid Samples 361 7.3 Application to Disperse Solutions 364 7.3.1 Nano-sized Particles and Nanocomposite Materials 364 7.3.2 Analysis of Biological Samples 365 7.4 Photothermal Spectroscopy Detection in Chromatography and Flow Analysis 370 7.4.1 Temperature Change in Flowing Samples 371 7.4.2 Deflection Angles and Inverse Focal Lengths in Flowing Samples 373 7.4.2.1 Isotropic and Turbulent Flow 373 7.4.2.2 Laminar Flow 375 7.4.3 Applications in Chromatography 376 7.4.3.1 Gas Chromatography and Flowing Gas Analysis 383 7.4.3.2 Liquid Phase 383 7.4.4 Application to Flow Injection Analysis 385 7.5 Photothermal Spectroscopy Detection in Capillary Electrophoresis 387 7.5.1 Influence of Electrophoretic Flow Rate 389 7.5.2 Effect of the Composition of the Background Electrolyte Solution on the Sensitivity 393 7.5.3 Applications 394 7.6 Photothermal Spectroscopy Detection in Microanalytical and Microfluidic Systems 402 7.7 Determination of Parameters of Reactions 404 7.7.1 Determination of Thermodynamic Parameters and Constants 404 7.7.2 Chemical Reaction Control and Real-time Monitoring 406 7.7.3 Kinetic Parameters of Reactions 406 7.8 Excitation and Relaxation Kinetics 408 7.8.1 Relaxation Kinetics and Quantum Yield Studies 409 7.8.2 Photodynamic Irradiance-dependent Signal Studies 414 7.8.3 Optical Bleaching in Organic Dye Molecules 417 7.8.4 Optical Bleaching Effects in Pulsed Laser Photothermal Spectroscopy 422 References 423 8 Photothermal Spectroscopy of Heterogeneous Samples 435 8.1 Types of Heterogeneity 435 8.2 Apparatuses for Photothermal Deflection 436 8.3 Surface Absorption 437 8.3.1 Thermal Diffusion at Surfaces 437 8.3.2 Temperature Change from Pulsed Excitation 438 8.3.3 Temperature Change from Continuous Excitation 438 8.3.4 Temperature Change from Periodic Excitation 439 8.4 Thermal Diffusion in Volume Absorbing Samples 441 8.4.1 Volume Temperature Change for Pulsed Excitation 441 8.4.2 Periodic Excitation of Volume Absorbers 442 8.5 Temperature Change in Layered Samples 443 8.5.1 Periodic Excitation of Layered Samples 445 8.5.2 Pulsed Excitation of Thick-layered Samples 447 8.6 Surface Point Source 449 8.7 Gaussian Beam Excitation of Surfaces 452 8.8 Gaussian Beam Excitation of Transparent Materials 455 8.9 Excitation of Layered Samples with Gaussian Beams 457 8.10 Deflection Angles with Oscillating Gaussian Excitation 460 8.11 Photothermal Reflection 463 8.12 Experiment Design for Photothermal Deflection 463 8.13 Application to Determination of Solid Material Properties 465 8.13.1 Bulk Properties 466 8.13.1.1 Thermo-optical Properties 468 8.13.1.2 Quantum Yields 469 8.13.2 Solid Surfaces 470 8.14 Applications to Chemical Analysis 471 8.14.1 Application to Surface Determination and Optical Sensing Materials 471 8.14.2 Applications to Gel and Thin-layer Chromatography 472 8.14.3 Other Application to Applied Chemical Analysis 473 8.14.4 Application to Biological Analysis 474 References 476 Index 481

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe updated guide to the fundamental concepts, techniques and applications of synchrotron radiation and its applications in this rapidly developing field Synchrotron light is recognized as an invaluable research tool by a broad spectrum of scientists, ranging from physicists to biologists and archaeologists. The comprehensively revised second edition of An Introduction to Synchrotron Radiation offers a guide to the basic concepts of the generation and manipulation of synchrotron light, its interaction with matter and the application of synchrotron light in x-ray scattering, spectroscopy, and imaging. The author, a noted expert in the field, reviews the fundamentals of important experimental methods, and explores the most recent technological advances in both the latest generation of x-ray sources and x-ray instrumentation. Designed to be an accessible resource, the book contains full-colour illustrations of the underlying physics and experimental aTable of ContentsPreface xiii Acknowledgements xv About the Companion Website xvii 1 Introduction 1 1.1 A Potted History of X-rays 6 1.2 Synchrotron Sources over the Last Seventy Years 13 References 17 2 The Interaction of X-rays with Matter 19 2.1 Introduction 19 2.2 The Electromagnetic Spectrum 21 2.3 Compton Scattering 22 2.4 Thomson Scattering 25 2.5 Atomic Scattering Factors 26 2.5.1 Scattering from a Cloud of Free Electrons 26 2.5.2 Correction Terms for the Atomic Scattering Factor 28 2.6 The Refractive Index, Reflection, and Photoabsorption 32 2.6.1 The Refractive Index 32 2.6.2 Refraction and Reflection 33 2.6.3 Photoabsorption 38 2.7 X-ray Fluorescence and Auger Emission 42 2.7.1 X-ray Fluorescence 42 2.7.2 Auger Emission 45 2.7.3 Fluorescence or Auger? 45 2.8 Concluding Remarks 46 Problems 47 References 49 3 Synchrotron Physics 51 3.1 Introduction 51 3.2 Overview 51 3.3 Production of Light by Acceleration of Charged Particles 55 3.4 Forces Acting on a Charged Particle by Electromagnetic Radiation 57 3.5 Radiation from Relativistic Electrons 58 3.5.1 Synchrotron Radiation 58 3.5.2 Bremsstrahlung 62 3.5.3 Magnetic Deflection Fields 63 3.5.4 Radiated Power Loss in Synchrotrons 65 3.6 Radio-frequency Power Supply and Bunching 66 3.7 Photon-beam Properties 69 3.7.1 Flux and Brilliance 69 3.7.2 Emittance, Radiation Equilibrium, and Quantum Excitation 69 3.7.3 Coherence 73 3.7.4 Polarization of Synchrotron Radiation 76 3.8 The Magnet Lattice 77 3.8.1 Bending Magnets and Superbends 78 3.8.2 Betatron Oscillations and the Dynamic Aperture 80 3.8.3 Quadrupole and Sextupole Magnets 81 3.8.4 Orbit Control and Feedbacks 81 3.8.5 Multiple-bend Achromats and DLSRs 82 3.9 Insertion Devices 86 3.9.1 Wigglers 88 3.9.2 Damping Wigglers 89 3.9.3 Undulators 90 3.9.4 Undulators at DLSRs 97 3.9.5 Echo-enabled Harmonic Generation at DLSRs 99 3.9.6 Control of Polarization using Undulators 100 3.10 Concluding Remarks 101 Problems 103 References 105 4 Free-electron Lasers 107 4.1 Introduction 107 4.2 XFEL Architecture 110 4.3 The SASE Process 112 4.4 Properties of XFEL Beams 117 4.4.1 Tuning the Photon Energy 117 4.4.2 Source Fluctuations 117 4.4.3 Degree of Monochromacity 117 4.5 Seeding 118 4.5.1 High-brilliance SASE using an Array of Short Undulators and Chicanes 119 4.5.2 Self-seeding of Hard XFEL-radiation using Diamond Monochromatization 120 4.6 Radiation Damage and Heat Loads 120 4.6.1 Thermal Loads on Optics 121 4.6.2 Sample Irradiation 122 4.7 XFELs and THz Radiation 123 4.8 Concluding Remarks 124 Problems 124 References 126 5 Beamlines 129 5.1 Introduction 129 5.2 Front End 129 5.2.1 X-ray Beam-position Monitors 129 5.2.2 Primary Aperture and Front-end Slits 131 5.2.3 Low-energy Filters 131 5.3 Basics of X-ray Optics 132 5.3.1 Ray Optics 133 5.3.2 Spherical Surfaces and Aberrations 134 5.3.3 Wave Optics 137 5.4 Primary Optics 142 5.4.1 X-ray Mirrors 143 5.4.2 Monochromators 145 5.4.3 Higher Harmonics 155 5.4.4 Double-crystal Deflectors 158 5.5 Microfocus and Nanofocus Optics 159 5.5.1 Compound Refractive Lenses 160 5.5.2 Tapered Glass Capillaries 162 5.5.3 Fresnel Zone Plates 163 5.5.4 Multilayer Laue Lenses 166 5.6 Beam-intensity Monitors 167 5.7 Detectors 168 5.7.1 Sources of Noise in Detectors 168 5.7.2 Photographic Plates 170 5.7.3 Scintillator Detectors 171 5.7.4 The Point-spread Function 172 5.7.5 Crystal Analysers 172 5.7.6 Image Plates 175 5.7.7 Charge-coupled Devices 175 5.7.8 Pixel and Microstrip Detectors 176 5.7.9 To Integrate or to Count? 180 5.7.10 Energy-dispersive Detectors 181 5.8 Time-resolved Experiments 187 5.8.1 Streak Cameras 187 5.8.2 X-ray Streaking at XFELs 188 5.9 Concluding Remarks 189 Problems 189 References 192 6 Scattering Techniques 195 6.1 Introduction 195 6.2 Diffraction at Synchrotron Sources 197 6.3 Description of Crystals 198 6.3.1 Lattices and Bases 198 6.3.2 Crystal Planes 201 6.3.3 Labelling Crystallographic Planes and Axes 202 6.4 Basic Tenets of X-ray Diffraction 202 6.4.1 Introduction 202 6.4.2 The Bragg Law and Reciprocal Lattice 203 6.4.3 The Influence of the Basis 206 6.4.4 Dynamical Diffraction 209 6.5 Diffraction and the Convolution Theorem 210 6.5.1 The Convolution Theorem 210 6.5.2 Understanding the Structure Factor 212 6.6 The Phase Problem and Anomalous Diffraction 212 6.6.1 Introduction 212 6.6.2 The Patterson Map 214 6.6.3 Friedel’s Law and Bijvoet Mates 215 6.6.4 Anomalous Diffraction 216 6.6.5 Direct Methods 220 6.7 Types of Crystalline Samples 222 6.8 Single Crystal Diffraction 224 6.8.1 Laue Diffraction 224 6.8.2 Single Crystal Diffraction with Monochromatic X-rays 225 6.9 Textured Samples 227 6.10 Powder Diffraction 228 6.10.1 Introduction 228 6.10.2 Basics of Powder Diffraction 229 6.10.3 The Pair-distribution Function 231 6.11 Macromolecular Crystallography 232 6.11.1 Introduction 232 6.11.2 Geometries and Photon Energies used in MX 238 6.11.3 Opportunities for MX at DLSRs 240 6.11.4 Solving the Phase Problem in MX 242 6.11.5 MX Studies at XFELs 256 6.12 Surface Diffraction 258 6.12.1 Introduction 258 6.12.2 Crystal Truncation Rods 259 6.12.3 Superstructure Rods 262 6.12.4 Data Acquisition 262 6.13 Resonant X-ray Scattering 264 6.14 X-ray Reflectometry 267 6.14.1 Introduction 267 6.14.2 Reflection of X-rays and the Fresnel Equations 268 6.14.3 Thin Films and Multilayers 270 6.14.4 XRR Monitoring of Thin Film Growth 273 6.15 Small-angle X-ray Scattering 275 6.15.1 Introduction 275 6.15.2 Theory 276 6.15.3 Practical Considerations 288 6.15.4 Grazing Incidence SAXS 289 6.16 Concluding Remarks 290 Problems 291 References 297 7 Spectroscopic Techniques 303 7.1 Introduction 303 7.2 X-ray Absorption Processes 305 7.2.1 Energy-level Schemes of Atoms, Molecules, and Solids 307 7.2.2 Absorption Features 309 7.3 Photoelectron Energies, Wavelengths, and Absorption Regions 310 7.3.1 The Universal Curve 311 7.3.2 𝜎- and 𝜋-polarizations 312 7.4 X-ray Absorption Near-edge Structure, XANES 314 7.4.1 Introduction 314 7.4.2 The XANES Signal 315 7.5 Extended X-ray Absorption Fine Structure, EXAFS 318 7.5.1 Introduction 318 7.5.2 The EXAFS Signal 319 7.5.3 Time-resolved Absorption Spectroscopy 324 7.6 Fluorescence Spectroscopies 327 7.6.1 Introduction 327 7.6.2 X-ray Fluorescence 327 7.6.3 Resonant Inelastic X-ray Scattering 327 7.6.4 X-ray Standing Waves 331 7.7 Scanning Transmission X-ray Microscopy, STXM 333 7.7.1 Introduction 333 7.7.2 The Water Window 333 7.7.3 Modes in STXM 335 7.8 Photoemission Electron Microscopy, PEEM 335 7.8.1 Basics of PEEM 335 7.8.2 PEEM and Magnetic Dichroism 338 7.9 Photoemission Spectroscopy 341 7.9.1 Introduction 341 7.9.2 Ultraviolet Photoemission Spectroscopy 343 7.9.3 Soft X-ray ARPES 353 7.9.4 X-ray Photoelectron Spectroscopy 355 7.9.5 Hard X-ray Photoelectron Spectroscopy 358 7.10 Concluding Remarks 359 Problems 360 References 363 8 Imaging Techniques 367 8.1 Introduction 367 8.2 X-ray Computed Microtomography 368 8.2.1 Introduction 368 8.2.2 General Concepts 370 8.2.3 Practical Considerations 374 8.2.4 Phase-contrast Tomography 375 8.2.5 Fast XTM 383 8.2.6 Laminography 384 8.3 Full-field Microscopy 385 8.3.1 Zernike X-ray Microscopy 385 8.4 Lensless Imaging 387 8.4.1 Introduction 387 8.4.2 Speckle 389 8.4.3 Noncrystalline and Crystalline Samples 390 8.4.4 Oversampling and Redundancy 392 8.4.5 Ptychography 393 8.4.6 Scanning SAXS and Small-angle Scattering Tensor Tomography 395 8.4.7 X-ray Photon Correlation Spectroscopy 395 8.5 Concluding Remarks 397 Problems 398 References 400 Appendices A Cryogenic Electron Microscopy 403 B Some Helpful Mathematical Relations and Approximations 409 C Fourier Series and Fourier Transforms Made Simple 411 C.1 Introductory Remarks 411 C.2 Periodic Functions 413 C.3 From Fourier Series to Fourier Transforms 415 C.4 Mathematical Properties of Fourier Transforms 417 D Argand Diagrams and the Complex Plane 419 E Solutions to Problems 423 E.2 Chapter 2 – The Interaction of X-rays with Matter 423 E.3 Chapter 3 – Synchrotron Physics 428 E.4 Chapter 4 – Free-electron Lasers 436 E.5 Chapter 5 – Beamlines 439 E.6 Chapter 6 – Scattering Techniques 446 E.7 Chapter 7 – Spectroscopic Techniques 459 E.8 Chapter 8 – Imaging Techniques 464 F Glossary 469 G Physical Constants Relevant to Synchrotron Radiation 473 Index 475

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book discusses new developments in an up-to-date, coherent and objective set of chapters by eminent researchers in the area of polypropylene-based biocomposites and bionanocomposites. It covers, biomaterials such as cellulose, chitin, starch, soy protein, hemicelluloses, polylactic acid and polyhydroxyalkanoates. Other important topics such as hybrid biocomposites and bionanocomposites of polypropylene, biodegradation study of polypropylene-based biocomposites and bionanocomposites, polypropylene-based bionanocomposites for packaging applications, polypropylene-based carbon nanomaterials reinforced nanocomposites, degradation and flame retardency of polypropylene-based composites and nanocomposites, are covered as well.Table of ContentsPreface xiii 1 Polypropylene (PP)-Based Biocomposites and Bionanocomposites: State-of-the-Art, New Challenges and Opportunities 1Visakh. P. M 1.1 Polypropylene (PP)/Cellulose-Based Biocomposites and Bionanocomposites 1 1.2 Polypropylene (PP)/Starch-Based Biocomposites and Bionanocomposites 3 1.3 Polypropylene (PP)/Polylactic Acid-Based Biocomposites and Bionanocomposites 5 1.4 Polypropylene (PP)-Based Hybrid Biocomposites and Bionanocomposites 6 1.5 Biodegradation and Flame Retardancy of Polypropylene-Based Composites and Nanocomposites 7 1.6 Polypropylene Single-Polymer Composites 9 1.7 Polypropylene/Plant-Based Fiber Biocomposites and Bionanocomposites 10 1.8 Polypropylene Composite with Oil Palm Fibers: Method Development, Properties and Application 12 1.9 Interfacial Modification of Polypropylene-Based Biocomposites and Bionanocomposites 13 References 14 2 Polypropylene (PP)/Cellulose-Based Biocomposites and Bionanocomposites 23Md. Minhaz-Ul Haque 2.1 Introduction 23 2.2 PP/Cellulose-Based Biocomposites and Bionanocomposites 24 2.3 Conclusion 46 References 47 3 Polypropylene (PP)/Starch-Based Biocomposites and Bionanocomposites 55Saviour A. Umoren and Moses M. Solomon 3.1 Introduction 55 3.2 PP/Starch Biocomposites and Bionanocomposites 57 3.3 Conclusion 79 References 79 4 Polypropylene (PP)/Polylactic Acid-Based Biocomposites and Bionanocomposites 85Xin Wang 4.1 Introduction 85 4.2 PP/PLA-Based Biocomposites and Bionanocomposites 87 4.3 Conclusion 107 References 108 5 Polypropylene (PP)-Based Hybrid Biocomposites and Bionanocomposites 113Svetlana Butylina 5.1 Introduction 113 5.2 Polypropylene-Based Hybrid Biocomposites and Bionanocomposites 116 5.3 Conclusion 141 References 141 6 Biodegradation and Flame Retardancy of Polypropylene-Based Composites and Nanocomposites 145S. Butylina and I. Turku 6.1 Biodegradability of PP-Based Biocomposites and Bionanocomposites 146 6.2 Flame Retardancy of Polypropylene-Based Composites and Nanocomposites 154 6.3 Conclusions 171 References 171 7 Polypropylene Single-Polymer Composites 177Jian Wang 7.1 Introduction 177 7.2 Preparation Principles for PP SPCs 180 7.3 Processing Methods and Properties of PP SPCs 187 7.4 Applications 235 7.5 Summary 239 Acknowledgments 242 References 242 8 Polypropylene/Plant-Based Fiber Biocomposites and Bionanocomposites 247Amir Ghasemi, Ehsan Pesaran Haji Abbas, Leila Farhang and Reza Bagheri 8.1 Introduction 247 8.2 Types of Natural Fibers 248 8.3 Processing of PP/Plant-Based Fiber Biocomposites and Bionanocomposites 252 8.4 Characterization and Properties of Plant-Based Fiber Reinforced Polypropylene Biocomposites and Bionanocomposites 256 8.5 Applications of Plant-Based Fiber Reinforced Polypropylene Biocomposites and Bionanocomposites 267 8.6 Future Perspectives and the Global Market 274 8.7 Conclusion 275 References 276 9 Polypropylene Composite with Oil Palm Fibers: Method Development, Properties and Applications 287Muhammad Shahid Nazir, Mohd Azmuddin Abdullah and Muhammad Rafi Raza 9.1 Introduction 288 9.2 Method Development 289 9.3 Composite Properties 301 9.4 Applications 305 9.5 The Way Forward 309 References 310 10 Interfacial Modification of Polypropylene-Based Biocomposites and Bionanocomposites 315Yekta Karaduman and Nesrin Sahbaz Karaduman 10.1 Introduction 316 10.2 Natural Fibers 317 10.3 Fiber-Matrix Interface 320 10.4 Interfacial Modification of PP-Based Biocomposites and Bionanocomposites 327 10.5 Conclusions and Future Trends 342 References 343 Index 000

Read more less

Book SynopsisA comprehensive overview of managing and assessing safety and functionality of ageing offshore structures and pipelines A significant proportion, estimated at over 50%, of the worldwide infrastructure of offshore structures and pipelines is in a life extension phase and is vulnerable to ageing processes. This book captures the central elements of the management of ageing offshore structures and pipelines in the life extension phase. The book gives an overview of: the relevant ageing processes and hazards; how ageing processes are managed through the life cycle, including an overview of structural integrity management; how an engineer should go about assessing a structure that is to be operated beyond its original design life, and how ageing can be mitigated for safe and effective continued operation. Key Features: Provides an understanding of ageing processes and how these can be mitigated. Applies engineering methods to ensure that existinTable of ContentsPreface xi Definitions xiii 1 Introduction to Ageing of Structures 1 1.1 Structural Engineering and Ageing Structures 1 1.2 History of Offshore Structures Worldwide 4 1.3 Failure Statistics for Ageing Offshore Structures 8 1.3.1 Introduction 8 1.3.2 Failure Statistics of Offshore Structures 8 1.3.3 Experience from Land Based Structures 9 1.3.4 Experience from Offshore Fixed Steel Structures 10 1.3.5 Experience from the Shipping and Mobile Offshore Unit Industries 14 1.4 The Terms ‘Design Life’ and ‘Life Extension’ and the Bathtub Curve 15 1.5 Life Extension Assessment Process 18 References 20 2 Historic and Present Principles for Design, Assessment and Maintenance of Offshore Structures 23 2.1 Historic Development of Codes and Recommended Practices 23 2.1.1 US Recommended Practices and Codes 23 2.1.2 UK Department of Energy and HSE Guidance Notes 24 2.1.3 Norwegian Standards 26 2.1.4 ISO Standards 27 2.2 Current Safety Principles Applicable to Structural Integrity 28 2.2.1 Introduction 28 2.2.2 Application of Safety Principles to Structures 29 2.2.2.1 General 29 2.2.2.2 Partial Factor and Limit State Design Method 30 2.2.2.3 Robustness 32 2.2.2.4 Design Analysis Methods 34 2.2.2.5 Management of Structures in Operation 35 2.2.3 Managing Safety 35 2.2.4 Change Management 38 2.3 Current Regulation and Requirements for Ageing and Life Extension 38 2.3.1 Regulatory Practice in the UK for Ageing and Life Extension 38 2.3.2 Regulatory Practice in Norway Regarding Life Extension 40 2.3.3 Regulatory Practice in the USA 41 2.3.4 Regulatory Practice Elsewhere in the World 42 2.4 Structural Integrity Management 43 2.4.1 Introduction 43 2.4.2 The Main Process of Structural Integrity Management 45 2.4.3 Evolution of Structural Integrity Management 47 2.4.3.1 The Early Years 47 2.4.3.2 The Introduction of Structural Integrity Management into Standards 47 2.4.4 Current SIM Approach 47 2.4.5 Incident Response and Emergency Preparedness 51 2.4.6 SIM in Life Extension 52 References 53 3 Ageing Factors 57 3.1 Introduction 57 3.1.1 Physical Changes 59 3.1.2 Structural Information Changes 59 3.1.3 Changes to Knowledge and Safety Requirements 60 3.1.4 Technological Changes 61 3.2 Overview of Physical Degradation Mechanisms in Materials 62 3.3 Material Degradation 63 3.3.1 Introduction 63 3.3.2 Overview of Physical Degradation for Types of Steel Structures 64 3.3.3 Steel Degradation 65 3.3.3.1 Hardening Due to Plastic Deformation 65 3.3.3.2 Hydrogen Embrittlement 66 3.3.3.3 Erosion 68 3.3.3.4 Wear and Tear 68 3.3.4 Concrete Degradation 68 3.3.4.1 Concrete Strength in Ageing Structures 68 3.3.4.2 General 70 3.3.4.3 Bacterial Induced Deterioration 71 3.3.4.4 Thermal Effects 72 3.3.4.5 Erosion 72 3.4 Corrosion 73 3.4.1 General 73 3.4.2 External Corrosion 73 3.4.3 Various Forms of Corrosion 74 3.4.3.1 CO2 Corrosion 74 3.4.3.2 Environmental Cracking Due to H2S 74 3.4.3.3 Microbiologically Induced Corrosion 74 3.4.4 Special Issues Related to Corrosion in Hulls and Ballast Tanks 75 3.4.5 Concrete Structures 75 3.4.5.1 Corrosion of Steel Reinforcement 75 3.4.5.2 Corrosion of Prestressing Tendons 77 3.5 Fatigue 77 3.5.1 Introduction 77 3.5.2 Factors Influencing Fatigue 80 3.5.3 Implications of Fatigue Damage 81 3.5.4 Fatigue Issues with High Strength Steels 83 3.5.5 Fatigue Research 84 3.6 Load Changes 85 3.6.1 Marine Growth 85 3.6.2 Subsidence andWave in Deck 86 3.7 Dents, Damages, and Other Geometrical Changes 86 3.8 Non-physical Ageing Changes 88 3.8.1 Technological Changes (Obsolescence) 88 3.8.2 Structural Information Changes 89 3.8.3 Knowledge and Safety Requirement Changes 90 References 91 4 Assessment of Ageing and Life Extension 95 4.1 Introduction 95 4.1.1 Assessment versus Design Analysis 96 4.2 Assessment Procedures 97 4.2.1 Introduction 97 4.2.2 Brief Overview of ISO 19902 99 4.2.3 Brief Overview of NORSOK N-006 101 4.2.4 Brief Overview of API RP 2A-WSD 102 4.2.5 Brief Overview of ISO 13822 102 4.2.6 Discussion of These Standards 103 4.3 Assessment of Ageing Materials 104 4.4 Strength Analysis 107 4.4.1 Introduction 107 4.4.2 Strength and Capacity of Damaged Steel Structural Members 108 4.4.2.1 Effect of Metal Loss andWall Thinning 109 4.4.2.2 Effect of Cracking and Removal of Part of Section 110 4.4.2.3 Effect of Changes to Material Properties 110 4.4.2.4 Effect of Geometric Changes 110 4.4.2.5 Methods for Calculating the Capacity of Degraded Steel Members 110 4.4.3 Strength and Capacity of Damaged Concrete Structural Members 111 4.4.4 Non-Linear Analysis of Jacket of Structures (Push-Over Analysis) 113 4.5 Fatigue Analysis and the S–N Approach 115 4.5.1 Introduction 115 4.5.2 Methods for Fatigue Analysis 116 4.5.3 S–N Fatigue Analysis 117 4.5.3.1 Fatigue Loads and Stresses to be Considered 117 4.5.3.2 Fatigue Capacity Based on S–N Curves 119 4.5.3.3 Damage Calculation 121 4.5.3.4 Safety consideration by Design Fatigue Factors 122 4.5.4 Assessment of Fatigue for Life Extension 122 4.5.4.1 Introduction 122 4.5.4.2 High Cycle/Low Stress Fatigue 123 4.5.4.3 Low Cycle/High Stress Fatigue 124 4.6 FractureMechanics Assessment 126 4.6.1 Introduction 126 4.6.2 Fatigue Crack Growth Analysis 128 4.6.3 Fracture Assessment 131 4.6.4 Fracture Toughness Data 132 4.6.5 Residual Stress Distribution 132 4.6.6 Application of Fracture Mechanics to Life Extension 132 4.7 Probabilistic Strength, Fatigue, and Fracture Mechanics 134 4.7.1 Introduction 134 4.7.2 Structural Reliability Analysis – Overview 135 4.7.3 Decision Making Based on Structural Reliability Analysis 136 4.7.4 Assessment of Existing Structures by Structural Reliability Analysis 138 References 139 5 Inspection and Mitigation of Ageing Structures 143 5.1 Introduction 143 5.2 Inspection 144 5.2.1 Introduction 144 5.2.2 The Inspection Process 145 5.2.3 Inspection Philosophies 147 5.2.4 Risk and Probabilistic Based Inspection Planning 148 5.2.5 Inspection of Fixed Jacket Structures 150 5.2.6 Inspection of Floating Structures 154 5.2.7 Inspection of Topside Structures 155 5.2.8 Structural Monitoring 158 5.3 Evaluation of Inspection Findings 160 5.4 Mitigation of Damaged Structures 161 5.4.1 Introduction 161 5.4.2 Mitigation of Corrosion Damage 163 5.4.3 Mitigation of the Corrosion Protection System 163 5.4.4 Mitigation of Fatigue and Other Damage 166 5.5 Performance of Repaired Structures 168 5.5.1 Introduction 168 5.5.2 Fatigue Performance of Repaired Tubular Joints 168 5.5.3 Fatigue Performance of Repaired Plated Structures 170 References 171 6 Summary and Further Thoughts 173 6.1 Ageing Structures and Life Extension 173 6.2 FurtherWork and Research Needs Related to Ageing Structures 174 6.3 Final Thoughts 176 A Types of Structures 177 A.1 Fixed Platforms 177 A.2 Floating Structures 177 Reference 179 B InspectionMethods 181 B.1 General Visual Inspection 181 B.2 Close Visual Inspection 181 B.3 FloodedMember Detection 181 B.4 Ultrasonic Testing 182 B.5 Eddy Current Inspection 182 B.6 Magnetic Particle Inspection 182 B.7 Alternating Current Potential Drop 182 B.8 Alternating Current Field Measurement 182 B.9 Acoustic Emission Monitoring 183 B.10 Leak Detection 183 B.11 Air Gap Monitoring 183 B.12 Strain Monitoring 183 B.13 Structural Monitoring 184 C Calculation Examples 185 C.1 Example of Closed Form Fatigue Calculation 185 C.2 Example of Application of Fracture Mechanics to Life Extension 186 Index 191

Read more less

Book SynopsisKaminski-Jensen is the first text to bring together thermodynamics, fluid mechanics, and heat transfer in an integrated manner, giving students the fullest possible understanding of their interconnectedness. The three topics are introduced early in the text, allowing for applications across these areas early in the course. Class-tested for two years to more than 800 students at Rensselaer, the text's novel approach has received national attention for its demonstrable success.Table of ContentsChapter 1. Introduction to Thermal and Fluids Engineering. Chapter 2. The First Law. Chapter 3. Thermal Resistances. Chapter 4. Fundamentals of Fluid Mechanics. Chapter 5. Thermodynamic Properties. Chapter 6. Appications of the Energy Equation to Open Systems. Chapter 7. Thermodynamic Cycles and the Second Law. Chapter 8. Refrigeration, Heat Pump, and Power Cycles. Chapter 9. Internal Flows. Chapter 10. External Flows. Chapter 11. Conduction Heat Transfer. Chapter 12. Convection Heat Transfer. Chapter 13. Heat Exchangers. Chapter 14. Radiation Heat Transfer. Chapter 15. Ideal Gas Mixtures and Combustion (Web). Appendix A: Tables in SI Units. Appendix B: Tables in British Units. Appendix C: Answers to Selected Problems. Index.

Read more less

Book SynopsisA guide to lithium sulfur batteries that explores their materials, electrochemical mechanisms and modelling and includes recent scientific developments Lithium Sulfur Batteries (Li-S) offers a comprehensive examination of Li-S batteries from the viewpoint of the materials used in their construction, the underlying electrochemical mechanisms and how this translates into the characteristics of Li-S batteries. The authors noted experts in the field outline the approaches and techniques required to model Li-S batteries. Lithium Sulfur Batteries reviews the application of Li-S batteries for commercial use and explores many broader issues including the development of battery management systems to control the unique characteristics of Li-S batteries. The authors include information onsulfur cathodes, electrolytes and other components used in making Li-S batteries and examine the role of lithium sulfide, the shuttle mechanism and its effects, and degradaTable of ContentsPreface xiii Part I Materials 1 1 Electrochemical Theory and Physics 3Geraint Minton 1.1 Overview of a LiS cell 3 1.2 The Development of the Cell Voltage 5 1.2.1 Using the Electrochemical Potential 7 1.2.2 Electrochemical Reactions 10 1.2.3 The Electric Double Layer 13 1.2.4 Reaction Equilibrium 15 1.2.5 A Finite Electrolyte 17 1.2.6 The Need for a Second Electrode 17 1.3 Allowing a Current to Flow 19 1.3.1 The Reaction Overpotential 20 1.3.2 The Transport Overpotential 21 1.3.3 General Comments on the Overpotentials 22 1.4 Additional Processes Which Define the Behavior of a LiS Cell 22 1.4.1 Multiple Electrochemical Reactions at One Surface 22 1.4.2 Chemical Reactions 23 1.4.3 Species Solubility and Indirect Reaction Effects 25 1.4.4 Transport Limitations in the Cathode 25 1.4.5 The Active Surface Area 26 1.4.6 Precipitate Accumulation 27 1.4.7 Electrolyte Viscosity, Conductivity, and Species Transport 27 1.4.8 Side Reactions and SEI Formation at the Anode 28 1.4.9 Anode Morphological Changes 29 1.4.10 Polysulfide Shuttle 29 1.5 Summary 30 References 30 2 Sulfur Cathodes 33Holger Althues, Susanne Dörfler, Sören Thieme, Patrick Strubel and Stefan Kaskel 2.1 Cathode Design Criteria 33 2.1.1 Overview of Cathode Components and Composition 33 2.1.2 Cathode Design: Role of Electrolyte in Sulfur Cathode Chemistry 34 2.1.3 Cathode Design: Impact on Energy Density on Cell Level 35 2.1.4 Cathode Design: Impact on Cycle Life and Self-discharge 36 2.1.5 Cathode Design: Impact on Rate Capability 37 2.2 Cathode Materials 37 2.2.1 Properties of Sulfur 37 2.2.2 Porous and Nanostructured Carbons as Conductive Cathode Scaffolds 39 2.2.2.1 Graphite-Like Carbons 39 2.2.2.2 Synthesis of Graphite-like Carbons 39 2.2.2.3 Carbon Black 40 2.2.2.4 Activated Carbons 41 2.2.2.5 Carbide-Derived Carbon 42 2.2.2.6 Hard-Template-Assisted Carbon Synthesis 42 2.2.2.7 Carbon Surface Chemistry 43 2.2.3 Carbon/Sulfur Composite Cathodes 43 2.2.3.1 Microporous Carbons 44 2.2.3.2 Mesoporous Carbons 45 2.2.3.3 Macroporous Carbons and Nanotube–based Cathode Systems 46 2.2.3.4 Hierarchical Mesoporous Carbons 47 2.2.3.5 Hierarchical Microporous Carbons 49 2.2.3.6 Hollow Carbon Spheres 50 2.2.3.7 Graphene 51 2.2.4 Retention of LiPS by Surface Modifications and Coating 51 2.2.4.1 Metal Oxides as Adsorbents for Lithium Polysulfides 56 2.3 Cathode Processing 57 2.3.1 Methods for C/S Composite Preparation 57 2.3.2 Wet (Organic, Aqueous) and Dry Coating for Cathode Production 58 2.3.3 Alternative Cathode Support Concepts (Carbon Current Collectors, Binder-free Electrodes) 59 2.3.4 Processing Perspective for Carbons, Binders, and Additives 59 2.4 Conclusions 59 References 61 3 Electrolyte for Lithium–Sulfur Batteries 71Marzieh Barghamadi, Mustafa Musameh, Thomas Rüther, Anand I. Bhatt, Anthony F. Hollenkamp and Adam S. Best 3.1 The Case for Better Batteries 71 3.2 Li–S Battery: Origins and Principles 72 3.3 Solubility of Species and Electrochemistry 74 3.4 Liquid Electrolyte Solutions 75 3.5 Modified Liquid Electrolyte Solutions 91 3.5.1 Variation in Electrolyte Salt Concentration 91 3.5.2 Mixed Organic–Ionic Liquid Electrolyte Solutions 91 3.5.3 Ionic Liquid Electrolyte Solutions 93 3.6 Solid and Solidified Electrolyte Configurations 96 3.6.1 Polymer Electrolytes 96 3.6.1.1 Absorbed Liquid/Gelled Electrolyte 96 3.6.1.2 Solid Polymer Electrolytes 98 3.6.2 Non-polymer Solid Electrolytes 100 3.7 Challenges of the Cathode and Solvent for Device Engineering 102 3.7.1 The Cathode Loading Challenge 102 3.7.2 Cathode Wetting Challenge 104 3.8 Concluding Remarks and Outlook 108 References 111 4 Anode–Electrolyte Interface 121Mark Wild 4.1 Introduction 121 4.2 SEI Formation 121 4.3 Anode Morphology 122 4.4 Polysulfide Shuttle 123 4.5 Electrolyte Additives for Stable SEI Formation 123 4.6 Barrier Layers on the Anode 125 4.7 A Systemic Approach 126 References 126 Part II Mechanisms 129 Reference 131 5 Molecular Level Understanding of the Interactions Between Reaction Intermediates of Li–S Energy Storage Systems and Ether Solvents 133Rajeev S. Assary and Larry A. Curtiss 5.1 Introduction 133 5.2 Computational Details 135 5.3 Results and Discussions 135 5.3.1 Reactivity of Li–S Intermediates with Dimethoxy Ethane (DME) 136 5.3.2 Kinetic Stability of Ethers in the Presence of Lithium Polysulfide 138 5.3.3 Linear Fluorinated Ethers 140 5.4 Summary and Conclusions 144 Acknowledgments 144 References 144 6 Lithium Sulfide 147Sylwia Walu´s 6.1 Introduction 147 6.2 Li2S as the End Discharge Product 148 6.2.1 General 148 6.2.2 Discharge Product: Li2S or Li2S2/Li2S? 151 6.2.3 A Survey of Experimental andTheoretical Findings Involving Li2S and Li2S2 Formation and Proposed Reduction Pathways 153 6.2.4 Mechanistic Insight into Li2S/Li2S2 Nucleation and Growth 157 6.2.5 Strategies to Limit Li2S Precipitation and Enhance the Capacity 160 6.2.6 Charge Mechanism and its Difficulties 161 6.3 Li2S-Based Cathodes: Toward a Li Ion System 164 6.3.1 General 164 6.3.2 Initial Activation of Li2S – Mechanism of First Charge 165 6.3.3 Recent Developments in Li2S Cathodes for Improved Performances 171 6.4 Summary 176 References 176 7 Degradation in Lithium–Sulfur Batteries 185Rajlakshmi Purkayastha 7.1 Introduction 185 7.2 Degradation Processes Within a Lithium–Sulfur Cell 190 7.2.1 Degradation at Cathode 190 7.2.2 Degradation at Anode 194 7.2.3 Degradation in Electrolyte 197 7.2.4 Degradation Due to Operating Conditions: Temperature, C-Rates, and Pressure 200 7.2.5 Degradation Due to Geometry: Scale-Up and Topology 205 7.3 Capacity Fade Models 209 7.3.1 Dendrite Models 211 7.3.2 Equivalent Circuit Network Models 213 7.4 Methods of Detecting and Measuring Degradation 214 7.4.1 Incremental Capacity Analysis 215 7.4.2 Differential Thermal Voltammetry 215 7.4.3 Electrochemical Impedance Spectroscopy 215 7.4.4 Resistance Curves 216 7.4.5 Macroscopic Indicators 217 7.5 Methods for Countering Degradation 218 7.6 Future Direction 221 References 222 Part III Modeling 227 8 Lithium–Sulfur Model Development 229Teng Zhang, Monica Marinescu and Gregory J. Offer 8.1 Introduction 229 8.2 Zero-Dimensional Model 231 8.2.1 Model Formulation 231 8.2.1.1 Electrochemical Reactions 231 8.2.1.2 Shuttle and Precipitation 232 8.2.1.3 Time Evolution of Species 233 8.2.1.4 Model Implementation 233 8.2.2 Basic Charge/Discharge Behaviors 233 8.3 Modeling Voltage Loss in Li–S Cells 236 8.3.1 Electrolyte Resistance 237 8.3.2 Anode Potential 238 8.3.3 Surface Passivation 239 8.3.4 Transport Limitation 240 8.4 Higher Dimensional Models 242 8.4.1 One-Dimensional Models 242 8.4.2 Multi-Scale Models 244 8.5 Summary 245 References 246 9 Battery Management Systems – State Estimation for Lithium–Sulfur Batteries 249Daniel J. Auger, Abbas Fotouhi, Karsten Propp and Stefano Longo 9.1 Motivation 249 9.1.1 Capacity 249 9.1.2 State of Charge (SoC) 251 9.1.3 State of Health (SoH) 251 9.1.4 Limitations of Existing Battery State Estimation Techniques 252 9.1.4.1 SoC Estimation from “Coulomb Counting” 252 9.1.4.2 SoC Estimation from Open-Circuit Voltage (OCV) 253 9.1.5 Direction of Current Work 253 9.2 Experimental Environment for Li–S Algorithm Development 254 9.2.1 Pulse Discharge Tests 255 9.2.2 Driving Cycle Tests 255 9.3 State Estimation Techniques from Control Theory 256 9.3.1 Electrochemical Models 257 9.3.2 Equivalent Circuit Network (ECN) Models 258 9.3.3 Kalman Filters and Their Derivatives 259 9.4 State Estimation Techniques from Computer Science 261 9.4.1 ANFIS as a Modeling Tool 261 9.4.2 Human Knowledge and Fuzzy Inference Systems (FIS) 263 9.4.3 Adaptive Neuro-Fuzzy Inference Systems 266 9.4.4 State-of-Charge Estimation Using ANFIS 268 9.5 Conclusions and Further Directions 269 Acknowledgments 270 References 270 Part IV Application 273 10 Commercial Markets for Li–S 275Mark Crittenden 10.1 Technology Strengths Meet Market Needs 275 10.1.1 Weight 275 10.1.2 Safety 276 10.1.3 Cost 276 10.1.4 Temperature Tolerance 276 10.1.5 Shipment and Storage 277 10.1.6 Power Characteristics 277 10.1.7 Environmentally Friendly Technology (Clean Tech) 278 10.1.8 Pressure Tolerance 278 10.1.9 Control 278 10.2 Electric Aircraft 278 10.3 Satellites 280 10.4 Cars 280 10.5 Buses 282 10.6 Trucks 283 10.7 Electric Scooter and Electric Bikes 284 10.8 Marine 285 10.9 Energy Storage 285 10.10 Low-Temperature Applications 286 10.11 Defense 286 10.12 Looking Ahead 286 10.13 Conclusion 287 11 Battery Engineering 289Gregory J. Offer 11.1 Mechanical Considerations 289 11.2 Thermal and Electrical Considerations 289 References 292 12 Case Study 293Paul Brooks 12.1 Introduction 293 12.2 A Potted History of Eternal Solar Flight 293 12.3 Why Has It Been So Difficult? 295 12.4 Objectives of HALE UAV 297 12.4.1 Stay Above the Cloud 298 12.4.2 Stay Above the Wind 298 12.4.3 Stay in the Sun 299 12.4.4 Year-Round Markets 300 12.4.5 Seasonal Markets 303 12.4.6 How Valuable Are These Markets and What Does That Mean for the Battery? 303 12.5 Worked Example – HALE UAV 303 12.6 Cells, Batteries, and Real Life 305 12.6.1 Cycle Life, Charge, and Discharge Rates 305 12.6.2 Payload 306 12.6.3 Avionics 306 12.6.4 Temperature 306 12.6.5 End-of-Life Performance 306 12.6.6 Protection 306 12.6.7 Balancing – Useful Capacity 307 12.6.8 Summary of Real-World Issues 307 12.7 A Quick Aside on Regenerative Fuel Cells 308 12.8 So What Do We Need from Our Battery Suppliers? 309 12.9 The Challenges for Battery Developers 310 12.10 The Answer to the Title 310 12.11 Summary 310 Acknowledgments 311 References 311 Index 313

Read more less

Book Synopsis

Read more less

Book SynopsisSystematically discusses the growth method, material properties, and applications for key semiconductor materials MOVPE is a chemical vapor deposition technique that produces single or polycrystalline thin films. As one of the key epitaxial growth technologies, it produces layers that form the basis of many optoelectronic components including mobile phone components (GaAs), semiconductor lasers and LEDs (III-Vs, nitrides), optical communications (oxides), infrared detectors, photovoltaics (II-IV materials), etc. Featuring contributions by an international group of academics and industrialists, this book looks at the fundamentals of MOVPE and the key areas of equipment/safety, precursor chemicals, and growth monitoring. It covers the most important materials from III-V and II-VI compounds to quantum dots and nanowires, including sulfides and selenides and oxides/ceramics. Sections in every chapter of Metalorganic Vapor Phase Epitaxy (MOVPE): Growth, Materials Table of ContentsList of Contributors xv Foreword xvii Series Preface xix Preface xxi Safety and Environment Disclaimer xxiii 1 Introduction to Metalorganic Vapor Phase Epitaxy 1S.J.C. Irvine and P. Capper 1.1 Historical Background of MOVPE 1 1.2 Basic Reaction Mechanisms 4 1.3 Precursors 8 1.4 Types of Reactor Cell 9 1.5 Introduction to Applications of MOVPE 11 1.5.1 AlN for UV Emitters 11 1.5.2 GaAs/AlGaAs VCSELS 11 1.5.3 Multijunction Solar Cells 12 1.5.4 GaAs and InP Transistors for High‐Frequency Devices 13 1.5.5 Infrared Detectors 14 1.5.6 Photovoltaic and Thermophotovoltaic Devices 14 1.6 Health and Safety Considerations in MOVPE 15 1.7 Conclusions 16 References 16 2 Fundamental Aspects of MOVPE 19G.B. Stringfellow 2.1 Introduction 19 2.2 Thermodynamics 20 2.2.1 Thermodynamics of MOVPE Growth 20 2.2.2 Solid Composition 24 2.2.3 Phase Separation 29 2.2.4 Ordering 31 2.3 Kinetics 35 2.3.1 Mass Transport 35 2.3.2 Precursor Pyrolysis 36 2.3.3 Control of Solid Composition 37 2.4 Surface Processes 40 2.4.1 Surface Reconstruction 41 2.4.2 Atomic‐Level Surface Processes 42 2.4.3 Effects of Surface Processes on Materials Properties 44 2.4.4 Surfactants 46 2.5 Specific Systems 52 2.5.1 AlGaInP 52 2.5.2 Group III Nitrides 53 2.5.3 Novel Alloys 56 2.6 Summary 59 References 60 3 Column III: Phosphides, Arsenides, and Antimonides 71H. Hardtdegen and M. Mikulics 3.1 Introduction 71 3.2 Precursors for Column III Phosphides, Arsenides, and Antimonides 73 3.3 GaAs‐Based Materials 74 3.3.1 (AlGa)As/GaAs Properties and Deposition 74 3.3.2 GaInP, (AlGa)InP/GaAs Properties and Deposition 79 3.4 InP‐Based Materials 82 3.4.1 InP Properties and Deposition 82 3.4.2 AlInAs/GaInAs/AlGaInAs Properties and Deposition 83 3.4.3 AlInAs/GaInAs/InP Heterostructures 84 3.4.4 InxGa1–xAsyP1–y Properties and Deposition 84 3.5 Column III Antimonides Properties and Deposition 86 3.5.1 Deposition of InSb, GaSb, and AlSb 87 3.5.2 Deposition of Ternary Column III Alloys (AlGa)Sb and (GaIn)Sb 89 3.5.3 Deposition of Ternary Column V Alloys In(AsSb), GaAsSb 89 3.5.4 Deposition of Quaternary Alloys 90 3.5.5 Epitaxy of Electronic Device Structures 90 3.5.6 Epitaxy of Optoelectronic Device Structures 95 3.6 In Situ Optical Characterization/Growth Control 100 3.7 Conclusions 100 References 101 4 Nitride Semiconductors 109A. Dadgar and M. Weyers 4.1 Introduction 109 4.2 Properties of III‐Nitrides 110 4.3 Challenges in the Growth of III‐Nitrides 111 4.3.1 Lattice and Thermal Mismatch 111 4.3.2 Ternary Alloys: Miscibility and Compositional Homogeneity 113 4.3.3 Gas‐Phase Prereactions 115 4.3.4 Doping of III‐Nitrides 117 4.4 Substrates 120 4.4.1 Heteroepitaxy on Foreign Substrates 122 4.4.2 GaN Growth on Sapphire 125 4.4.3 III‐N Growth on SiC 126 4.4.4 GaN Growth on Silicon 127 4.5 MOVPE Growth Technology 130 4.5.1 Precursors 130 4.5.2 Reactors and In Situ Monitoring 130 4.6 Economic Importance 136 4.6.1 Optoelectronic Devices 137 4.6.2 Electronic Devices 138 4.7 Conclusions 138 References 138 5 Metamorphic Growth and Multijunction III‐V Solar Cells 149N.H. Karam, C.M. Fetzer, X.‐Q. Liu, M.A. Steiner, and K.L. Schulte 5.1 Introduction to MOVPE for Multijunction Solar Cells 149 5.1.1 III‐V PV Solar Cell Opportunities and Applications 149 5.1.2 Metamorphic Multijunction Solar Cells 151 5.1.3 Reactor Technology for Metamorphic Epitaxy 154 5.2 Upright Metamorphic Multijunction (UMM) Solar Cells 154 5.2.1 Introduction and History of Upright Metamorphic Multijunctions 154 5.2.2 MOVPE Growth Considerations of UMM 156 5.2.3 Growth and Device Results 158 5.2.4 Challenges and Future Outlook 162 5.3 Inverted Metamorphic Multijunction (IMM) Solar Cells 162 5.3.1 Introduction and History of Inverted Metamorphic Multijunctions 162 5.3.2 MOVPE Growth Considerations of IMM 164 5.3.3 Growth and Device Results 167 5.3.4 Challenges and Future Outlook 169 5.4 Conclusions 169 References 170 6 Quantum Dots 175E. Hulicius, A. Hospodková, and M. Zíková 6.1 General Introduction to the Topic 175 6.1.1 Definition and History 175 6.1.2 Paradigm of Quantum Dots 176 6.1.3 QD Types 176 6.2 AIIIBV Materials and Structures 178 6.2.1 QDs Embedded in the Structure 178 6.2.2 Semiconductor Materials for Embedded QDs 180 6.3 Growth Procedures 181 6.3.1 Comparison of MBE‐ and MOVPE‐Grown QDs 181 6.3.2 Growth Parameters 182 6.3.3 QD Surrounding Layers 185 6.4 In Situ Measurements 193 6.4.1 Reflectance Anisotropy Spectroscopy of QD Growth 193 6.4.2 Other Supporting In Situ Measurements 197 6.5 Structure Characterization 198 6.5.1 Optical: Photo‐, Magnetophoto‐, Electro‐luminescence, and Spin Detection 198 6.5.2 Microscopies – AFM, TEM, XSTM, BEEM/BEES 200 6.5.3 Electrical: Photocurrent, Capacitance Measurements 202 6.6 Applications 203 6.6.1 QD Lasers, Optical Amplifiers, and LEDs 204 6.6.2 QD Detectors, FETs, Photovoltaics, and Memories 205 6.7 Summary 208 6.8 Future Perspectives 208 Acknowledgment 209 References 209 7 III‐V Nanowires and Related Nanostructures: From Nitrides to Antimonides 217H.J. Joyce 7.1 Introduction to Nanowires and Related Nanostructures 217 7.2 Geometric and Crystallographic Properties of III‐V Nanowires 219 7.2.1 Crystal Phase 219 7.2.2 Growth Direction, Morphology, and Side‐Facets 220 7.3 Particle‐Assisted MOVPE of Nanowires 222 7.3.1 The Phase of the Particle 222 7.3.2 The Role of the Particle 224 7.3.3 Axial and Radial Growth Modes 226 7.3.4 Self‐Assisted Growth 228 7.4 Selective‐Area MOVPE of Nanowires and Nanostructures 228 7.4.1 The Role of the Mask 229 7.4.2 Axial and Radial Growth Modes 230 7.5 Alternative Techniques for MOVPE of Nanowires 231 7.6 Novel Applications of Nanowires 231 7.7 Concluding Remarks 233 References 234 8 Monolithic III/V integration on (001) Si substrate 241B. Kunert and K. Volz 8.1 Introduction 241 8.2 III/V‐Si Interface 243 8.2.1 Si Surfaces 243 8.2.2 Interface Formation in the Presence of Impurities and MO Precursors 247 8.2.3 Atomic III/V on Si Interface Structure 249 8.2.4 Antiphase Domains 251 8.2.5 III/V Growth on Si(001) 252 8.3 Heteroepitaxy of Bulk Layers on Si 255 8.3.1 Lattice‐Matched Growth on Si 257 8.3.2 Metamorphic Growth on Blanket Si 258 8.3.3 Selective‐Area Growth (SAG) on Si 264 8.4 Conclusions 282 References 282 9 MOVPE Growth of Cadmium Mercury Telluride and Applications 293C.D. Maxey, P. Capper, and I.M. Baker 9.1 Requirement for Epitaxy 293 9.2 History 294 9.3 Substrate Choices 295 9.3.1 Orientation 296 9.3.2 Substrate Material 296 9.4 Reactor Design 297 9.4.1 Process Abatement Systems 298 9.5 Process Parameters 299 9.6 Metalorganic Sources 299 9.7 Uniformity 300 9.8 Reproducibility 302 9.9 Doping 302 9.10 Defects 304 9.11 Annealing 307 9.12 In Situ Monitoring 308 9.13 Background for Applications of MOVPE MCT 308 9.13.1 Introduction to Infrared Imaging and Atmospheric Windows 308 9.13.2 MCT Infrared Detector Market in the Modern Era 309 9.14 Manufacturing Technology for MOVPE Photodiode Arrays 311 9.14.1 Mesa Heterojunction Devices (MHJ) 311 9.14.2 Wafer‐Scale Processing 312 9.15 Advanced MCT Technologies 312 9.15.1 Small‐Pixel Technology 313 9.15.2 Higher Operating Temperature (HOT) Device Structures 313 9.15.3 Two‐Color Array Technology 314 9.15.4 Nonequilibrium Device Structures 316 9.16 MOVPE MCT for Scientific Applications 316 9.16.1 Linear‐Mode Avalanche Photodiode Arrays (LmAPDs) in MOVPE 316 9.17 Conclusions and Future Trends for MOVPE MCT Arrays 320 Definitions 321 References 322 10 Cadmium Telluride and Related II‐VI Materials 325G. Kartopu and S.J.C. Irvine 10.1 Introduction and Historical Background 325 10.2 CdTe Homoepitaxy 327 10.3 CdTe Heteroepitaxy 327 10.3.1 InSb 327 10.3.2 Sapphire 328 10.3.3 GaAs 329 10.3.4 Silicon 330 10.4 Low‐Temperature Growth and Alternative Precursors 330 10.5 Photoassisted MOVPE 332 10.6 Plasma‐Assisted MOVPE 333 10.7 Polycrystalline MOCVD 333 10.8 In Situ Monitoring of CdTe 334 10.8.1 Mechanisms for Laser Reflectance (LR) Monitoring 335 10.9 MOCVD of CdTe for Planar Solar Cells 337 10.9.1 CdS and CdZnS Window Layers 338 10.9.2 CdTe Absorber Layer 338 10.9.3 CdCl2 Treatment Layer 342 10.9.4 Photovoltaic Planar Devices 343 10.10 Core‐Shell Nanowire Photovoltaic Devices 345 10.11 Inline MOCVD for Scaling of CdTe 347 10.12 MOCVD of CdTe for Radiation Detectors 350 References 351 11 ZnO and Related Materials 355V. Muñoz‐Sanjosé and S.J.C. Irvine 11.1 Introduction 355 11.2 Sources for the MOCVD Growth of ZnO and Related Materials 356 11.2.1 Metalorganic Zinc Precursors 356 11.2.2 Metalorganic Cadmium Precursors 360 11.2.3 Metalorganic Magnesium Precursors 360 11.2.4 Precursors for Oxygen 361 11.2.5 Precursors for Doping 363 11.3 Substrates for the MOCVD Growth of ZnO and Related Materials 364 11.3.1 ZnO Single Crystals and ZnO Templates as Substrates 365 11.3.2 Sapphire (Al2O3) 367 11.3.3 Silicon 369 11.3.4 Glass Substrates 372 11.4 Some Techniques for the MOCVD Growth of ZnO and Related Materials 373 11.4.1 Atmospheric and Low‐Pressure Conditions in Conventional MOCVD Systems 374 11.4.2 MOCVD‐Assisted Processes 376 11.5 Crystal Growth of ZnO and Related Materials 380 11.5.1 Crystal Growth by MOCVD of ZnO Layers 380 11.5.2 Crystal Growth of ZnO Nanostructures 393 11.5.3 Crystal Growth of ZnO‐Related Materials 398 11.5.4 Doping of ZnO and Related Materials 400 11.6 Conclusions 405 Acknowledgments 406 References 406 12 Epitaxial Systems for III‐V and III‐Nitride MOVPE 423W. Lundin and R. Talalaev 12.1 Introduction 423 12.2 Typical Engineering Solutions Inside MOVPE Tools 424 12.2.1 Gas‐Blending System 424 12.2.2 Exhaust System 433 12.2.3 Reactors 435 12.3 Reactors for MOVPE of III‐V Materials 438 12.3.1 General Features of III‐V MOVPE 438 12.3.2 From Simple Horizontal Flow to Planetary Reactors 439 12.3.3 Close‐Coupled Showerhead (CCS) Reactors 445 12.3.4 Rotating‐Disk Reactors 447 12.4 Reactors for MOVPE of III‐N Materials 451 12.4.1 Principal Differences between MOVPE of Classical III‐Vs and III‐Ns 451 12.4.2 Rotating‐Disk Reactors 454 12.4.3 Planetary Reactors 455 12.4.4 CCS Reactors 458 12.4.5 Horizontal Flow Reactors for III‐N MOVPE 459 12.5 Twenty‐Five Years of Commercially Available III‐N MOVPE Reactor Evolution 462 References 464 13 Ultrapure Metal‐Organic Precursors for MOVPE 467D.V. Shenai‐Khatkhate 13.1 Introduction 467 13.1.1 MOVPE Precursor Classes and Impurities 468 13.2 Stringent Requirements for Suitable MOVPE Precursors 472 13.3 Synthesis and Purification Strategies for Ultrapure MOVPE Precursors 472 13.3.1 Synthetic Strategies for Ultrapure MOVPE Precursors 472 13.3.2 Purification Strategies for MOVPE Precursors 476 13.4 MOVPE Precursors for III‐V Compound Semiconductors 483 13.4.1 Group III MOVPE Precursors 483 13.4.2 Group V MOVPE Precursors 488 13.5 MOVPE Precursors for II‐VI Compound Semiconductors 493 13.5.1 Group II MOVPE Precursors 493 13.5.2 Group VI MOVPE Precursors 496 13.6 MOVPE Dopants for Compound Semiconductors 499 13.7 Environment, Health, and Safety (EHS) Aspects of MOVPE Precursors 500 13.7.1 General Aspects and Considerations 500 13.7.2 Employee and Environment Exposure Aspects 501 13.7.3 Employee and Workplace Exposure Limits 502 13.8 Conclusions and Future Trends 502 Acknowledgments 503 References 503 14 Future Aspects of MOCVD Technology for Epitaxial Growth of Semiconductors 507T. Detchprohm, J.‐H. Ryou, X. Li, and R.D. Dupuis 14.1 Introduction – Looking Back 507 14.2 Future Equipment Development 510 14.2.1 Production MOCVD 510 14.2.2 R&D MOCVD 511 14.2.3 MOCVD for Ultrawide‐Bandgap III‐Nitrides 512 14.2.4 MOCVD for Emerging Materials 513 14.2.5 Democratization of MOCVD 514 14.3 Future Applications for MOCVD Research in Semiconductor Materials 515 14.3.1 Heteroepitaxy 515 14.3.2 Nanostructural Materials 527 14.3.3 Poly, Amorphous, and Other Materials 532 14.4 Past, Present, and Future Commercial Applications 535 14.4.1 LEDs 535 14.4.2 Lasers 536 14.4.3 OEICs 536 14.4.4 High‐Speed Electronics 536 14.4.5 High‐Power Electronics 537 14.4.6 Solar Cells 537 14.4.7 Detectors 538 14.5 Summary and Conclusions 538 Acknowledgments 539 References 539 Index 549

Read more less

Book SynopsisConnects knowledge about synthesis, properties, and applications of novel carbon materials and carbon-based composites This book provides readers with new knowledge on the synthesis, properties, and applications of novel carbon materials and carbon-based composites, including thin films of silicon carbide, carbon nitrite, and their related composites. It examines the direct bottom-up synthesis of the carbon-based composite systems and their potential applications, and discusses the growth mechanism of the composite structures. It features applications that range from mechanical, electronic, chemical, biochemical, medical, and environmental to functional devices. Novel Carbon Materials and Composites: Synthesis, Properties and Applications covers an overview of the synthesis, properties, and applications of novel carbon materials and composites. Especially, it covers everything from chemical vapor deposition of silicon carbide films and their electrochemicTable of ContentsList of Contributors xi Series Preface xiii Preface xv 1 Cubic Silicon Carbide: Growth, Properties, and Electrochemical Applications 1Nianjun Yang and Xin Jiang 1.1 General Overview of Silicon Carbide 1 1.1.1 SiC Properties 1 1.1.2 SiC Applications 3 1.1.3 Scope of this Chapter 4 1.2 Synthesis of Silicon Carbide 4 1.2.1 Acheson Process 4 1.2.2 Physical Vapor Transport 5 1.2.3 Chemical Vapor Deposition 5 1.3 Properties of Cubic Silicon Carbide 9 1.3.1 Surface Morphology 9 1.3.2 Electrochemical Properties 12 1.3.3 Surface Chemistry 16 1.3.3.1 Surface Terminations 16 1.3.3.2 Surface Functionalization 17 1.4 Electrochemical Applications of Cubic Silicon Carbide Films 20 1.4.1 Electrochemical Sensors 20 1.4.2 Biosensors 20 1.4.3 Energy Storage 21 1.4.4 Other Applications 24 1.5 Conclusions 24 Acknowledgements 26 References 26 2 Application of Silicon Carbide in Photocatalysis 35Xiao-Ning Guo, Xi-Li Tong and Xiang-Yun Guo 2.1 Preparation of SiC with High Surface Area 36 2.1.1 Carbon Template Method 37 2.1.2 Sol-gel Method 40 2.1.3 Polycarbosilane Pyrolysis Method 42 2.2 Photocatalytic Water-Splitting 43 2.3 Photocatalytic Degradation of Pollutants 54 2.4 Photocatalytic Selective Organic Transformations 57 2.5 Photocatalytic CO2 Reduction 66 References 69 3 Application of Silicon Carbide in Electrocatalysis 73Xiao-Ning Guo, Xi-Li Tong and Xiang-Yun Guo 3.1 Electrochemical Sensors 73 3.2 Direct Methanol Fuel Cells 76 3.3 Dye-sensitized Solar Cells 83 3.4 Lithium-ion Batteries 86 3.5 Supercapacitors 88 References 95 4 Carbon Nitride Fabrication and Its Water-Splitting Applications 99Yanhong Liu, Baodong Mao and Weidong Shi 4.1 Introduction 99 4.2 Preparation of Pristine g-C3N4 100 4.2.1 Effect of Precursors 102 4.2.2 Effect of Reaction Parameters 102 4.3 Bandgap Engineering by Doping and Copolymerization 104 4.3.1 Doping of g-C3N4 104 4.3.1.1 C-doping and N-vacancy 104 4.3.1.2 S-doping 106 4.3.1.3 P-doping 106 4.3.1.4 Metal doping 107 4.3.2 Copolymerization of g-C3N4 107 4.4 Nanostructure Engineering of g-C3N4 109 4.4.1 Ordered Mesoporous Nanostructures of g-C3N4 109 4.4.1.1 Hard Templating Methods 109 4.4.1.2 Soft Templating Methods 110 4.4.1.3 Template-free Methods 112 4.4.2 Exfoliation to 2D Nanosheets of g-C3N4 113 4.4.3 0D Quantum Dots of g-C3N4 115 4.5 g-C3N4 Composite Photocatalysts 117 4.5.1 Metal/g-C3N4 Heterojunctions 117 4.5.2 Graphitic Carbon/g-C3N4 Heterojunctions 120 4.5.3 Semiconductors/g-C3N4 Heterojunctions 122 4.5.3.1 Type-II Heterojunction 123 4.5.3.2 Z-scheme 124 4.5.3.3 0D/2D Heterostructures 124 4.5.3.4 g-C3N4 Homojunctions 125 4.5.3.5 Dyes Sensitization 126 4.5.4 Deposition of Earth-Abundant Cocatalysts 128 4.6 Conclusions and Outlook 130 References 132 5 Carbon Materials for Supercapacitors 137Yanfang Gao, Zijun Shi and Lijun Li 5.1 Introduction 137 5.2 Affecting Factors 139 5.2.1 Specific Surface Area 139 5.2.2 Pore Size 139 5.2.3 Surface Functional Groups 141 5.2.4 Electrical Conductivity 141 5.3 Electrolyte 142 5.3.1 Aqueous Electrolyte 142 5.3.2 Organic Electrolyte 143 5.3.3 Ionic Liquid Electrolytes 143 5.4 Electrode Materials 143 5.4.1 Activated Carbons 143 5.4.2 Graphene 148 5.4.3 Carbon Nanotubes 152 5.4.4 Carbide-Derived Carbon 157 5.4.5 Carbon Aerogels 159 5.5 Conclusion and Outlook 161 References 161 6 Diamond/𝛃-SiC Composite Films 169Xin Jiang, Hao Zhuang and Haiyuan Fu 6.1 Introduction 169 6.2 Deposition Instruments 169 6.3 Conditions of the CVD Process 170 6.4 Film Quantity (Phase Distribution, Orientation, and Crystallinity) and Characterization 172 6.5 Growth Mechanism 177 6.6 Applications 179 6.6.1 Improvement of the Film Adhesion 179 6.6.2 Biosensor Applications 181 6.6.3 Preferential Protein Absorption 186 6.6.4 Diamond Networks 192 6.7 Conclusions and Future Aspects 196 References 198 7 Diamond/Graphite Nanostructured Film: Synthesis, Properties, and Applications 205Nan Huang, Zhaofeng Zhai, Yuning Guo, Qingquan Tian and Xin Jiang 7.1 Introduction 205 7.2 Synthesis of the D/G Nanostructured Film 206 7.3 Growth Mechanism of the D/G Nanostructured Film 208 7.4 Properties and Applications of the D/G Nanostructured Film 210 7.4.1 Mechanical Properties 210 7.4.2 Electrochemical Properties 212 7.4.3 Hybrid D/G Film Electrode for the Detection of Trace Heavy Metal Ions 214 7.4.4 Hybrid D/G Film Electrochemical Biosensor for DNA Detection 216 7.5 Conclusions 218 Acknowledgment 219 References 219 8 Carbon Nanodot Composites: Fabrication, Properties, and Environmental and Energy Applications 223Hui Huang, Yang Liu and Zhenhui Kang 8.1 Introduction 223 8.2 Synthesis, Structure, and Properties 224 8.2.1 Synthesis of C-dots 224 8.2.2 Composition and Structure 225 8.2.3 Properties 226 8.2.3.1 Absorption 226 8.2.3.2 Photoluminescence 227 8.2.3.3 Photoinduced Electron Transfer Property 227 8.2.3.4 Electrochemiluminescence 227 8.2.3.5 Proton adsorption 229 8.2.3.6 Toxicity 229 8.3 C-dot-based Functional Nanocomposites 229 8.3.1 C-dots in Mesoporous Structures 229 8.3.2 C-dots in Polymers 232 8.3.3 C-dots as Building Blocks for Mesoporous Structures 232 8.4 Catalysis Application 235 8.4.1 C-dots as Photocatalysts 235 8.4.2 C-dots as Electrocatalysts 239 8.4.3 Photocatalyst Design Based on C-dots 241 8.4.3.1 Metal Nanoparticle/C-dots Complex Photocatalyst 241 8.4.3.2 C-dots/Ag/Ag3PW12O40 Photocatalysts 242 8.4.3.3 C-dots/TiO2 Photocatalysts 243 8.4.3.4 CDs/Ag3PO4 Photocatalysts 244 8.4.3.5 CDs/Cu2O Photocatalysts 244 8.4.3.6 C-dots/C3N4 Photocatalysts 245 8.4.3.7 C-dots/Enzyme Photocatalysts 245 8.4.4 Photoelectrochemical Catalyst Design Based on C-dots 246 8.4.5 Modulation of Electron/Energy Transfer States at the TiO2–C-dots Interface 248 8.4.6 Electrocatalyst Design Based on C-dots 249 8.4.7 Surface Modifications Towards Catalyst Design 252 8.5 C-Dots for Sensing and Detection 252 8.5.1 PL Sensors 252 8.5.2 Electronic, Electrochemiluminescent and Electrochemical Sensors 255 8.5.3 C-dots for Humidity and Temperature Sensing 257 8.6 C-dots for Solar Energy 257 8.7 Application in Supercapacitors and Lithium-Ion Batteries 263 8.8 C-Dots Nanocomposite for Efficient Lubrication 264 8.9 Outlook 267 References 269 Index 275

Read more less

Book SynopsisAdvanced surfaces enriches the high-throughput engineering of physical and chemical phenomenon in relatin to electrical, magnetic, electronics, thermal and optical controls, as well as large surface areas, protective coatings against water loss and excessive gas exchange.Table of ContentsPreface xvii Part 1 Functional Coatings and Adhesives 1 Bio-inspired Coatings and Adhesives 3 Saurabh Das and B. Kollbe Ahn 1.1 Introduction 4 1.2 The Interfacial Biochemistry of a Mussel Adhesive 4 1.3 Tough Coating Proteins in the Mussel Thread 12 1.4 Mussel-inspired Coatings and Adhesives 15 1.5 Conclusions and Future Research Avenues for Bio-inspired Adhesives and Coatings 25 References 26 2 Advancement of Surface by Applying a Seemingly Simple Sol–gel Oxide Materials 33 Justyna Krzak, Beata Borak, Anna Łukowiak, Anna Donesz-Sikorska, Bartosz Babiarczuk, Krzysztof Marycz and Anna Szczurek 2.1 Introduction 33 2.2 Are Simple Sol–gel Oxides Only Simple Materials? 35 2.3 Hybrid Coating Materials 55 2.4 Functionalized Oxide Coatings 62 2.5 Coatings for Cells 70 2.6 Sol–gel Materials as Interface Materials 75 2.7 Conclusions 81 References 83 3 Femtosecond Laser Texturing of Bio-based Polymer Films for Surface Functionalization 97 A. Daskalova 3.1 Introduction 98 3.2 Naturally Derived Biomaterials 100 3.3 Surface Modification Features 102 3.4 Mechanisms of Laser–tissue Interaction 104 3.5 Laser-based Methods for Surface Treatment of Biomaterials 113 3.6 Conclusion 134 Acknowledgments 135 References 135 4 Engineered Electromagnetic Surfaces and Their Applications 141 Mirko Barbuto, Filiberto Bilotti, Alessio Monti, Davide Ramaccia and Alessandro Toscano 4.1 Introduction 142 4.2 Impedance Boundary Condition 143 4.3 Metasurfaces Based on Metallic Strips 145 4.4 Metasurfaces Based on Circular Inclusions 155 4.5 Metasurfaces Based on Crossed Dipoles 163 References 169 5 Structural and Hydroxyapatite-like Surface Functionalization of Advanced Biomimetic Prototype Interface for RA Endoprostheses to Enhance Osteoconduction and Osteointegration 175 Ryszard Uklejewski, Piotr Rogala and Mariusz Winiecki 5.1 Introduction 176 5.2 Biomimetic Multi-spiked Connecting Scaffold Prototype – The Promising Breakthrough in Bone-implant Advanced Interfacing in Joint Resurfacing Endoprostheses Fixation Technique 180 5.3 Bioengineering Design of the MSC-scaffold Prototype, Its Additive Manufacturing and Post-SLM_processing of Bone Contacting Surfaces 183 5.4 Structural Pro-osteoconduction Functionalization of the MSC-scaffold Interfacing System for Biomimetic Entirely Cementless RA Endoprostheses 208 5.5 Hydroxyapatite-like Functionalization of Bone Contacting Surfaces of the MSC-scaffold to Enhance Osteointegration 220 5.6 Conclusions 229 Acknowledgments 232 References 232 Part 2 Engineering of Nanosurfaces 6 Biosynthesis of Metal Nanoparticles and Graphene 243 Ujjal Kumar Sur 6.1 Introduction 244 6.2 Synthesis of Gold and Silver Nanoparticles Using Microorganisms 257 6.3 Synthesis of Gold and Silver Nanoparticles Using Fruit Extract 263 6.4 Synthesis of Gold and Silver Nanoparticles Using Plant Extract 265 6.5 Synthesis of Gold and Silver Nanoparticles Using Honey 273 6.6 Synthesis of Gold and Silver Nanoparticles Using Animal Tissue 273 6.7 Synthesis of Semiconductor Nanoparticles from Plant, Fruit Extract and Honey 274 6.8 Biosynthesis of Other Nanoparticles 276 6.9 Biosynthesis of Graphene 279 6.10 Applications of Metal Nanoparticles and Graphene 283 6.11 Future Trends and Prospects 286 6.12 Conclusions 287 Acknowledgements 288 References 289 7 Surface Modifiers for the Generation of Advanced Nanomaterials 297 Pınar Akkuş Süt, Melike Belenli, Özlem Şen, Melis Emanet, Mine Altunbek and Mustafa Çulha 7.1 Introduction 297 7.2 Most Commonly Used NMs and Their Possible Surface Chemistry 298 7.3 Parameters Influencing NP Functionalization 298 7.4 Modification Strategies 304 7.5 The Potential Problems During NPs Modifications 316 7.6 Surface Modifiers 317 7.7 Conclusions 334 References 335 8 Nanoassisted Functional Modulation of Enzymes: Concept and Applications 349 Arka Mukhopadhyay and Hirak K. Patra 8.1 Introduction 349 8.2 Enzyme Modifying Nanomaterials 352 8.3 Regulations of Enzyme Properties by Several Nanomaterials 365 8.4 Conclusions 376 Abbreviations 376 References 377 9 Electrospun Fibers Based on Biopolymers 385 Alicia Mujica-Garcia, Agueda Sonseca, Marina P. Arrieta, Maysa Yusef, Daniel López, Enrique Gimenez, José M. Kenny and Laura Peponi 9.1 Electrospinning: Background and Set-up 386 9.2 Biopolymers 393 9.3 Electrospinning of Biopolymer Nanofibers 396 9.4 Electrospun Fibers Based on Biopolymers Blends 408 9.5 Bionanocomposites Electrospun Fibers 414 9.6 Conclusions 423 Acknowledgments 423 References 424 10 Nanostructured Materials as Biosensor Transducers: Achievements and Future Developments 439 N.F. Starodub, K.E. Shavanova, N.F. Shpyrka, M.M. Mel’nichenko and R.V. Viter 10.1 Introduction 440 10.2 Biosensors According to the Main Principles of Their Classification 442 10.3 Ion-selective Field Effect Transistors-based Biosensors: Origins and Perspective Development 446 10.4 Optical Biosensors 461 Acknowledgments 488 References 488 Part 3 High-tech Surface, Characterisation, and New Applications 11 Optical Emission Spectroscopy Investigation of Direct Current Micro-plasma for Carbon Structures Growth 497 Dana-Cristina Toncu 11.1 Theoretical Background of Optical Emission Spectroscopy in Plasma Diagnosis 498 11.2 Direct Current Micro-plasma Experimental Investigation for Carbon Structures 500 11.3 Optical Emission Spectroscopy Results 502 Acknowledgement 514 References 515 12 Advanced Titanium Surfaces and Its Alloys for Orthopedic and Dental Applications Based on Digital SEM Imaging Analysis 517 Sahar A. Fadlallah, Amira S. Ashour and Nilanjan Dey 12.1 Introduction 518 12.2 Titanium Implants Basic Concepts 521 12.3 Automated Nanostructures Image Analysis-based Morphology 540 12.4 Conclusion 550 References 551 13 Deep-blue Organic Light-emitting Diodes: From Fluorophores to Phosphors for High-efficiency Devices 561 Frédéric Dumur 13.1 Introduction 591 13.2 Fluorescent Emitters 565 13.3 Phosphorescent Emitters 618 13.4 Future Perspectives and Ongoing Challenges 621 References 622 14 Plasma–material Interactions Problems and Dust Creation and Re-suspension in Case of Accidents in Nuclear Fusion Plants: A New Challenge for Reactors like ITER and DEMO 635 A. Malizia, L.A. Poggi, J.F. Ciparisse, S. Talebzadeh, M. Gelfusa, A. Murari and P. Gaudio 14.1 Introduction 636 14.2 Materials for Nuclear Fusion Plants 638 14.3 Radioactive Dust in Nuclear Fusion Plants: Security Problems in Case of Re-suspension 660 14.4 Conclusion 687 References 689 Index 703

Read more less

Book SynopsisToxicology of Nanoparticles and Nanomaterials in Human, Terrestrial and Aquatic Systems An indispensable compendium detailing the toxicology of nanoparticles with a focus on mechanisms, emerging issues, and new approaches Toxicology of Nanoparticles and Nanomaterials in Human, Terrestrial and Aquatic Systems provides authoritative information on the toxicology of ultrafine and nanoparticulate matter that contaminate terrestrial or aquatic environments and present unique challenges in applied public health and toxicological research. Detailed chapters by a panel of world-renowned experts examine the complementary and dynamic interdependence of aquatic, terrestrial, and human systems and the toxicological impacts on exposure to engineered and manufactured nanoparticles and nanomaterials. Organized into four sections, the book opens with a thorough overview of the field, including known challenges and the necessity for current research activity. The second section describes terrestrialTable of ContentsList of Contributors xv Foreword xxi Editor Biography xxiii Section I Introduction 1 1 A One Health Perspective and Introduction 3Marc A. Williams and Gunda Reddy 1.1 Background 3 1.2 Structural and Logical Organization of the Book 9 Acknowledgments 15 References 15 Section II Terrestrial and Aquatic Systems 19 2 Ecosafety of Nanomaterials in the Aquatic Environment 21Maria J. Bebianno, Thiago L. Rocha, José P. Pinheiro, Margarida Ribau Teixeira, and Fernanda Cassio 2.1 Introduction 21 2.2 Inputs of NMs to the Aquatic Environment 23 2.3 HowWastewater Treatment Processes Act in the Removal of Nanomaterials? 23 2.4 So What Is Expected to Occur in WWTPs Processes? 24 2.5 The Importance of Understanding Speciation of NMs 27 2.6 Ecotoxicological Effects of NMs in Freshwater Organisms 30 2.7 Ecotoxicological Effects of NMs in Marine Organisms 34 2.8 Interactive Effects of NMs with Other Contaminants 38 2.9 Environmental Risk Assessment (ERA) of NMs 42 Acknowledgments 43 References 44 3 Changes in Toxicant Physicochemistry and Bioavailability During Sorption/Desorption Processes with TiO2 Nanoparticles in the Aqueous Phase 59Danae Patsiou, Martin R. S. McCoustra, Teresa F. Fernandes, and Theodore B. Henry 3.1 Introduction 59 3.2 Properties of TiO2 NPs in the Aqueous Phase 61 3.2.1 Agglomeration 61 3.2.2 Oxidation of TiO2 NPs by UV Radiation 62 3.3 Sorption of Organic Substances to TiO2 NPs 64 3.3.1 Influence of Organic Matter on Sorption 64 3.3.2 Influence of TiO2 NP Surface Area on Sorption 64 3.3.3 Use of Bioavailability to Inform on Sorption of Organic Compounds on TiO2 NPs 66 3.4 Conclusions 72 References 73 4 Behavior, Fate, and Toxicity of Engineered Nanoparticles in Estuarine and Coastal Environments 79Daniel M. Lyons and Petra Burić 4.1 Introduction 79 4.2 Types of Nanoparticles: Sources/Products/Release Routes 80 4.3 Behavior of Nanoparticles in the Water Column 82 4.4 Biota, Trophic Transfer, Toxicity, and Mechanisms 84 4.5 Measurement Issues and Regulatory Environment 94 4.6 Modeling 94 4.7 Knowledge Gaps and Research Prospects 95 References 96 5 Interactive Effects of Nanomaterials with Other Contaminants on Aquatic Organisms: nTiO2 as a Case Study 101Laura Canesi, Camilla Della Torre, Teresa Balbi, and Ilaria Corsi 5.1 Introduction 101 5.2 Interactive Effects of NPs with Other Contaminants in Aquatic Organisms: nTiO2 as a Case Study 104 5.3 Interactions Between nTiO2 and Other Contaminants in Marine Invertebrates: The Example of the Bivalve Mytilus 106 5.3.1 Effects of nTiO2 and Cd2+ 106 5.3.2 Effects of nTiO2 and TCDD 109 5.4 Interactions Between nTiO2 and Other Contaminants in Marine Fish: The Example of the European Sea Bass (Dicentrarchus labrax) 111 5.5 Interactive Effects of NPs with Other Contaminants in Marine Species: Importance of Exposure Media 114 5.6 Concluding Remarks 115 Acknowledgments 115 References 115 6 Soil Nano-ecotoxicology: What Have We Learned from Standard Tests and What May We Be Missing? 121David J. Spurgeon, Elma Lahive, Carolin Schultz, and Claus Svendsen 6.1 Introduction 121 6.2 Development of Standard Test Methods and Their Application to Nanomaterials 122 6.3 From Soil Ecotoxicological Tests to Risk Assessment 127 6.4 Looking Beyond Standardized Tests Toward Effects in Ecosystems 128 6.4.1 Choice of Test Species 129 6.4.2 Short-Term and Long-Term Effects of Particle “Aging” on Toxicity in Natural Environments 131 6.4.3 How Soil Properties Interact with Nanomaterial Properties to Determine Bioavailability 133 6.4.4 Nanomaterial Bioaccumulation and Food Chain Transfer 135 6.4.5 Short-Term Tests Predict Long-Term Effects 136 6.5 Standard Ecotoxicological Tests: A Blessing and A Curse? 138 Acknowledgments 139 References 140 7 Impacts of Magnetic Iron Oxide Nanoparticles in Terrestrial and Aquatic Environments 147Renato Grillo and Leonardo F. Fraceto 7.1 Introduction 147 7.1.1 Magnetic Nanoparticles and Their Properties 147 7.1.2 Commercial Importance and Applications of IONPs 149 7.1.3 Potential Toxic Effects of Magnetic Iron Oxide Nanoparticles 151 7.2 Gaps and Obstacles 155 7.3 Conclusions 158 Acknowledgments 158 References 158 8 Carbon Nanotubes: Sublethal Effects and Unique Mechanisms of Toxicity in Aquatic Species 165Tara Sabo-Attwood, Christine Ngan, Candice Lavelle, Jaime Plazas-Tuttle, and Navid B. Saleh 8.1 Carbon Nanotubes in Aquatic Environments 165 8.2 Classical Toxicity: What We Have Learned 167 8.3 Unique Mechanisms and Effects 168 8.3.1 Nutrient Depletion 168 8.3.2 Immune Modulation 170 8.3.3 Influence on Co-contaminants 172 8.4 Next-Generation Nanomaterials: Nanohybrids 174 8.4.1 Variation in Nanohybrid Composition and Environmentally Relevant Properties 174 8.4.2 Toxic Responses Demonstrated by NHs 175 8.5 Future Perspectives 176 Acknowledgments 176 References 176 9 Surface Reactivity of Anatase and Rutile Samples: Relationship with Toxicity on Aquatic Organisms 187Charlotte Hurel, Norbert Jordan, Ulrike Gerber, Stephan Weiss, Bernd Kubier, and Reinhard Kleeberg 9.1 Introduction 187 9.2 TiO2 Solid Phase Characterization 190 9.3 Potentiometric Titrations 194 9.4 Electrophoresis Measurements 196 9.4.1 In NaNO3 196 9.4.2 In Synthetic Freshwater (SFW) 198 9.5 Size Measurements of the Agglomerates 198 9.5.1 In NaNO3 199 9.5.2 In Synthetic Freshwater (SFW) 199 9.6 Ecotoxicity Tests 201 9.6.1 Rotifer Toxicity Test 201 9.6.2 Microcrustacean Toxicity Test 203 9.6.3 Diatoms Toxicity Test 204 9.7 Discussion 206 9.8 Conclusions 208 Acknowledgments 208 References 209 10 Cardiorespiratory Toxicity of Nanoparticles in Aquatic Environments 213Christopher A. Dieni and Tyson J. MacCormack 10.1 Introduction 213 10.2 Cellular and Molecular Mechanisms of Engineered Nanomaterial Toxicity 214 10.2.1 Uptake-Independent Mechanisms 215 10.2.1.1 Accumulation on Cell Surfaces and Interference with Membrane and Transport Functions 216 10.2.1.2 Activation of Cell Surface Inflammatory Receptors 216 10.2.1.3 Uptake-Independent Generation of Reactive Oxygen Species 219 10.2.2 Uptake-Dependent Mechanisms 221 10.2.2.1 Disruption of Ion Transporters by Intact Nanostructures and Ion Products and Physiological Regulation 223 10.2.2.2 Activation of Systemic Immunity 225 10.3 Complement 225 10.4 Phagocytosis 226 10.5 Conclusions and Ecological Perspectives 227 References 228 Section III Human Systems 237 11 Air Pollution and Neurodevelopmental Disorders 239Joshua L. Allen, Carolyn Klocke, Keith Morris-Schaffer, Katherine Conrad, Marissa Sobolewski, and Deborah A. Cory-Slechta 11.1 Air Pollution and the Brain 239 11.1.1 The Brain as a Target of Air Pollution 240 11.2 Air Pollution and Neurodevelopmental Disorders 241 11.2.1 Shared Co-morbidities of Neurodevelopmental Disorders 242 11.2.2 Potential Mechanisms of Air Pollution Associations with Neurodevelopmental Disorders 243 11.2.2.1 Microglial Activation and Inflammation 243 11.2.2.2 Ventriculomegaly, White Matter Damage, and Consequent Interhemispheric Dysconnectivity 244 11.2.2.3 Altered Glutamate and Dopamine 245 11.3 An Animal Model of UFP-Induced Developmental Neuropathology and Behavioral Disorders 245 11.3.1 Developmental CAPS Exposures of Mice Produce Male-Specific Microglial Activation 246 11.3.2 Developmental CAPS Exposures of Mice Produce Male-Specific Ventriculomegaly 247 11.3.3 Developmental CAPS Exposures of Mice Produce Male-Specific White Matter Tract Disruption 247 11.3.3.1 Corpus Callosum Size 248 11.3.3.2 Corpus Callosum Myelination 250 11.3.4 Developmental CAPS Exposures of Mice Elevate Glutamate Levels and Result in Male-Specific Excitatory–Inhibitory Imbalance 250 11.3.5 Developmental CAPS Exposures of Mice Are Associated with Impulsive-Like Behavior 251 11.4 Summary and Conclusions 253 References 256 12 Toxicity of Nanomaterials to the Gastrointestinal Tract 277Penelope A. Rice 12.1 Introduction 277 12.2 GI Physiology and Toxicity Testing 279 12.3 Nanomaterial Toxicity Assessment: Challenges 286 12.4 Toxicity of Specific Nanomaterial Types 289 12.4.1 Titanium Dioxide 289 12.4.2 Silica 305 12.4.3 Nanosilver 311 12.4.4 ZnO Nanoparticles 319 12.4.5 Carbon Nanotubes and Fullerenes 327 12.5 Miscellaneous Nanomaterials 332 12.6 Analysis and Conclusions 337 References 338 13 The Mucosal Microbiome: Impact of Nanoparticles and Nanomaterials 353Katherine M. Williams, Kuppan Gokulan, and Sangeeta Khare 13.1 Introduction 353 13.2 Types of Nanoparticles and Human Exposure 354 13.3 Factors Influencing Nanomaterial/Microbiota Interactions in the Intestinal Mucosal Environment 356 13.3.1 Nanomaterial-Specific Factors 356 13.3.2 Gut Environment-Specific Factors 357 13.3.3 Protein Corona 358 13.4 Nanomaterial Effects on Bacterial Microbiota 358 13.4.1 Metallic NM 361 13.4.1.1 Antibacterial Activity 361 13.4.1.2 Impact in Gut Models 362 13.4.2 Metal Oxide NM 363 13.4.2.1 Antibacterial Activity 363 13.4.2.2 Impact in Gut Models 364 13.4.3 Carbon-Based NM 364 13.4.3.1 Antibacterial Activity 364 13.4.3.2 Impact in Gut Models 366 13.5 Nanomaterial Effects on Viral and Fungal Microbiota 366 13.6 Conclusions 367 13.6.1 Antibacterial Activity of NMs 367 13.6.2 Evidence for NM Effects on Gut Mucosal Microbiota 367 13.6.3 Strategies for Assessing NM–Microbiota Effects 368 13.6.4 Direction for Future Research 370 13.6.5 Conclusion 372 References 372 14 Human Health Impacts and Immunotoxicology of Metal Nanoparticles and Nanomaterials – An Overview 383Gregory P. Nichols and Jason Davis 14.1 Introduction and Background 383 14.2 Welding Fumes as Surrogates for Metal Nanoparticles 384 14.3 Immune-Related Health Effects 385 14.4 Oxidative Stress and Immunologic Effects 386 14.5 Conclusion 387 14.6 Immune-Triggered Human Health Effects of Metal and Metal Oxide Nanoparticles 387 14.7 Immune Interaction 387 14.8 Cellular Mechanisms of Injury 389 14.9 Oxidative Stress 389 14.10 Interaction with Cellular Membranes and Proteins 391 14.11 Disruption of Signaling Pathways 391 14.12 Immune Response 392 14.13 Immunosuppression 392 14.14 Inflammation and Autoimmunity 393 14.15 Sensitivity/Hypersensitivity 394 14.16 Summary 396 References 396 15 Vasculotoxicity of Metal-Based Nanoparticles 401Maria S. Sepúlveda and Jiejun Gao 15.1 Nanoparticles in the Environment 401 15.2 Vascular Development 402 15.3 Critical Issues in Assessing the Toxicity of NPs 403 15.4 Vascular Toxicity of NPs In Vitro 404 15.5 Vascular Toxicity of NPs In Vivo 409 15.6 Movement of NPs Through the Blood Brain Barrier (BBB) 412 15.7 Conclusions 413 List of Abbreviations 413 References 415 Section IV Future Directions and Gaps in the Knowledge 423 16 Knowledge Gaps, Future Directions, and the Emergence of Nanoplastics as an Environmental Threat Pollutant 425Marc A. Williams and Desmond I. Bannon 16.1 Current Concerns and Scope of the Problem 425 16.2 A survey of the Identified Knowledge Gaps and Needs for Future Research 427 16.3 Knowledge Gaps – Aquatic and Terrestrial Ecotoxicology 428 16.4 Knowledge Gaps – Adverse Health Effects in Humans 435 16.5 Emerging Threats and Future Directions 439 16.5.1 Nanoplastics – An Emergent Environmental Threat Pollutant 440 16.6 Conclusions and Other Considerations 444 References 446 Index 453

Read more less